In situ heat treatment from multiple layers of a tar sands formation

[0001] This patent application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent No. 60/925,685 entitled “SYSTEMS AND PROCESSES FOR USE IN SITU HEAT TREATMENT PROCESSES” to Vinegar et al. filed on Apr. 20, 2007, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety, and to U.S. Provisional Patent No. 60/999,839 entitled “SYSTEMS AND PROCESSES FOR USE IN TREATING SUBSURFACE FORMATIONS” to Vinegar et al. filed on Oct. 19, 2007, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0002] This patent application incorporates by reference in its entirety each of U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,688,387 to Wellington et al.; 6,991,036 to Sumnu-Dindoruk et al.; 6,698,515 to Karanikas et al.; 6,880,633 to Wellington et al.; 6,782,947 to de Rouffignac et al; 6,991,045 to Vinegar et al.; 7,073,578 to Vinegar et al.; 7,121,342 to Vinegar et al; and 7,320,364 to Fairbanks. This patent application incorporates by reference in its entirety each of U.S. Patent Application Publication 2007-0133960 to Vinegar et al., U.S. Patent Application Publication 2007-0221377 to Vinegar et al., and U.S. Patent Application Publication 2008-0017380 to Vinegar et al. This patent application incorporates by reference in its entirety U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/975,676 to Vinegar et al.

[0003] The Government has certain rights in the invention pursuant to Agreement Nos. SD 10634 and NFE 062050824 between Sandia National Laboratories (operating under Agreement DE-AC04-94AL85000Sa for the U.S. Department of Energy) and Shell Exploration and Production Company.

[0004] 1. Field of the Invention

[0005] The present invention relates generally to methods and systems for production of hydrocarbons, hydrogen, and/or other products from various subsurface formations such as hydrocarbon containing formations.

[0006] 2. Description of Related Art

[0007] Hydrocarbons obtained from subterranean formations are often used as energy resources, as feedstocks, and as consumer products. Concerns over depletion of available hydrocarbon resources and concerns over declining overall quality of produced hydrocarbons have led to development of processes for more efficient recovery, processing and/or use of available hydrocarbon resources. In situ processes may be used to remove hydrocarbon materials from subterranean formations. Chemical and/or physical properties of hydrocarbon material in a subterranean formation may need to be changed to allow hydrocarbon material to be more easily removed from the subterranean formation. The chemical and physical changes may include in situ reactions that produce removable fluids, composition changes, solubility changes, density changes, phase changes, and/or viscosity changes of the hydrocarbon material in the formation. A fluid may be, but is not limited to, a gas, a liquid, an emulsion, a slurry, and/or a stream of solid particles that has flow characteristics similar to liquid flow.

[0008] During some in situ processes, wax may be used to reduce vapors and/or to encapsulate contaminants in the ground. Wax may be used during remediation of wastes to encapsulate contaminated material. U.S. Pat. No. 7,114,880 to Carter, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,879,110 to Carter, each of which is incorporated herein by reference, describe methods for treatment of contaminants using wax during the remediation procedures.

[0009] In some embodiments, a casing or other pipe system may be placed or formed in a wellbore. U.S. Pat. No. 4,572,299 issued to Van Egmond et al., which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes spooling an electric heater into a well. In some embodiments, components of a piping system may be welded together. Quality of formed wells may be monitored by various techniques. In some embodiments, quality of welds may be inspected by a hybrid electromagnetic acoustic transmission technique known as EMAT. EMAT is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,652,389 to Schaps et al.; 5,760,307 to Latimer et al.; 5,777,229 to Geier et al.; and 6,155,117 to Stevens et al., each of which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.

[0010] In some embodiments, an expandable tubular may be used in a wellbore. Expandable tubulars are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,366,012 to Lohbeck, and 6,354,373 to Vercaemer et al., each of which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.

[0011] Heaters may be placed in wellbores to heat a formation during an in situ process. Examples of in situ processes utilizing downhole heaters are illustrated in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,634,961 to Ljungstrom; 2,732,195 to Ljungstrom; 2,780,450 to Ljungstrom; 2,789,805 to Ljungstrom; 2,923,535 to Ljungstrom; and 4,886,118 to Van Meurs et al.; each of which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.

[0012] Application of heat to oil shale formations is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,923,535 to Ljungstrom and 4,886,118 to Van Meurs et al. Heat may be applied to the oil shale formation to pyrolyze kerogen in the oil shale formation. The heat may also fracture the formation to increase permeability of the formation. The increased permeability may allow formation fluid to travel to a production well where the fluid is removed from the oil shale formation. In some processes disclosed by Ljungstrom, for example, an oxygen containing gaseous medium is introduced to a permeable stratum, preferably while still hot from a preheating step, to initiate combustion.

[0013] A heat source may be used to heat a subterranean formation. Electric heaters may be used to heat the subterranean formation by radiation and/or conduction. An electric heater may resistively heat an element. U.S. Pat. No. 2,548,360 to Germain, which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes an electric heating element placed in a viscous oil in a wellbore. The heater element heats and thins the oil to allow the oil to be pumped from the wellbore. U.S. Pat. No. 4,716,960 to Eastlund et al., which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes electrically heating tubing of a petroleum well by passing a relatively low voltage current through the tubing to prevent formation of solids. U.S. Pat. No. 5,065,818 to Van Egmond, which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes an electric heating element that is cemented into a well borehole without a casing surrounding the heating element.

[0014] U.S. Pat. No. 6,023,554 to Vinegar et al., which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes an electric heating element that is positioned in a casing. The heating element generates radiant energy that heats the casing. A granular solid fill material may be placed between the casing and the formation. The casing may conductively heat the fill material, which in turn conductively heats the formation.

[0015] U.S. Pat. No. 4,570,715 to Van Meurs et al., which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes an electric heating element. The heating element has an electrically conductive core, a surrounding layer of insulating material, and a surrounding metallic sheath. The conductive core may have a relatively low resistance at high temperatures. The insulating material may have electrical resistance, compressive strength, and heat conductivity properties that are relatively high at high temperatures. The insulating layer may inhibit arcing from the core to the metallic sheath. The metallic sheath may have tensile strength and creep resistance properties that are relatively high at high temperatures.

[0016] U.S. Pat. No. 5,060,287 to Van Egmond, which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes an electrical heating element having a copper-nickel alloy core.

[0017] Obtaining permeability in an oil shale formation between injection and production wells tends to be difficult because oil shale is often substantially impermeable. Many methods have attempted to link injection and production wells. These methods include: hydraulic fracturing such as methods investigated by Dow Chemical and Laramie Energy Research Center; electrical fracturing by methods investigated by Laramie Energy Research Center; acid leaching of limestone cavities by methods investigated by Dow Chemical; steam injection into permeable nahcolite zones to dissolve the nahcolite by methods investigated by Shell Oil and Equity Oil; fracturing with chemical explosives by methods investigated by Talley Energy Systems; fracturing with nuclear explosives by methods investigated by Project Bronco; and combinations of these methods. Many of these methods, however, have relatively high operating costs and lack sufficient injection capacity.

[0018] Large deposits of heavy hydrocarbons (heavy oil and/or tar) contained in relatively permeable formations (for example in tar sands) are found in North America, South America, Africa, and Asia. Tar can be surface-mined and upgraded to lighter hydrocarbons such as crude oil, naphtha, kerosene, and/or gas oil. Surface milling processes may further separate the bitumen from sand. The separated bitumen may be converted to light hydrocarbons using conventional refinery methods. Mining and upgrading tar sand is usually substantially more expensive than producing lighter hydrocarbons from conventional oil reservoirs.

[0019] In situ production of hydrocarbons from tar sand may be accomplished by heating and/or injecting a gas into the formation. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,211,230 to Ostapovich et al. and 5,339,897 to Leaute, which are incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describe a horizontal production well located in an oil-bearing reservoir. A vertical conduit may be used to inject an oxidant gas into the reservoir for in situ combustion.

[0020] U.S. Pat. No. 2,780,450 to Ljungstrom describes heating bituminous geological formations in situ to convert or crack a liquid tar-like substance into oils and gases.

[0021] U.S. Pat. No. 4,597,441 to Ware et al., which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes contacting oil, heat, and hydrogen simultaneously in a reservoir. Hydrogenation may enhance recovery of oil from the reservoir.

[0022] U.S. Pat. No. 5,046,559 to Glandt and U.S. Pat. No. 5,060,726 to Glandt et al., which are incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describe preheating a portion of a tar sand formation between an injector well and a producer well. Steam may be injected from the injector well into the formation to produce hydrocarbons at the producer well.

[0023] As outlined above, there has been a significant amount of effort to develop methods and systems to economically produce hydrocarbons, hydrogen, and/or other products from hydrocarbon containing formations. At present, however, there are still many hydrocarbon containing formations from which hydrocarbons, hydrogen, and/or other products cannot be economically produced. Thus, there is still a need for improved methods and systems for production of hydrocarbons, hydrogen, and/or other products from various hydrocarbon containing formations.

[0024] Embodiments described herein generally relate to systems, methods, and heaters for treating a subsurface formation. Embodiments described herein also generally relate to heaters that have novel components therein. Such heaters can be obtained by using the systems and methods described herein.

[0025] In certain embodiments, the invention provides one or more systems, methods, and/or heaters. In some embodiments, the systems, methods, and/or heaters are used for treating a subsurface formation.

[0026] In certain embodiments, the invention provides a method for treating a tar sands formation, comprising: providing a drive fluid to a first hydrocarbon containing layer of the formation to mobilize at least some hydrocarbons in the first layer; allowing at least some of the mobilized hydrocarbons to flow into a second hydrocarbon containing layer of the formation; providing heat to the second layer from one or more heaters located in the second layer; and producing at least some hydrocarbons from the second layer of the formation.

[0027] In further embodiments, features from specific embodiments may be combined with features from other embodiments. For example, features from one embodiment may be combined with features from any of the other embodiments.

[0028] In further embodiments, treating a subsurface formation is performed using any of the methods, systems, or heaters described herein.

[0029] In further embodiments, additional features may be added to the specific embodiments described herein.

[0331] While the invention is susceptible to various modifications and alternative forms, specific embodiments thereof are shown by way of example in the drawings and may herein be described in detail. The drawings may not be to scale. It should be understood, however, that the drawings and detailed description thereto are not intended to limit the invention to the particular form disclosed, but on the contrary, the intention is to cover all modifications, equivalents and alternatives falling within the spirit and scope of the present invention as defined by the appended claims.

[0332] The following description generally relates to systems and methods for treating hydrocarbons in the formations. Such formations may be treated to yield hydrocarbon products, hydrogen, and other products.

[0333] “Alternating current (AC)” refers to a time-varying current that reverses direction substantially sinusoidally. AC produces skin effect electricity flow in a ferromagnetic conductor.

[0334] “API gravity” refers to API gravity at 15.5° C. (60° F.). API gravity is as determined by ASTM Method D6822 or ASTM Method D1298.

[0335] “ASTM” refers to American Standard Testing and Materials.

[0336] In the context of reduced heat output heating systems, apparatus, and methods, the term “automatically” means such systems, apparatus, and methods function in a certain way without the use of external control (for example, external controllers such as a controller with a temperature sensor and a feedback loop, PID controller, or predictive controller).

[0337] “Bare metal” and “exposed metal” refer to metals of elongated members that do not include a layer of electrical insulation, such as mineral insulation, that is designed to provide electrical insulation for the metal throughout an operating temperature range of the elongated member. Bare metal and exposed metal may encompass a metal that includes a corrosion inhibiter such as a naturally occurring oxidation layer, an applied oxidation layer, and/or a film. Bare metal and exposed metal include metals with polymeric or other types of electrical insulation that cannot retain electrical insulating properties at typical operating temperature of the elongated member. Such material may be placed on the metal and may be thermally degraded during use of the heater.

[0338] Boiling range distributions for the formation fluid and liquid streams described herein are as determined by ASTM Method D5307 or ASTM Method D2887. Content of hydrocarbon components in weight percent for paraffins, iso-paraffins, olefins, naphthenes and aromatics in the liquid streams is as determined by ASTM Method D6730. Content of aromatics in volume percent is as determined by ASTM Method D1319. Weight percent of hydrogen in hydrocarbons is as determined by ASTM Method D3343.

[0339] “Bromine number” refers to a weight percentage of olefins in grams per 100 gram of portion of the produced fluid that has a boiling range below 246° C. and testing the portion using ASTM Method D1159.

[0340] “Carbon number” refers to the number of carbon atoms in a molecule. A hydrocarbon fluid may include various hydrocarbons with different carbon numbers. The hydrocarbon fluid may be described by a carbon number distribution. Carbon numbers and/or carbon number distributions may be determined by true boiling point distribution and/or gas-liquid chromatography.

[0341] “Cenospheres” refers to hollow particulates that are formed in thermal processes at high temperatures when molten components are blown up like balloons by the volatilization of organic components.

[0342] “Chemically stability” refers to the ability of a formation fluid to be transported without components in the formation fluid reacting to form polymers and/or compositions that plug pipelines, valves, and/or vessels.

[0343] “Clogging” refers to impeding and/or inhibiting flow of one or more compositions through a process vessel or a conduit.

[0344] “Column X element” or “Column X elements” refer to one or more elements of Column X of the Periodic Table, and/or one or more compounds of one or more elements of Column X of the Periodic Table, in which X corresponds to a column number (for example, 13-18) of the Periodic Table. For example, “Column 15 elements” refer to elements from Column 15 of the Periodic Table and/or compounds of one or more elements from Column 15 of the Periodic Table.

[0345] “Column X metal” or “Column X metals” refer to one or more metals of Column X of the Periodic Table and/or one or more compounds of one or more metals of Column X of the Periodic Table, in which X corresponds to a column number (for example, 1-12) of the Periodic Table. For example, “Column 6 metals” refer to metals from Column 6 of the Periodic Table and/or compounds of one or more metals from Column 6 of the Periodic Table.

[0346] “Condensable hydrocarbons” are hydrocarbons that condense at 25° C. and one atmosphere absolute pressure. Condensable hydrocarbons may include a mixture of hydrocarbons having carbon numbers greater than 4. “Non-condensable hydrocarbons” are hydrocarbons that do not condense at 25° C. and one atmosphere absolute pressure. Non-condensable hydrocarbons may include hydrocarbons having carbon numbers less than 5.

[0347] “Coring” is a process that generally includes drilling a hole into a formation and removing a substantially solid mass of the formation from the hole.

[0348] “Cracking” refers to a process involving decomposition and molecular recombination of organic compounds to produce a greater number of molecules than were initially present. In cracking, a series of reactions take place accompanied by a transfer of hydrogen atoms between molecules. For example, naphtha may undergo a thermal cracking reaction to form ethene and H₂.

[0349] “Curie temperature” is the temperature above which a ferromagnetic material loses all of its ferromagnetic properties. In addition to losing all of its ferromagnetic properties above the Curie temperature, the ferromagnetic material begins to lose its ferromagnetic properties when an increasing electrical current is passed through the ferromagnetic material.

[0350] “Cycle oil” refers to a mixture of light cycle oil and heavy cycle oil. “Light cycle oil” refers to hydrocarbons having a boiling range distribution between 430° F. (221° C.) and 650° F. (343° C.) that are produced from a fluidized catalytic cracking system. Light cycle oil content is determined by ASTM Method D5307. “Heavy cycle oil” refers to hydrocarbons having a boiling range distribution between 650° F. (343° C.) and 800° F. (427° C.) that are produced from a fluidized catalytic cracking system. Heavy cycle oil content is determined by ASTM Method D5307.

[0351] “Diad” refers to a group of two items (for example, heaters, wellbores, or other objects) coupled together.

[0352] “Diesel” refers to hydrocarbons with a boiling range distribution between 260° C. and 343° C. (500-650° F.) at 0.101 MPa. Diesel content is determined by ASTM Method D2887.

[0353] “Enriched air” refers to air having a larger mole fraction of oxygen than air in the atmosphere. Air is typically enriched to increase combustion-supporting ability of the air.

[0354] “Fluid pressure” is a pressure generated by a fluid in a formation. “Lithostatic pressure” (sometimes referred to as “lithostatic stress”) is a pressure in a formation equal to a weight per unit area of an overlying rock mass. “Hydrostatic pressure” is a pressure in a formation exerted by a column of water.

[0355] A “formation” includes one or more hydrocarbon containing layers, one or more non-hydrocarbon layers, an overburden, and/or an underburden. “Hydrocarbon layers” refer to layers in the formation that contain hydrocarbons. The hydrocarbon layers may contain non-hydrocarbon material and hydrocarbon material. The “overburden” and/or the “underburden” include one or more different types of impermeable materials. For example, the overburden and/or underburden may include rock, shale, mudstone, or wet/tight carbonate. In some embodiments of in situ heat treatment processes, the overburden and/or the underburden may include a hydrocarbon containing layer or hydrocarbon containing layers that are relatively impermeable and are not subjected to temperatures during in situ heat treatment processing that result in significant characteristic changes of the hydrocarbon containing layers of the overburden and/or the underburden. For example, the underburden may contain shale or mudstone, but the underburden is not allowed to heat to pyrolysis temperatures during the in situ heat treatment process. In some cases, the overburden and/or the underburden may be somewhat permeable.

[0356] “Formation fluids” refer to fluids present in a formation and may include pyrolyzation fluid, synthesis gas, mobilized hydrocarbons, and water (steam). Formation fluids may include hydrocarbon fluids as well as non-hydrocarbon fluids. The term “mobilized fluid” refers to fluids in a hydrocarbon containing formation that are able to flow as a result of thermal treatment of the formation. “Produced fluids” refer to fluids removed from the formation.

[0357] “Freezing point” of a hydrocarbon liquid refers to the temperature below which solid hydrocarbon crystals may form in the liquid. Freezing point is as determined by ASTM Method D5901.

[0358] “Gasoline hydrocarbons” refer to hydrocarbons having a boiling point range from 32° C. (90° F.) to about 204° C. (400° F.). Gasoline hydrocarbons include, but are not limited to, straight run gasoline, naphtha, fluidized or thermally catalytically cracked gasoline, VB gasoline, and coker gasoline. Gasoline hydrocarbons content is determined by ASTM Method D2887.

[0359] “Heat of Combustion” refers to an estimation of the net heat of combustion of a liquid. Heat of combustion is as determined by ASTM Method D3338.

[0360] A “heat source” is any system for providing heat to at least a portion of a formation substantially by conductive and/or radiative heat transfer. For example, a heat source may include electric heaters such as an insulated conductor, an elongated member, and/or a conductor disposed in a conduit. A heat source may also include systems that generate heat by burning a fuel external to or in a formation. The systems may be surface burners, downhole gas burners, flameless distributed combustors, and natural distributed combustors. In some embodiments, heat provided to or generated in one or more heat sources may be supplied by other sources of energy. The other sources of energy may directly heat a formation, or the energy may be applied to a transfer medium that directly or indirectly heats the formation. It is to be understood that one or more heat sources that are applying heat to a formation may use different sources of energy. Thus, for example, for a given formation some heat sources may supply heat from electric resistance heaters, some heat sources may provide heat from combustion, and some heat sources may provide heat from one or more other energy sources (for example, chemical reactions, solar energy, wind energy, biomass, or other sources of renewable energy). A chemical reaction may include an exothermic reaction (for example, an oxidation reaction). A heat source may also include a heater that provides heat to a zone proximate and/or surrounding a heating location such as a heater well.

[0361] A “heater” is any system or heat source for generating heat in a well or a near wellbore region. Heaters may be, but are not limited to, electric heaters, burners, combustors that react with material in or produced from a formation, and/or combinations thereof.

[0362] “Heavy hydrocarbons” are viscous hydrocarbon fluids. Heavy hydrocarbons may include highly viscous hydrocarbon fluids such as heavy oil, tar, and/or asphalt. Heavy hydrocarbons may include carbon and hydrogen, as well as smaller concentrations of sulfur, oxygen, and nitrogen. Additional elements may also be present in heavy hydrocarbons in trace amounts. Heavy hydrocarbons may be classified by API gravity. Heavy hydrocarbons generally have an API gravity below about 20°. Heavy oil, for example, generally has an API gravity of about 10-20°, whereas tar generally has an API gravity below about 10°. The viscosity of heavy hydrocarbons is generally greater than about 100 centipoise at 15° C. Heavy hydrocarbons may include aromatics or other complex ring hydrocarbons.

[0363] Heavy hydrocarbons may be found in a relatively permeable formation. The relatively permeable formation may include heavy hydrocarbons entrained in, for example, sand or carbonate. “Relatively permeable” is defined, with respect to formations or portions thereof, as an average permeability of 10 millidarcy or more (for example, 10 or 100 millidarcy). “Relatively low permeability” is defined, with respect to formations or portions thereof, as an average permeability of less than about 10 millidarcy. One darcy is equal to about 0.99 square micrometers. An impermeable layer generally has a permeability of less than about 0.1 millidarcy.

[0364] Certain types of formations that include heavy hydrocarbons may also include, but are not limited to, natural mineral waxes, or natural asphaltites. “Natural mineral waxes” typically occur in substantially tubular veins that may be several meters wide, several kilometers long, and hundreds of meters deep. “Natural asphaltites” include solid hydrocarbons of an aromatic composition and typically occur in large veins. In situ recovery of hydrocarbons from formations such as natural mineral waxes and natural asphaltites may include melting to form liquid hydrocarbons and/or solution mining of hydrocarbons from the formations.

[0365] “Hydrocarbons” are generally defined as molecules formed primarily by carbon and hydrogen atoms. Hydrocarbons may also include other elements such as, but not limited to, halogens, metallic elements, nitrogen, oxygen, and/or sulfur. Hydrocarbons may be, but are not limited to, kerogen, bitumen, pyrobitumen, oils, natural mineral waxes, and asphaltites. Hydrocarbons may be located in or adjacent to mineral matrices in the earth. Matrices may include, but are not limited to, sedimentary rock, sands, silicilytes, carbonates, diatomites, and other porous media. “Hydrocarbon fluids” are fluids that include hydrocarbons. Hydrocarbon fluids may include, entrain, or be entrained in non-hydrocarbon fluids such as hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, water, and ammonia.

[0366] An “in situ conversion process” refers to a process of heating a hydrocarbon containing formation from heat sources to raise the temperature of at least a portion of the formation above a pyrolysis temperature so that pyrolyzation fluid is produced in the formation.

[0367] An “in situ heat treatment process” refers to a process of heating a hydrocarbon containing formation with heat sources to raise the temperature of at least a portion of the formation above a temperature that results in mobilized fluid, visbreaking, and/or pyrolysis of hydrocarbon containing material so that mobilized fluids, visbroken fluids, and/or pyrolyzation fluids are produced in the formation.

[0368] “Insulated conductor” refers to any elongated material that is able to conduct electricity and that is covered, in whole or in part, by an electrically insulating material.

[0369] “Karst” is a subsurface shaped by the dissolution of a soluble layer or layers of bedrock, usually carbonate rock such as limestone or dolomite. The dissolution may be caused by meteoric or acidic water. The Grosmont formation in Alberta, Canada is an example of a karst (or “karsted”) carbonate formation.

[0370] “Kerogen” is a solid, insoluble hydrocarbon that has been converted by natural degradation and that principally contains carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Coal and oil shale are typical examples of materials that contain kerogen. “Bitumen” is a non-crystalline solid or viscous hydrocarbon material that is substantially soluble in carbon disulfide. “Oil” is a fluid containing a mixture of condensable hydrocarbons.

[0371] “Kerosene” refers to hydrocarbons with a boiling range distribution between 204° C. and 260° C. at 0.101 MPa. Kerosene content is determined by ASTM Method D2887.

[0372] “Modulated direct current (DC)” refers to any substantially non-sinusoidal time-varying current that produces skin effect electricity flow in a ferromagnetic conductor.

[0373] “Naphtha” refers to hydrocarbon components with a boiling range distribution between 38° C. and 200° C. at 0.101 MPa. Naphtha content is determined by ASTM Method D5307.

[0374] “Nitride” refers to a compound of nitrogen and one or more other elements of the Periodic Table. Nitrides include, but are not limited to, silicon nitride, boron nitride, or alumina nitride.

[0375] “Nitrogen compound content” refers to an amount of nitrogen in an organic compound. Nitrogen content is as determined by ASTM Method D5762.

[0376] “Octane Number” refers to a calculated numerical representation of the antiknock properties of a motor fuel compared to a standard reference fuel. A calculated octane number is determined by ASTM Method D6730.

[0377] “Olefins” are molecules that include unsaturated hydrocarbons having one or more non-aromatic carbon-carbon double bonds.

[0378] “Olefin content” refers to an amount of non-aromatic olefins in a fluid. Olefin content for a produced fluid is determined by obtaining a portion of the produce fluid that has a boiling point of 246° C. and testing the portion using ASTM Method D1159 and reporting the result as a bromine factor in grams per 100 gram of portion. Olefin content is also determined by the Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers (CAPP) olefin method and is reported in percent olefin as 1-decene equivalent.

[0379] “Orifices” refer to openings, such as openings in conduits, having a wide variety of sizes and cross-sectional shapes including, but not limited to, circles, ovals, squares, rectangles, triangles, slits, or other regular or irregular shapes.

[0380] “P (peptization) value” or “P-value” refers to a numerical value, which represents the flocculation tendency of asphaltenes in a formation fluid. P-value is determined by ASTM method D7060.

[0381] “Pebble” refers to one or more spheres, oval shapes, oblong shapes, irregular or elongated shapes.

[0382] “Periodic Table” refers to the Periodic Table as specified by the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC), November 2003. In the scope of this application, weight of a metal from the Periodic Table, weight of a compound of a metal from the Periodic Table, weight of an element from the Periodic Table, or weight of a compound of an element from the Periodic Table is calculated as the weight of metal or the weight of element. For example, if 0.1 grams of MoO₃ is used per gram of catalyst, the calculated weight of the molybdenum metal in the catalyst is 0.067 grams per gram of catalyst.

[0383] “Physical stability” refers the ability of a formation fluid to not exhibit phase separation or flocculation during transportation of the fluid. Physical stability is determined by ASTM Method D7060.

[0384] “Pyrolysis” is the breaking of chemical bonds due to the application of heat. For example, pyrolysis may include transforming a compound into one or more other substances by heat alone. Heat may be transferred to a section of the formation to cause pyrolysis.

[0385] “Pyrolyzation fluids” or “pyrolysis products” refers to fluid produced substantially during pyrolysis of hydrocarbons. Fluid produced by pyrolysis reactions may mix with other fluids in a formation. The mixture would be considered pyrolyzation fluid or pyrolyzation product. As used herein, “pyrolysis zone” refers to a volume of a formation (for example, a relatively permeable formation such as a tar sands formation) that is reacted or reacting to form a pyrolyzation fluid.

[0386] “Residue” refers to hydrocarbons that have a boiling point above 537° C. (1000° F.).

[0387] “Rich layers” in a hydrocarbon containing formation are relatively thin layers (typically about 0.2 m to about 0.5 m thick). Rich layers generally have a richness of about 0.150 L/kg or greater. Some rich layers have a richness of about 0.170 L/kg or greater, of about 0.190 L/kg or greater, or of about 0.210 L/kg or greater. Lean layers of the formation have a richness of about 0.100 L/kg or less and are generally thicker than rich layers. The richness and locations of layers are determined, for example, by coring and subsequent Fischer assay of the core, density or neutron logging, or other logging methods. Rich layers may have a lower initial thermal conductivity than other layers of the formation. Typically, rich layers have a thermal conductivity 1.5 times to 3 times lower than the thermal conductivity of lean layers. In addition, rich layers have a higher thermal expansion coefficient than lean layers of the formation.

[0388] “Smart well technology” or “smart wellbore” refers to wells that incorporate downhole measurement and/or control. For injection wells, smart well technology may allow for controlled injection of fluid into the formation in desired zones. For production wells, smart well technology may allow for controlled production of formation fluid from selected zones. Some wells may include smart well technology that allows for formation fluid production from selected zones and simultaneous or staggered solution injection into other zones. Smart well technology may include fiber optic systems and control valves in the wellbore. A smart wellbore used for an in situ heat treatment process may be Westbay Multilevel Well System MP55 available from Westbay Instruments Inc. (Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada).

[0389] “Subsidence” is a downward movement of a portion of a formation relative to an initial elevation of the surface.

[0390] “Sulfur compound content” refers to an amount of sulfur in an organic compound. Sulfur content is as determined by ASTM Method D4294.

[0391] “Superposition of heat” refers to providing heat from two or more heat sources to a selected section of a formation such that the temperature of the formation at least at one location between the heat sources is influenced by the heat sources.

[0392] “Synthesis gas” is a mixture including hydrogen and carbon monoxide. Additional components of synthesis gas may include water, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, methane, and other gases. Synthesis gas may be generated by a variety of processes and feedstocks. Synthesis gas may be used for synthesizing a wide range of compounds.

[0393] “TAN” refers to a total acid number expressed as milligrams (“mg”) of KOH per gram (“g”) of sample. TAN is as determined by ASTM Method D3242.

[0394] “Tar” is a viscous hydrocarbon that generally has a viscosity greater than about 10,000 centipoise at 15° C. The specific gravity of tar generally is greater than 1.000. Tar may have an API gravity less than 10°.

[0395] A “tar sands formation” is a formation in which hydrocarbons are predominantly present in the form of heavy hydrocarbons and/or tar entrained in a mineral grain framework or other host lithology (for example, sand or carbonate). Examples of tar sands formations include formations such as the Athabasca formation, the Grosmont formation, and the Peace River formation, all three in Alberta, Canada; and the Faja formation in the Orinoco belt in Venezuela.

[0396] “Temperature limited heater” generally refers to a heater that regulates heat output (for example, reduces heat output) above a specified temperature without the use of external controls such as temperature controllers, power regulators, rectifiers, or other devices. Temperature limited heaters may be AC (alternating current) or modulated (for example, “chopped”) DC (direct current) powered electrical resistance heaters.

[0397] “Thermally conductive fluid” includes fluid that has a higher thermal conductivity than air at standard temperature and pressure (STP) (0° C. and 101.325 kPa).

[0398] “Thermal conductivity” is a property of a material that describes the rate at which heat flows, in steady state, between two surfaces of the material for a given temperature difference between the two surfaces.

[0399] “Thermal fracture” refers to fractures created in a formation caused by expansion or contraction of a formation and/or fluids in the formation, which is in turn caused by increasing/decreasing the temperature of the formation and/or fluids in the formation, and/or by increasing/decreasing a pressure of fluids in the formation due to heating.

[0400] “Thermal oxidation stability” refers to thermal oxidation stability of a liquid. Thermal Oxidation Stability is as determined by ASTM Method D3241.

[0401] “Thickness” of a layer refers to the thickness of a cross section of the layer, wherein the cross section is normal to a face of the layer.

[0402] “Time-varying current” refers to electrical current that produces skin effect electricity flow in a ferromagnetic conductor and has a magnitude that varies with time. Time-varying current includes both alternating current (AC) and modulated direct current (DC).

[0403] “Triad” refers to a group of three items (for example, heaters, wellbores, or other objects) coupled together.

[0404] “Turndown ratio” for the temperature limited heater in which current is applied directly to the heater is the ratio of the highest AC or modulated DC resistance below the Curie temperature to the lowest resistance above the Curie temperature for a given current. Turndown ratio for an inductive heater is ratio of the highest heat output below the Curie temperature to the lowest heat output above the Curie temperature for a given current applied to the heater.

[0405] A “u-shaped wellbore” refers to a wellbore that extends from a first opening in the formation, through at least a portion of the formation, and out through a second opening in the formation. In this context, the wellbore may be only roughly in the shape of a “v” or “u”, with the understanding that the “legs” of the “u” do not need to be parallel to each other, or perpendicular to the “bottom” of the “u” for the wellbore to be considered “u-shaped”.

[0406] “Upgrade” refers to increasing the quality of hydrocarbons. For example, upgrading heavy hydrocarbons may result in an increase in the API gravity of the heavy hydrocarbons.

[0407] “Visbreaking” refers to the untangling of molecules in fluid during heat treatment and/or to the breaking of large molecules into smaller molecules during heat treatment, which results in a reduction of the viscosity of the fluid.

[0408] “Viscosity” refers to kinematic viscosity at 40° C. unless specified. Viscosity is as determined by ASTM Method D445.

[0409] “VGO” or “vacuum gas oil” refers to hydrocarbons with a boiling range distribution between 343° C. and 538° C. at 0.101 MPa. VGO content is determined by ASTM Method D5307.

[0410] A “vug” is a cavity, void or large pore in a rock that is commonly lined with mineral precipitates.

[0411] “Wax” refers to a low melting organic mixture, or a compound of high molecular weight that is a solid at lower temperatures and a liquid at higher temperatures, and when in solid form can form a barrier to water. Examples of waxes include animal waxes, vegetable waxes, mineral waxes, petroleum waxes, and synthetic waxes.

[0412] The term “wellbore” refers to a hole in a formation made by drilling or insertion of a conduit into the formation. A wellbore may have a substantially circular cross section, or another cross-sectional shape. As used herein, the terms “well” and “opening,” when referring to an opening in the formation may be used interchangeably with the term “wellbore.”

[0413] Hydrocarbons in formations may be treated in various ways to produce many different products. In certain embodiments, hydrocarbons in formations are treated in stages. FIG. 1 depicts an illustration of stages of heating the hydrocarbon containing formation. FIG. 1 also depicts an example of yield (“Y”) in barrels of oil equivalent per ton (y axis) of formation fluids from the formation versus temperature (“T”) of the heated formation in degrees Celsius (x axis).

[0414] Desorption of methane and vaporization of water occurs during stage 1 heating. Heating of the formation through stage 1 may be performed as quickly as possible. For example, when the hydrocarbon containing formation is initially heated, hydrocarbons in the formation desorb adsorbed methane. The desorbed methane may be produced from the formation. If the hydrocarbon containing formation is heated further, water in the hydrocarbon containing formation is vaporized. Water may occupy, in some hydrocarbon containing formations, between 10% and 50% of the pore volume in the formation. In other formations, water occupies larger or smaller portions of the pore volume. Water typically is vaporized in a formation between 160° C. and 285° C. at pressures of 600 kPa absolute to 7000 kPa absolute. In some embodiments, the vaporized water produces wettability changes in the formation and/or increased formation pressure. The wettability changes and/or increased pressure may affect pyrolysis reactions or other reactions in the formation. In certain embodiments, the vaporized water is produced from the formation. In other embodiments, the vaporized water is used for steam extraction and/or distillation in the formation or outside the formation. Removing the water from and increasing the pore volume in the formation increases the storage space for hydrocarbons in the pore volume.

[0415] In certain embodiments, after stage 1 heating, the formation is heated further, such that a temperature in the formation reaches (at least) an initial pyrolyzation temperature (such as a temperature at the lower end of the temperature range shown as stage 2). Hydrocarbons in the formation may be pyrolyzed throughout stage 2. A pyrolysis temperature range varies depending on the types of hydrocarbons in the formation. The pyrolysis temperature range may include temperatures between 250° C. and 900° C. The pyrolysis temperature range for producing desired products may extend through only a portion of the total pyrolysis temperature range. In some embodiments, the pyrolysis temperature range for producing desired products may include temperatures between 250° C. and 400° C. or temperatures between 270° C. and 350° C. If a temperature of hydrocarbons in the formation is slowly raised through the temperature range from 250° C. to 400° C., production of pyrolysis products may be substantially complete when the temperature approaches 400° C. Average temperature of the hydrocarbons may be raised at a rate of less than 5° C. per day, less than 2° C. per day, less than 1° C. per day, or less than 0.5° C. per day through the pyrolysis temperature range for producing desired products. Heating the hydrocarbon containing formation with a plurality of heat sources may establish thermal gradients around the heat sources that slowly raise the temperature of hydrocarbons in the formation through the pyrolysis temperature range.

[0416] The rate of temperature increase through the pyrolysis temperature range for desired products may affect the quality and quantity of the formation fluids produced from the hydrocarbon containing formation. Slowly raising the temperature of the formation through the pyrolysis temperature range for desired products may allow for the production of high quality, high API gravity hydrocarbons from the formation. Slowly raising the temperature of the formation through the pyrolysis temperature range for desired products may allow for the removal of a large amount of the hydrocarbons present in the formation as hydrocarbon product.

[0417] In some in situ heat treatment embodiments, a portion of the formation is heated to a desired temperature instead of slowly heating through a temperature range. In some embodiments, the desired temperature is 300° C., 325° C., or 350° C. Other temperatures may be selected as the desired temperature. Superposition of heat from heat sources allows the desired temperature to be relatively quickly and efficiently established in the formation. Energy input into the formation from the heat sources may be adjusted to maintain the temperature in the formation substantially at the desired temperature. The heated portion of the formation is maintained substantially at the desired temperature until pyrolysis declines such that production of desired formation fluids from the formation becomes uneconomical. Parts of the formation that are subjected to pyrolysis may include regions brought into a pyrolysis temperature range by heat transfer from only one heat source.

[0418] In certain embodiments, formation fluids including pyrolyzation fluids are produced from the formation. As the temperature of the formation increases, the amount of condensable hydrocarbons in the produced formation fluid may decrease. At high temperatures, the formation may produce mostly methane and/or hydrogen. If the hydrocarbon containing formation is heated throughout an entire pyrolysis range, the formation may produce only small amounts of hydrogen towards an upper limit of the pyrolysis range. After all of the available hydrogen is depleted, a minimal amount of fluid production from the formation will typically occur.

[0419] After pyrolysis of hydrocarbons, a large amount of carbon and some hydrogen may still be present in the formation. A significant portion of carbon remaining in the formation can be produced from the formation in the form of synthesis gas. Synthesis gas generation may take place during stage 3 heating depicted in FIG. 1. Stage 3 may include heating a hydrocarbon containing formation to a temperature sufficient to allow synthesis gas generation. For example, synthesis gas may be produced in a temperature range from about 400° C. to about 1200° C., about 500° C. to about 1100° C., or about 550° C. to about 1000° C. The temperature of the heated portion of the formation when the synthesis gas generating fluid is introduced to the formation determines the composition of synthesis gas produced in the formation. The generated synthesis gas may be removed from the formation through a production well or production wells.

[0420] Total energy content of fluids produced from the hydrocarbon containing formation may stay relatively constant throughout pyrolysis and synthesis gas generation. During pyrolysis at relatively low formation temperatures, a significant portion of the produced fluid may be condensable hydrocarbons that have a high energy content. At higher pyrolysis temperatures, however, less of the formation fluid may include condensable hydrocarbons. More non-condensable formation fluids may be produced from the formation. Energy content per unit volume of the produced fluid may decline slightly during generation of predominantly non-condensable formation fluids. During synthesis gas generation, energy content per unit volume of produced synthesis gas declines significantly compared to energy content of pyrolyzation fluid. The volume of the produced synthesis gas, however, will in many instances increase substantially, thereby compensating for the decreased energy content.

[0421] FIG. 2 depicts a schematic view of an embodiment of a portion of the in situ heat treatment system for treating the hydrocarbon containing formation. The in situ heat treatment system may include barrier wells 200. Barrier wells are used to form a barrier around a treatment area. The barrier inhibits fluid flow into and/or out of the treatment area. Barrier wells include, but are not limited to, dewatering wells, vacuum wells, capture wells, injection wells, grout wells, freeze wells, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, barrier wells 200 are dewatering wells. Dewatering wells may remove liquid water and/or inhibit liquid water from entering a portion of the formation to be heated, or to the formation being heated. In the embodiment depicted in FIG. 2, the barrier wells 200 are shown extending only along one side of heat sources 202, but the barrier wells typically encircle all heat sources 202 used, or to be used, to heat a treatment area of the formation.

[0422] Heat sources 202 are placed in at least a portion of the formation. Heat sources 202 may include heaters such as insulated conductors, conductor-in-conduit heaters, surface burners, flameless distributed combustors, and/or natural distributed combustors. Heat sources 202 may also include other types of heaters. Heat sources 202 provide heat to at least a portion of the formation to heat hydrocarbons in the formation. Energy may be supplied to heat sources 202 through supply lines 204. Supply lines 204 may be structurally different depending on the type of heat source or heat sources used to heat the formation. Supply lines 204 for heat sources may transmit electricity for electric heaters, may transport fuel for combustors, or may transport heat exchange fluid that is circulated in the formation. In some embodiments, electricity for an in situ heat treatment process may be provided by a nuclear power plant or nuclear power plants. The use of nuclear power may allow for reduction or elimination of carbon dioxide emissions from the in situ heat treatment process.

[0423] When the formation is heated, the heat input into the formation may cause expansion of the formation and geomechanical motion. The heat sources may be turned on before, at the same time, or during a dewatering process. Computer simulations may model formation response to heating. The computer simulations may be used to develop a pattern and time sequence for activating heat sources in the formation so that geomechanical motion of the formation does not adversely affect the functionality of heat sources, production wells, and other equipment in the formation.

[0424] Heating the formation may cause an increase in permeability and/or porosity of the formation. Increases in permeability and/or porosity may result from a reduction of mass in the formation due to vaporization and removal of water, removal of hydrocarbons, and/or creation of fractures. Fluid may flow more easily in the heated portion of the formation because of the increased permeability and/or porosity of the formation. Fluid in the heated portion of the formation may move a considerable distance through the formation because of the increased permeability and/or porosity. The considerable distance may be over 1000 m depending on various factors, such as permeability of the formation, properties of the fluid, temperature of the formation, and pressure gradient allowing movement of the fluid. The ability of fluid to travel considerable distance in the formation allows production wells 206 to be spaced relatively far apart in the formation.

[0425] Production wells 206 are used to remove formation fluid from the formation. In some embodiments, production well 206 includes a heat source. The heat source in the production well may heat one or more portions of the formation at or near the production well. In some in situ heat treatment process embodiments, the amount of heat supplied to the formation from the production well per meter of the production well is less than the amount of heat applied to the formation from a heat source that heats the formation per meter of the heat source. Heat applied to the formation from the production well may increase formation permeability adjacent to the production well by vaporizing and removing liquid phase fluid adjacent to the production well and/or by increasing the permeability of the formation adjacent to the production well by formation of macro and/or micro fractures.

[0426] More than one heat source may be positioned in the production well. A heat source in a lower portion of the production well may be turned off when superposition of heat from adjacent heat sources heats the formation sufficiently to counteract benefits provided by heating the formation with the production well. In some embodiments, the heat source in an upper portion of the production well may remain on after the heat source in the lower portion of the production well is deactivated. The heat source in the upper portion of the well may inhibit condensation and reflux of formation fluid.

[0427] In some embodiments, the heat source in production well 206 allows for vapor phase removal of formation fluids from the formation. Providing heating at or through the production well may: (1) inhibit condensation and/or refluxing of production fluid when such production fluid is moving in the production well proximate the overburden, (2) increase heat input into the formation, (3) increase production rate from the production well as compared to a production well without a heat source, (4) inhibit condensation of high carbon number compounds (C6 and above) in the production well, and/or (5) increase formation permeability at or proximate the production well.

[0428] Subsurface pressure in the formation may correspond to the fluid pressure generated in the formation. As temperatures in the heated portion of the formation increase, the pressure in the heated portion may increase as a result of thermal expansion of in situ fluids, increased fluid generation and vaporization of water. Controlling rate of fluid removal from the formation may allow for control of pressure in the formation. Pressure in the formation may be determined at a number of different locations, such as near or at production wells, near or at heat sources, or at monitor wells.

[0429] In some hydrocarbon containing formations, production of hydrocarbons from the formation is inhibited until at least some hydrocarbons in the formation have been pyrolyzed. Formation fluid may be produced from the formation when the formation fluid is of a selected quality. In some embodiments, the selected quality includes an API gravity of at least about 20°, 30°, or 40°. Inhibiting production until at least some hydrocarbons are pyrolyzed may increase conversion of heavy hydrocarbons to light hydrocarbons. Inhibiting initial production may minimize the production of heavy hydrocarbons from the formation. Production of substantial amounts of heavy hydrocarbons may require expensive equipment and/or reduce the life of production equipment.

[0430] In some hydrocarbon containing formations, hydrocarbons in the formation may be heated to pyrolysis temperatures before substantial permeability has been generated in the heated portion of the formation. An initial lack of permeability may inhibit the transport of generated fluids to production wells 206. During initial heating, fluid pressure in the formation may increase proximate heat sources 202. The increased fluid pressure may be released, monitored, altered, and/or controlled through one or more heat sources 202. For example, selected heat sources 202 or separate pressure relief wells may include pressure relief valves that allow for removal of some fluid from the formation.

[0431] In some embodiments, pressure generated by expansion of pyrolysis fluids or other fluids generated in the formation may be allowed to increase although an open path to production wells 206 or any other pressure sink may not yet exist in the formation. The fluid pressure may be allowed to increase towards a lithostatic pressure. Fractures in the hydrocarbon containing formation may form when the fluid approaches the lithostatic pressure. For example, fractures may form from heat sources 202 to production wells 206 in the heated portion of the formation. The generation of fractures in the heated portion may relieve some of the pressure in the portion. Pressure in the formation may have to be maintained below a selected pressure to inhibit unwanted production, fracturing of the overburden or underburden, and/or coking of hydrocarbons in the formation.

[0432] After pyrolysis temperatures are reached and production from the formation is allowed, pressure in the formation may be varied to alter and/or control a composition of formation fluid produced, to control a percentage of condensable fluid as compared to non-condensable fluid in the formation fluid, and/or to control an API gravity of formation fluid being produced. For example, decreasing pressure may result in production of a larger condensable fluid component. The condensable fluid component may contain a larger percentage of olefins.

[0433] In some in situ heat treatment process embodiments, pressure in the formation may be maintained high enough to promote production of formation fluid with an API gravity of greater than 20°. Maintaining increased pressure in the formation may inhibit formation subsidence during in situ heat treatment. Maintaining increased pressure may facilitate vapor phase production of fluids from the formation. Vapor phase production may allow for a reduction in size of collection conduits used to transport fluids produced from the formation. Maintaining increased pressure may reduce or eliminate the need to compress formation fluids at the surface to transport the fluids in collection conduits to treatment facilities.

[0434] Maintaining increased pressure in a heated portion of the formation may surprisingly allow for production of large quantities of hydrocarbons of increased quality and of relatively low molecular weight. Pressure may be maintained so that formation fluid produced has a minimal amount of compounds above a selected carbon number. The selected carbon number may be at most 25, at most 20, at most 12, or at most 8. Some high carbon number compounds may be entrained in vapor in the formation and may be removed from the formation with the vapor. Maintaining increased pressure in the formation may inhibit entrainment of high carbon number compounds and/or multi-ring hydrocarbon compounds in the vapor. High carbon number compounds and/or multi-ring hydrocarbon compounds may remain in a liquid phase in the formation for significant time periods. The significant time periods may provide sufficient time for the compounds to pyrolyze to form lower carbon number compounds.

[0435] Generation of relatively low molecular weight hydrocarbons is believed to be due, in part, to autogenous generation and reaction of hydrogen in a portion of the hydrocarbon containing formation. For example, maintaining an increased pressure may force hydrogen generated during pyrolysis into the liquid phase within the formation. Heating the portion to a temperature in a pyrolysis temperature range may pyrolyze hydrocarbons in the formation to generate liquid phase pyrolyzation fluids. The generated liquid phase pyrolyzation fluids components may include double bonds and/or radicals. Hydrogen (H₂) in the liquid phase may reduce double bonds of the generated pyrolyzation fluids, thereby reducing a potential for polymerization or formation of long chain compounds from the generated pyrolyzation fluids. In addition, H₂ may also neutralize radicals in the generated pyrolyzation fluids. Therefore, H₂ in the liquid phase may inhibit the generated pyrolyzation fluids from reacting with each other and/or with other compounds in the formation.

[0436] Formation fluid produced from production wells 206 may be transported through collection piping 208 to treatment facilities 210. Formation fluids may also be produced from heat sources 202. For example, fluid may be produced from heat sources 202 to control pressure in the formation adjacent to the heat sources. Fluid produced from heat sources 202 may be transported through tubing or piping to collection piping 208 or the produced fluid may be transported through tubing or piping directly to treatment facilities 210. Treatment facilities 210 may include separation units, reaction units, upgrading units, fuel cells, turbines, storage vessels, and/or other systems and units for processing produced formation fluids. The treatment facilities may form transportation fuel from at least a portion of the hydrocarbons produced from the formation. In some embodiments, the transportation fuel may be jet fuel, such as JP-8.

[0437] Formation fluid may be hot when produced from the formation through the production wells. Hot formation fluid may be produced during solution mining processes and/or during in situ heat treatment processes. In some embodiments, electricity may be generated using the heat of the fluid produced from the formation. Also, heat recovered from the formation after the in situ process may be used to generate electricity. The generated electricity may be used to supply power to the in situ heat treatment process. For example, the electricity may be used to power heaters, or to power a refrigeration system for forming or maintaining a low temperature barrier. Electricity may be generated using a Kalina cycle, Rankine cycle or other thermodynamic cycle. In some embodiments, the working fluid for the cycle used to generate electricity is aqua ammonia.

[0438] FIG. 3 and depicts a schematic representation of a system for producing crude products and/or commercial products from the in situ heat treatment process liquid stream and/or the in situ heat treatment process gas stream. Formation fluid 212 enters fluid separation unit 214 and is separated into in situ heat treatment process liquid stream 216, in situ heat treatment process gas 218 and aqueous stream 220. In some embodiments, fluid separation unit 214 includes a quench zone. As produced formation fluid enters the quench zone, quenching fluid such as water, nonpotable water, hydrocarbon diluent, and/or other components may be added to the formation fluid to quench and/or cool the formation fluid to a temperature suitable for handling in downstream processing equipment. Quenching the formation fluid may inhibit formation of compounds that contribute to physical and/or chemical instability of the fluid (for example, inhibit formation of compounds that may precipitate from solution, contribute to corrosion, and/or fouling of downstream equipment and/or piping). The quenching fluid may be introduced into the formation fluid as a spray and/or a liquid stream. In some embodiments, the formation fluid is introduced into the quenching fluid. In some embodiments, the formation fluid is cooled by passing the fluid through a heat exchanger to remove some heat from the formation fluid. The quench fluid may be added to the cooled formation fluid when the temperature of the formation fluid is near or at the dew point of the quench fluid. Quenching the formation fluid near or at the dew point of the quench fluid may enhance solubilization of salts that may cause chemical and/or physical instability of the quenched fluid (for example, ammonium salts). In some embodiments, an amount of water used in the quench is minimal so that salts of inorganic compounds and/or other components do not separate from the mixture. In separation unit 214, at least a portion of the quench fluid may be separated from the quench mixture and recycled to the quench zone with a minimal amount of treatment. Heat produced from the quench may be captured and used in other facilities. In some embodiments, vapor may be produced during the quench. The produced vapor may be sent to gas separation unit 222 and/or sent to other facilities for processing.

[0439] In situ heat treatment process gas 218 may enter gas separation unit 222 to separate gas hydrocarbon stream 224 from the in situ heat treatment process gas. The gas separation unit is, in some embodiments, a rectified adsorption and high pressure fractionation unit. Gas hydrocarbon stream 224 includes hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3.

[0440] In situ heat treatment process gas 218 enters gas separation unit 222. In gas separation unit 222, treatment of in situ heat conversion treatment gas 218 removes sulfur compounds, carbon dioxide, and/or hydrogen to produce gas stream 224. In some embodiments, in situ heat treatment process gas 218 includes 20 vol % hydrogen, 30% methane, 12% carbon dioxide, 14 vol % C₂ hydrocarbons, 5 vol % hydrogen sulfide, 10 vol % C₃ hydrocarbons, 7 vol % C₄ hydrocarbons, 2 vol % C₅ hydrocarbons, with the balance being heavier hydrocarbons, water, ammonia, COS, mercaptans and thiophenes.

[0441] Gas separation unit 222 may include a physical treatment system and/or a chemical treatment system. The physical treatment system includes, but is not limited to, a membrane unit, a pressure swing adsorption unit, a liquid absorption unit, and/or a cryogenic unit. The chemical treatment system may include units that use amines (for example, diethanolamine or di-isopropanolamine), zinc oxide, sulfolane, water, or mixtures thereof in the treatment process. In some embodiments, gas separation unit 222 uses a Sulfinol gas treatment process for removal of sulfur compounds. Carbon dioxide may be removed using Catacarb® (Catacarb, Overland Park, Kans., U.S.A.) and/or Benfield (UOP, Des Plaines, Ill., U.S.A.) gas treatment processes. The gas separation unit is, in some embodiments, a rectified adsorption and high pressure fractionation unit. In some embodiments, in suit heat treatment process gas is treated to remove at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 80% or at least 90% by volume of ammonia present in the gas stream.

[0442] As depicted in FIG. 4, in situ heat treatment process gas 218 may enter compressor 232 of gas separation unit 222 to form compressed gas stream 234 and heavy stream 236. Heavy stream 236 may be transported to one or more liquid separation units described herein for further processing. Compressor 232 may be any compressor suitable for compressing gas. In certain embodiments, compressor 232 is a multistage compressor (for example 2 to 3 compressor trains) having an outlet pressure of about 40 bars. In some embodiments, compressed gas stream 234 may include at least 1 vol % carbon dioxide, at least 10 vol % hydrogen, at least 1 vol % hydrogen sulfide, at least 50 vol % of hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at most 4, or mixtures thereof. Compression of in situ heat treatment process gas 218 removes hydrocarbons having a carbon number of least 4 and water. Removal of water and hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 4 from the in situ process allows compressed gas stream 234 to be treated cryogenically. Cryogenic treatment of compressed gas stream 234 having small amounts of high boiling materials may be done more efficiently. In certain embodiments, compressed gas stream 234 is dried by passing the gas through a water adsorption unit.

[0443] As shown in FIGS. 4 through 8, gas separation unit 222 includes one or more cryogenic units. Cryogenic units described herein may include one or more distillation stages. In FIGS. 4 through 8, one or more heat exchangers may be positioned prior or after cryogenic units and/or separation units described herein to assist in removing and/or adding heat to one or more streams described herein. At least a portion or all of the separated hydrocarbons streams and/or the separated carbon dioxides streams may be transported to the heat exchangers.

[0444] In some embodiments, distillation stages may include from 1 to about 100 stages, from about 5 to about 50 stages, or from about 10 to about 40 stages. Stages of the cryogenic units may be cooled to temperatures ranging from about −110° C. to about 0° C. For example, stage 1 (top stage) in a cryogenic unit is cooled to about −110° C., stage 5 is cooled to about −25° C., and stage 10 is cooled to about −1° C. Total pressures in cryogenic units may range from about 1 bar to about 50 bar, from about 5 bar to about 40 bar, or from about 10 bar to about 30 bar. Cryogenic units described herein may include condenser recycle conduits 238 and reboiler recycle conduits 240. Condenser recycle conduits 238 allow recycle of the cooled separated gases so that the feed may be cooled as it enters the cryogenic units. Temperatures in condensation loops may range from about −110° C. to about −1° C., from about −90° C. to about −5° C., or from about −80° C. to about −10° C. Temperatures in reboiler loops may range from about 25° C. to about 200° C., from about 50° C. to about 150° C., or from about 75° C. to about 100° C. Reboiler recycle conduits 240 allow recycle of the stream exiting the cryogenic unit to heat the stream as it exits the cryogenic unit. Recycle of the cooled and/or warmed separated stream may enhance energy efficiency of the cryogenic unit.

[0445] As shown in FIG. 4, compressed gas stream 234 enters methane/hydrogen cryogenic unit 242. In cryogenic unit 242, compressed gas stream 234 may be separated into a methane/hydrogen stream 244 and a bottoms stream 246. Bottoms stream 246 may include, but is not limited to carbon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 2. Methane/hydrogen stream 244 may include a minimal amount of C₂ hydrocarbons and carbon dioxide. For example, methane/hydrogen stream 244 may include about 1 vol % C₂ hydrocarbons and about 1 vol % carbon dioxide. In some embodiments, the methane/hydrogen stream is recycled to one or more heat exchangers positioned prior to cryogenic unit 242. In some embodiments, the methane/hydrogen stream is used as a fuel for downhole burners and/or an energy source for surface facilities.

[0446] In some embodiments, cryogenic unit 242 may include one distillation column having 1 to about 30 stages, about 5 to about 25 stages, or about 10 to about 20 stages. Stages of cryogenic unit 242 may be cooled to temperatures ranging from about −150° C. to about 10° C. For example, stage 1 (top stage) is cooled to about −138° C., stage 5 is cooled to about −25° C., stage 10° C. is cooled to at about −1° C. At temperatures lower than −79° C. cryogenic separation of the carbon dioxide from other gases may be difficult due to the freezing point of carbon dioxide. In some embodiments, cryogenic unit 242 is about 17 ft. tall and includes about 20 distillation stages. Cryogenic unit 242 may be operated at a pressure of 40 bar with distillation temperatures ranging from about −45° C. to about −94° C.

[0447] Compressed gas stream 234 may include sufficient hydrogen and/or hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 1 to inhibit solid carbon dioxide formation. For example, in situ heat treatment process gas 218 may include from about 30 vol % to about 40 vol % of hydrogen, from about 50 vol % to 60 vol % of hydrocarbons having a carbon number from 1 to 2, from about 0.1 vol % to about 3 vol % of carbon dioxide with the balance being other gases such as, but not limited to, carbon monoxide, nitrogen, and hydrogen sulfide. Inhibiting solid carbon dioxide formation may allow for better separation of gases and/or less fouling of the cryogenic unit. In some embodiments, hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least five may be added to cryogenic unit 242 to inhibit formation of solid carbon dioxide. The resulting methane/hydrogen gas stream 244 may be used as an energy source. For example, methane/hydrogen gas stream 244 may be transported to surface facilities and burned to generate electricity.

[0448] As shown in FIG. 4, bottoms stream 246 enters cryogenic separation unit 248. In cryogenic separation unit 248, bottoms stream 246 is separated into gas stream 250 and liquid stream 252. Gas stream 250 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3. In some embodiments, gas stream 250 includes at least 0.9 vol % of C₃-C₅ hydrocarbons, and at most 1 ppm of carbon dioxide and about 0.1 vol % of hydrogen sulfide. In some embodiments, gas stream 250 includes hydrogen sulfide in quantities sufficient to require treatment of the stream to remove the hydrogen sulfide. In some embodiments, gas stream 250 is suitable for transportation and/or use as an energy source without further treatment. In some embodiments, gas stream 250 is used as an energy source for in situ heat treatment processes.

[0449] A portion of liquid stream 252 may be transported via conduit 254 to one or more portions of the formation and sequestered. In some embodiments, all of liquid stream 252 is sequestered in one or more portions of the formation. In some embodiments, a portion of liquid stream 252 enters cryogenic unit 256. In cryogenic unit 256, liquid stream 252 is separated into C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 and hydrogen sulfide stream 260. In some embodiments, C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 includes at most 0.5 vol % of hydrogen sulfide.

[0450] Hydrogen sulfide stream 260 includes, in some embodiments, about 0.01 vol % to about 5 vol % of C₃ hydrocarbons. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 includes hydrogen sulfide, carbon dioxide, C₃ hydrocarbons, or mixtures thereof. For example, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 includes, about 32 vol % of hydrogen sulfide, 67 vol % carbon dioxide, and 1 vol % C₃ hydrocarbons. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 is used as an energy source for an in situ heat treatment process and/or sent to a Claus plant for further treatment.

[0451] C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 may enter separation unit 262. In separation unit 262 C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 is separated into C₂ hydrocarbons stream 264 and carbon dioxide stream 266. Separation of C₂ hydrocarbons from carbon dioxide is performed using separation methods known in the art, for example, pressure swing adsorption units, and/or extractive distillation units. In some embodiments, C₂ hydrocarbons are separated from carbon dioxide using extractive distillation methods. For example, hydrocarbons having a carbon number from 3 to 8 may be added to separation unit 262. Addition of a higher carbon number hydrocarbon solvent allows C₂ hydrocarbons to be extracted from the carbon dioxide. C₂ hydrocarbons are then separated from the higher carbon number hydrocarbons using distillation techniques. In some embodiments, C₂ hydrocarbons stream 264 is transported to other process facilities and/or used as an energy source. Carbon dioxide stream 266 may be sequestered in one or more portions of the formation. In some embodiments, carbon dioxide stream 266 contains at most 0.005 grams of non-carbon dioxide compounds per gram of carbon dioxide stream. In some embodiments, carbon dioxide stream 266 is mixed with one or more oxidant sources supplied to one or more downhole burners.

[0452] In some embodiments, a portion or all of C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 are sequestered and/or transported to other facilities via conduit 268. In some embodiments, a portion or all of C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 is mixed with one or more oxidant sources supplied to one or more downhole burners.

[0453] As depicted in FIG. 5, bottoms stream 246 enters cryogenic separation unit 270. In cryogenic separation unit 270, bottoms stream 246 may be separated into C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 and hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 272. In some embodiments, C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 contains hydrogen sulfide. Hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 272 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3.

[0454] In some embodiments, a portion or all of C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 are transported via conduit 268 to other processes and/or to one or more portions of the formation to be sequestered. In some embodiments, a portion or all of C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 are treated in separation unit 262. Separation unit 262 is described above with reference to FIG. 4.

[0455] Hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 272 may enter cryogenic separation unit 274. In cryogenic separation unit 274, hydrogen sulfide may be separated from hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3 to produce hydrogen sulfide stream 260 and C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250. Hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may include, but is not limited to, hydrogen sulfide, C₃ hydrocarbons, carbon dioxide, or mixtures thereof. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may contain from about 20 vol % to about 80 vol % of hydrogen sulfide, from about 4 vol % to about 18 vol % of propane and from about 2 vol % to about 70 vol % of carbon dioxide. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 is burned to produce SO_x. The SO_x may be sequestered and/or treated using known techniques in the art.

[0456] In some embodiments, C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 includes a minimal amount of hydrogen sulfide and carbon dioxide. For example, C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 may include about 99.6 vol % of hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3, about 0.4 vol % of hydrogen sulfide and at most 1 ppm of carbon dioxide. In some embodiments, C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 is transported to other processing facilities as an energy source. In some embodiments, C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 needs no further treatment.

[0457] As depicted in FIG. 6, bottoms stream 246 may enter cryogenic separation unit 276. In cryogenic separation unit 276, bottoms stream 246 may be separated into C₂ hydrocarbons/hydrogen sulfide/carbon dioxide gas stream 278 and hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 272. In some embodiments, cryogenic separation unit 276 is 12 ft tall and includes 45 distillation stages. A top stage of cryogenic separation unit 276 may be operated at a temperature of −31° C. and a pressure of about 20 bar.

[0458] A portion or all of C₂ hydrocarbons/hydrogen sulfide/carbon dioxide gas stream 278 and hydrocarbon stream 280 may enter cryogenic separation unit 282. Hydrocarbon stream 280 may be any hydrocarbon stream suitable for use in a cryogenic extractive distillation system. In some embodiments, hydrocarbon stream 280 is n-hexane. In cryogenic separation unit 282, C₂ hydrocarbons/hydrogen sulfide/carbon dioxide gas stream 278 is separated into carbon dioxide stream 266 and hydrocarbon/H₂S stream 284. In some embodiments, carbon dioxide stream 266 includes about 2.5 vol % of hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at most 2. In some embodiments, carbon dioxide stream 266 may be mixed with diluent fluid for downhole burners, may be used as a carrier fluid for oxidizing fluid for downhole burners, may be used as a drive fluid for producing hydrocarbons, may be vented, and/or may be sequestered. In some embodiments, cryogenic separation unit 282 is 4 m tall and includes 40 distillation stages. Cryogenic separation unit 282 may be operated at a temperature of about −19° C. and a pressure of about 20 bar.

[0459] Hydrocarbon/hydrogen sulfide stream 284 may enter cryogenic separation unit 286. Hydrocarbon/hydrogen stream 284 may include solvent hydrocarbons, C₂ hydrocarbons and hydrogen sulfide. In cryogenic separation unit 286, hydrocarbon/hydrogen sulfide stream 284 may be separated into C₂ hydrocarbons/hydrogen sulfide stream 288 and hydrocarbon stream 290. Hydrocarbon stream 290 may contain hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3. In some embodiments, separation unit 286 is about 6.5 m. tall and includes 20 distillation stages. Cryogenic separation unit 286 may be operated at temperatures of about −16° C. and a pressure of about 10 bar.

[0460] Hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 272 may enter cryogenic separation unit 274. In cryogenic separation unit 274, hydrogen sulfide may be separated from hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3 to produce hydrogen sulfide stream 260 and C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250. Hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may include, but is not limited to, hydrogen sulfide, C₂ hydrocarbons, C₃ hydrocarbons, carbon dioxide, or mixtures thereof. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 contains about 31 vol % hydrogen sulfide with the balance being C₂ and C₃ hydrocarbons. Hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may be burned to produce SO_x. The SO_x may be sequestered and/or treated using known techniques in the art.

[0461] In some embodiments, cryogenic separation unit 274 is about 4.3 m tall and includes about 40 distillation stages. Temperatures in cryogenic separation unit 274 may range from about 0° C. to about 10° C. Pressure in cryogenic separation unit 274 may be about 20 bar.

[0462] C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 may include a minimal amount of hydrogen sulfide and carbon dioxide. In some embodiments, C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 includes about 50 ppm of hydrogen sulfide. In some embodiments, C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 is transported to other processing facilities as an energy source. In some embodiments, hydrocarbon stream C₃ hydrocarbon stream 250 needs no further treatment.

[0463] As depicted in FIG. 7, compressed gas stream 234 may be treated using a Ryan/Holmes process to recover the carbon dioxide from the compressed gas stream 234. Compressed gas stream 234 enters cryogenic separation unit 292. In some embodiments cryogenic separation unit 292 is about 7.6 m tall and includes 40 distillation stages. Cryogenic separation unit 292 may be operated at a temperature ranging from about 60° C. to about −56° C. and a pressure of about 30 bar. In cryogenic separation unit 292, compressed gas stream 234 may be separated into methane/carbon dioxide/hydrogen sulfide stream 294 and hydrocarbon/H₂S stream 296.

[0464] Methane/carbon dioxide/hydrogen sulfide stream 294 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at most 2 and hydrogen sulfide. Methane/carbon dioxide/hydrogen sulfide stream 294 may be compressed in compressor 298 and enter cryogenic separation unit 300. In cryogenic separation unit 300, methane/carbon dioxide/hydrogen sulfide stream 294 is separated into carbon dioxide stream 266 and methane/hydrogen sulfide stream 244. In some embodiments, cryogenic separation unit 300 is about 2.1 m tall and includes 20 distillation stages. Temperatures in cryogenic separation unit 300 may range from about −56° C. to about −96° C. at a pressure of about 45 bar.

[0465] Carbon dioxide stream 266 may include some hydrogen sulfide. For example, carbon dioxide stream 266 may include about 80 ppm of hydrogen sulfide. At least a portion of carbon dioxide stream 266 may be used as a heat exchange medium in heat exchanger 302. In some embodiments, at least a portion of carbon dioxide stream 266 is sequestered in the formation and/or at least a portion of the carbon dioxide stream is used as a diluent in downhole oxidizer assemblies.

[0466] Hydrocarbon/hydrogen sulfide stream 296 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 2 and hydrogen sulfide. Hydrocarbon/hydrogen sulfide stream 296 may pass through heat exchanger 302 and enter separation unit 304. In separation unit 304, hydrocarbon/hydrogen sulfide stream 296 may be separated into hydrocarbon stream 306 and hydrogen sulfide stream 260. In some embodiments, separation unit 304 is about 7 m tall and includes 30 distillation stages. Temperatures in separation unit 304 may range from about 60° C. to about 27° C. at a pressure of about 10 bar.

[0467] Hydrocarbon stream 306 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3. Hydrocarbon stream 306 may pass through expansion unit 308 and form purge stream 310 and hydrocarbon stream 312. Purge stream 310 may include some hydrocarbons having a carbon number greater than 5. Hydrocarbon stream 312 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at most 5. In some embodiments, hydrocarbon stream 312 includes 10 vol % n-butanes and 85 vol % hydrocarbons having a carbon number of 5. At least a part of hydrocarbon stream 312 may be recycled to cryogenic separation unit 292 to maintain a ratio of about 1.4:1 of hydrocarbons to compressed gas stream 234.

[0468] Hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may include hydrogen sulfide, C₂ hydrocarbons, and some carbon dioxide. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 includes about 13 vol % hydrogen sulfide, about 0.8 vol % carbon dioxide with the balance being C₂ hydrocarbons. At least a portion of the hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may be burned as an energy source. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 is used as a fuel source in downhole burners.

[0469] In some embodiments, substantial removal of all the hydrogen sulfide from the C₂ hydrocarbons is desired. C₂ hydrocarbons may be used as an energy source in surface facilities. Recovery of C₂ hydrocarbons may enhance the energy efficiency of the process. Separation of hydrogen sulfide from C₂ hydrocarbons may be difficult because C₂ hydrocarbons boil at approximately the same temperature as a hydrogen sulfide/C₂ hydrocarbons mixture. Addition of higher molecular weight (higher boiling) hydrocarbons does not enable the separation between hydrogen sulfide and C₂ hydrocarbons as the addition of higher molecular weight hydrocarbons decreases the volatility of the C₂ hydrocarbons. It has been advantageously found that the addition of carbon dioxide to the hydrogen sulfide/C₂ hydrocarbons mixture allows separation of hydrogen sulfide from the C₂ hydrocarbons.

[0470] As shown in FIG. 8, bottoms stream bottoms stream 246 and carbon dioxide stream 314 enter cryogenic separation unit 316. In cryogenic separation unit 316, bottoms stream 246 may be separated into C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide gas stream 258 and hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 318 by addition of sufficient carbon dioxide to form a C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide azeotrope (for example a C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide vol ratio of 0.17:1 may be used). The C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide azeotrope has a boiling point lower than the boiling point of C₂ hydrocarbons. For example, the C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide azeotrope has a boiling point that is 14° C. lower than C₂ boiling point at 10 bar, and a boiling point that is 22° C. lower than the C₂ boiling point at 40 bar. Use of a C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide azeotrope allows formation of a C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream having a minimal amount of hydrogen sulfide (for example, a C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream having at most 30 ppm, at most 25 ppm, at most 20 ppm, or at most 10 ppm of hydrogen sulfide). In some embodiments, cryogenic separation unit 316 is 3.3 m tall and includes 40 distillation stages and may be operated at a pressure of about 10 bar.

[0471] At least a portion of C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 and hydrocarbon recovery stream 320 may enter separation unit 262. Hydrocarbon recovery stream 320 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number ranging from 4 to 7. In separation unit 262, contact of C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream 258 with hydrocarbon recovery stream 320 separates hydrocarbons from the C₂ hydrocarbons/carbon dioxide stream to form separated carbon dioxide stream 266 and C₂ rich hydrocarbon stream 322. For example, a hydrocarbon recovery stream to carbon dioxide ratio of 1.25 to 1 may effective extract all the hydrocarbons from the carbon dioxide. Separated carbon dioxide stream 266 may be sequestered in the formation, used as a drive fluid, recycled to cryogenic separation unit 316, or used as a cooling fluid in other processes.

[0472] C₂ rich hydrocarbon stream 322 may enter hydrocarbon recovery unit 324. In hydrocarbon recovery unit 324, C₂ rich hydrocarbon stream 322 may be separated into light hydrocarbons stream 326 and bottom hydrocarbon stream 328. In some embodiments, hydrocarbon recovery unit 324 is 4.9 m tall, has 30 distillation stages, and is operated at a pressure of 10 bar. Light hydrocarbons stream 326 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number from 2 to 4, residual amount of hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans, and/or COS. For example, light hydrocarbons stream 326 may have about 30 ppm hydrogen sulfide, 280 ppm mercaptans and 260 ppm COS. Light hydrocarbons stream 326 may be treated further (for example, contacted with molecular sieves) to remove the sulfur compounds. In some embodiments, light hydrocarbons stream 326 requires no further purification and is suitable for transportation and/or use as a fuel.

[0473] Hydrocarbon stream 328 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number ranging from 3 to 7. Some of hydrocarbon stream 328 may be directed to separation unit 330 after passing through heat exchanger 302. Some of hydrocarbon stream 328 may pass through expansion unit 308 to form purge stream 310 and hydrocarbon recovery stream 320. Passing hydrocarbon stream 328 through to form purge stream 310 may stabilize the composition of hydrocarbon recovery stream 320 and avoid build-up of heavy hydrocarbons and organosulfur compounds. Hydrocarbon recovery stream 320 may pass through second expansion unit 308′ and/or one or more heat exchangers 302 prior to entering separation units 262, 330.

[0474] Hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 318 from cryogenic separation unit 316 may include, but is not limited to, hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3, hydrocarbons that include sulfur heteroatoms (organosulfur compounds), hydrogen sulfide, or mixtures thereof. A portion or all of hydrogen sulfide/hydrocarbon gas stream 318 and hydrocarbon recovery stream 320 enter hydrogen sulfide separation unit 330. Output from cryogenic separation unit 330 may include hydrogen sulfide stream 260 and rich C₃ hydrocarbons stream 332. To facilitate separation of the hydrogen sulfide from rich C₃ hydrocarbon stream 332, a volume ratio of 0.73 to 1 of rich C₃ hydrocarbons stream to hydrogen sulfide may be used. In some embodiments, separation unit 330 is about 2.7 m tall and includes 30 distillation stages. Cryogenic separation unit 330 may be operated at a temperature of about −16° C. and a pressure of about 10 bar. C₃ hydrocarbon stream 332 may contain hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 3. At least a portion of C₃ hydrocarbon stream 332 may enter hydrocarbon recovery unit 324.

[0475] Hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may include, but is not limited to, hydrogen sulfide, C₂ hydrocarbons, C₃ hydrocarbons, carbon dioxide, or mixtures thereof. In some embodiments, hydrogen sulfide stream 260 contains about 99 vol % hydrogen sulfide with the balance being C₂ and C₃ hydrocarbons. Hydrogen sulfide stream 260 may be burned to produce SO_x. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the hydrogen sulfide stream is used as a fuel in downhole burners. The SO_x may be used as a drive fluid, sequestered and/or treated using known techniques in the art.

[0476] As shown in FIG. 3, in situ heat treatment process liquid stream 216 enters liquid separation unit 226. In some embodiments, liquid separation unit 226 is not necessary. In liquid separation unit 226, separation of in situ heat treatment process liquid stream 216 produces gas hydrocarbon stream 228 and salty process liquid stream 230. Gas hydrocarbon stream 228 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at most 5. A portion of gas hydrocarbon stream 228 may be combined with gas hydrocarbon stream 224.

[0477] Salty process liquid stream 230 may be processed through desalting unit 336 to form liquid stream 338. Desalting unit 336 removes mineral salts and/or water from salty process liquid stream 230 using known desalting and water removal methods. In certain embodiments, desalting unit 336 is upstream of liquid separation unit 226.

[0478] Liquid stream 338 includes, but is not limited to, hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 5 and/or hydrocarbon containing heteroatoms (for example, hydrocarbons containing nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and phosphorus). Liquid stream 338 may include at least 0.001 g, at least 0.005 g, or at least 0.01 g of hydrocarbons with a boiling range distribution between about 95° C. and about 200° C. at 0.101 MPa; at least 0.01 g, at least 0.005 g, or at least 0.001 g of hydrocarbons with a boiling range distribution between about 200° C. and about 300° C. at 0.101 MPa; at least 0.001 g, at least 0.005 g, or at least 0.01 g of hydrocarbons with a boiling range distribution between about 300° C. and about 400° C. at 0.101 MPa; and at least 0.001 g, at least 0.005 g, or at least 0.01 g of hydrocarbons with a boiling range distribution between 400° C. and 650° C. at 0.101 MPa. In some embodiments, liquid stream 338 contains at most 10% by weight water, at most 5% by weight water, at most 1% by weight water, or at most 0.1% by weight water.

[0479] In some embodiments, the separated liquid stream may have a boiling range distribution between about 50° C. and about 350° C., between about 60° C. and 340° C., between about 70° C. and 330° C. or between about 80° C. and 320° C. In some embodiments, the separated liquid stream has a boiling range distribution between 180° C. and 330° C.

[0480] In some embodiments, at least 50%, at least 70%, or at least 90% by weight of the total hydrocarbons in the separated liquid stream have a carbon number from 8 to 13. About 50% to about 100%, about 60% to about 95%, about 70% to about 90%, or about 75% to 85% by weight of liquid stream may have a carbon number distribution from 8 to 13. At least 50% by weight of the total hydrocarbons in the separated liquid stream may have a carbon number from about 9 to 12 or from 10 to 11.

[0481] In some embodiments, the separated liquid stream has at most 15%, at most 10%, at most 5% by weight of naphthenes; at least 70%, at least 80%, or at least 90% by weight total paraffins; at most 5%, at most 3%, or at most 1% by weight olefins; and at most 30%, at most 20%, or at most 10% by weight aromatics.

[0482] In some embodiments, the separated liquid stream has a nitrogen compound content of at least 0.01%, at least 0.1% or at least 0.4% by weight nitrogen compound. The separated liquid stream may have a sulfur compound content of at least 0.01%, at least 0.5% or at least 1% by weight sulfur compound.

[0483] After exiting desalting unit 336, liquid stream 338 enters filtration system 342. In some embodiments, filtration system 342 is connected to the outlet of the desalting unit. Filtration system 342 separates at least a portion of the clogging compounds from liquid stream 338. In some embodiments, filtration system 342 is skid mounted. Skid mounting filtration system 342 may allow the filtration system to be moved from one processing unit to another. In some embodiments, filtration system 342 includes one or more membrane separators, for example, one or more nanofiltration membranes or one or more reverse osmosis membranes. Removal of clogging compositions from liquid stream 338 is described in U.S. Published Patent Application No. 2007-0131428 to den Boestert et al., which is incorporated by reference herein.

[0484] In some embodiments, the membrane separation is a continuous process. Liquid stream 338 passes over the membrane due to a pressure difference to obtain a filtered liquid stream 344 (permeate) and/or recycle liquid stream 346 (retentate). In some embodiments, filtered liquid stream 344 may have reduced concentrations of compositions and/or particles that cause clogging in downstream processing systems. Continuous recycling of recycle liquid stream 346 through nanofiltration system can increase the production of filtered liquid stream 344 to as much as 95% of the original volume of liquid stream 338. Recycle liquid stream 346 may be continuously recycled through membrane module for at least 10 hours, for at least one day, or for at least one week without cleaning the feed side of the membrane. Upon completion of the filtration, waste stream 348 (retentate) may include a high concentration of compositions and/or particles that cause clogging. Waste stream 348 exits filtration system 342 and is transported to other processing units such as, for example, a delayed coking unit and/or a gasification unit.

[0485] In some embodiments, liquid stream 338 is contacted with hydrogen in the presence of one or more catalysts to change one or more desired properties of the crude feed to meet transportation and/or refinery specifications using known hydrodemetallation, hydrodesulfurization, hydrodenitrofication techniques. Other methods to change one or more desired properties of the crude feed are described in U.S. Published Patent Applications Nos. 2005-0133414; 2006-0231465; and 2007-0000810 to Bhan et al.; 2005-0133405 to Wellington et al.; and 2006-0289340 to Brownscombe et al., all of which are incorporated by reference herein.

[0486] In some embodiments, the hydrotreated liquid stream has a nitrogen compound content of at most 200 ppm by weight, at most 150 ppm, at most 110 ppm, at most 50 ppm, or at most 10 ppm of nitrogen compounds. The separated liquid stream may have a sulfur compound content of at most 1000 ppm, at most 500 ppm, at most 300 ppm, at most 100 ppm, or at most 10 ppm by weight of sulfur compounds.

[0487] In some embodiments, the desalting unit may produce a liquid hydrocarbon stream and a salty process liquid stream, as shown in FIG. 9. In situ heat treatment process liquid stream 216 enters liquid separation unit 226. Separation unit 226 may include one or more distillation units. In liquid separation unit 226, separation of in situ heat treatment process liquid stream 216 produces gas hydrocarbon stream 228, salty process liquid stream 230, and liquid hydrocarbon stream 350. Gas hydrocarbon stream 228 may include hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at most 5. A portion of gas hydrocarbon stream 228 may be combined with gas hydrocarbon stream 224. Salty process liquid stream 230 may be processed as described in FIG. 3. Salty process liquid stream 230 may include hydrocarbons having a boiling point above 260° C. In some embodiments and as depicted in FIG. 9, salty process liquid stream 230 enters desalting unit 336. In desalting unit 336, salty process liquid stream 230 may be treated to form liquid stream 338 using known desalting and water removal methods. Liquid stream 338 may enter separation unit 352. In separation unit 352, liquid stream 338 is separated into bottoms stream 354 and hydrocarbon stream 356. In some embodiments, hydrocarbon stream 356 may have a boiling range distribution between about 200° C. and about 350° C., between about 220° C. and 340° C., between about 230° C. and 330° C. or between about 240° C. and 320° C.

[0488] In some embodiments, at least 50%, at least 70%, or at least 90% by weight of the total hydrocarbons in hydrocarbon stream 356 have a carbon number from 8 to 13. About 50% to about 100%, about 60% to about 95%, about 70% to about 90%, or about 75% to 85% by weight of liquid stream may have a carbon number distribution from 8 to 13. At least 50% by weight of the total hydrocarbons in the separated liquid stream may have a carbon number from about 9 to 12 or from 10 to 11.

[0489] In some embodiments, hydrocarbon stream 356 has at most 15%, at most 10%, at most 5% by weight of naphthenes; at least 70%, at least 80%, or at least 90% by weight total paraffins; at most 5%, at most 3%, or at most 1% by weight olefins; and at most 30%, at most 20%, or at most 10% by weight aromatics.

[0490] In some embodiments, hydrocarbon stream 356 has a nitrogen compound content of at least 0.01%, at least 0.1% or at least 0.4% by weight nitrogen compound. The separated liquid stream may have a sulfur compound content of at least 0.01%, at least 0.5% or at least 1% by weight sulfur compound.

[0491] Hydrocarbon stream 356 enters hydrotreating unit 358. In hydrotreating unit 358, liquid stream 338 may be hydrotreated to form compounds suitable for processing to hydrogen and/or commercial products.

[0492] Liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 from liquid separation unit 226 may include hydrocarbons having a boiling point up to 260° C. Liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 may include entrained asphaltenes and/or other compounds that may contribute to the instability of hydrocarbon streams. For example, liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 is a naphtha/kerosene fraction that includes entrained, partially dissolved, and/or dissolved asphaltenes and/or high molecular weight compounds that may contribute to phase instability of the liquid hydrocarbon stream. In some embodiments, liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 may include at least 0.5% by weight asphaltenes, 1% by weight asphaltenes or at least 5% by weight asphaltenes.

[0493] As properties of the liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 are changed during processing (for example, TAN, asphaltenes, P-value, olefin content, mobilized fluids content, visbroken fluids content, pyrolyzed fluids content, or combinations thereof), the asphaltenes and other components may become less soluble in the liquid hydrocarbon stream. In some instances, components in the produced fluids and/or components in the separated hydrocarbons may form two phases and/or become insoluble. Formation of two phases, through flocculation of asphaltenes, change in concentration of components in the produced fluids, change in concentration of components in separated hydrocarbons, and/or precipitation of components may cause processing problems (for example, plugging) and/or result in hydrocarbons that do not meet pipeline, transportation, and/or refining specifications. In some embodiments, further treatment of the produced fluids and/or separated hydrocarbons is necessary to produce products with desired properties.

[0494] During processing, the P-value of the separated hydrocarbons may be monitored and the stability of the produced fluids and/or separated hydrocarbons may be assessed. Typically, a P-value that is at most 1.0 indicates that flocculation of asphaltenes from the separated hydrocarbons may occur. If the P-value is initially at least 1.0 and such P-value increases or is relatively stable during heating, then this indicates that the separated hydrocarbons are relatively stable.

[0495] Liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 may be treated to at least partially remove asphaltenes and/or other compounds that may contribute to instability. Removal of the asphaltenes and/or other compounds that may contribute to instability may inhibit plugging in downstream processing units. Removal of the asphaltenes and/or other compounds that may contribute to instability may enhance processing unit efficiencies and/or prevent plugging of transportation pipelines.

[0496] Liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 may enter filtration system 342. Filtration system 342 separates at least a portion of the asphaltenes and/or other compounds that contribute to instability from liquid hydrocarbon stream 350. In some embodiments, filtration system 342 is skid mounted. Skid mounting filtration system 342 may allow the filtration system to be moved from one processing unit to another. In some embodiments, filtration system 342 includes one or more membrane separators, for example, one or more nanofiltration membranes or one or more reverse osmosis membranes. Use of a filtration system that operates at below ambient, ambient, or slightly higher than ambient temperatures may reduce energy costs as compared to conventional catalytic and/or thermal methods to remove asphaltenes from a hydrocarbon stream.

[0497] The membranes may be ceramic membranes and/or polymeric membranes. The ceramic membranes may be ceramic membranes having a molecular weight cut off of at most 2000 Daltons (Da), at most 1000 Da, or at most 500 Da. Ceramic membranes may not swell during removal of the desired materials from a substrate (for example, asphaltenes from the liquid stream). In addition, ceramic membranes may be used at elevated temperatures. Examples of ceramic membranes include, but are not limited to, mesoporous titania, mesoporous gamma-alumina, mesoporous zirconia, mesoporous silica, and combinations thereof.

[0498] Polymeric membranes may include top layers made of a dense membrane and a base layers (supports) made of porous membranes. The polymeric membranes may be arranged to allow the liquid stream (permeate) to flow first through the dense membrane top layer and then through the base layer so that the pressure difference over the membrane pushes the top layer onto the base layer. The polymeric membranes are organophilic or hydrophobic membranes so that water present in the liquid stream is retained or substantially retained in the retentate.

[0499] The dense membrane layer of the polymeric membrane may separate at least a portion or substantially all of the asphaltenes from liquid hydrocarbon stream 350. In some embodiments, the dense polymeric membrane has properties such that liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 passes through the membrane by dissolving in and diffusing through the structure of dense membrane. At least a portion of the asphaltenes may not dissolve and/or diffuse through the dense membrane, thus they are removed. The asphaltenes may not dissolve and/or diffuse through the dense membrane because of the complex structure of the asphaltenes and/or their high molecular weight. The dense membrane layer may include cross-linked structure as described in WO 96/27430 to Schmidt et al., which is incorporated by reference herein. A thickness of the dense membrane layer may range from 1 micrometer to 15 micrometers, from 2 micrometers to 10 micrometers, or from 3 micrometers to 5 micrometers.

[0500] The dense membrane may be made from polysiloxane, poly-di-methyl siloxane, poly-octyl-methyl siloxane, polyimide, polyaramide, poly-tri-methyl silyl propyne, or mixtures thereof. Porous base layers may be made of materials that provide mechanical strength to the membrane. The porous base layers may be any porous membranes used for ultra filtration, nanofiltration, and/or reverse osmosis. Examples of such materials are polyacrylonitrile, polyamideimide in combination with titanium oxide, polyetherimide, polyvinylidenedifluoroide, polytetrafluoroethylene, or combinations thereof.

[0501] During separation of asphaltenes from liquid stream 350, the pressure difference across the membrane may range from about 0.5 MPa to about 6 MPa, from about 1 MPa to about 5 MPa, or from about 2 MPa to about 4 MPa. A temperature of the unit during separation may range from the pour point of liquid hydrocarbon stream 350 up to 100° C., from about −20° C. to about 100° C., from about 10° C. to about 90° C., or from about 20° C. to about 85° C. During a continuous operation, the permeate flux rate may be at most 50% of the initial flux, at most 70% of the initial flux, or at most 90% of the initial flux. A weight recovery of the permeate on feed may range from about 50% by weight to 97% by weight, from about 60% by weight to 90% by weight, or from about 70% by weight to 80% by weight.

[0502] Filtration system 342 may include one or more membrane separators. The membrane separators may include one or more membrane modules. When two or more membrane separators are used, the separators may be arranged in a parallel configuration to allow feed (retentate) from a first membrane separator to flow into a second membrane separator. Examples of membrane modules include, but are not limited to, spirally wound modules, plate and frame modules, hollow fibers, and tubular modules. Membrane modules are described in Encyclopedia of Chemical Engineering, 4^th Ed., 1995, John Wiley & Sons Inc., Vol. 16, pages 158-164. Examples of spirally wound modules are described in, for example, WO/2006/040307 to Boestert et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,102,551 to Pasternak; U.S. Pat. No. 5,093,002 to Pasternak; U.S. Pat. No. 5,275,726 to Feimer et al.; U.S. Pat. No. 5,458,774 to Mannapperuma; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,150,118 to Finkle et al, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.

[0503] In some embodiments, a spirally wound module is used when a dense membrane is used in filtration system 342. A spirally wound module may include a membrane assembly of two membrane sheets between which a permeate spacer sheet is sandwiched. The membrane assembly may be sealed at three sides. The fourth side is connected to a permeate outlet conduit such that the area between the membranes is in fluid communication with the interior of the conduit. A feed spacer sheet may be arranged on top of one of the membranes. The assembly with feed spacer sheet is rolled up around the permeate outlet conduit to form a substantially cylindrical spirally wound membrane module. The feed spacer may have a thickness of at least 0.6 mm, at least 1 mm, or at least 3 mm to allow sufficient membrane surface to be packed into the spirally wound module. In some embodiments, the feed spacer is a woven feed spacer. During operation, the feed mixture may be passed from one end of the cylindrical module between the membrane assemblies along the feed spacer sheet sandwiched between feed sides of the membranes. Part of the feed mixture passes through either one of the membrane sheets to the permeate side. The resulting permeate flows along the permeate spacer sheet into the permeate outlet conduit.

[0504] In some embodiments, the membrane separation is a continuous process. Liquid stream 350 passes over the membrane due to the pressure difference to obtain filtered liquid stream 360 (permeate) and/or recycle liquid stream 362 (retentate). In some embodiments, filtered liquid stream 360 may have reduced concentrations of asphaltenes and/or high molecular weight compounds that may contribute to phase instability. Continuous recycling of recycle liquid stream 362 through the filter system can increase the production of filtered liquid stream 360 to as much as 95% of the original volume of filtered liquid stream 360. Recycle liquid stream 362 may be continuously recycled through a spirally wound membrane module for at least 10 hours, for at least one day, or for at least one week without cleaning the feed side of the membrane. Upon completion of the filtration, asphaltene enriched stream 364 (retentate) may include a high concentration of asphaltenes and/or high molecular weight compounds.

[0505] At least a portion of filtered liquid stream 360 may be sent to hydrotreating unit 358 for further processing. In some embodiments, at least a portion of filtered liquid stream 360 may be sent to other processing units.

[0506] In some embodiments, at least a portion of or substantially all of filtered liquid stream 360 enters separation unit 368. In separation unit 368, filtered liquid stream 360 may be separated into hydrocarbon stream 370 and liquid hydrocarbon stream 372. Hydrocarbon stream 370 may be rich in aromatic hydrocarbons. Liquid hydrocarbon stream 372 may include a small amount of aromatic hydrocarbons. Liquid hydrocarbon stream 372 may include hydrocarbons having a boiling point up to 260° C. Liquid hydrocarbon stream 372 may enter hydrotreating unit 358 and/or other processing units.

[0507] Hydrocarbon stream 370 may include aromatic hydrocarbons and hydrocarbons having a boiling point up to about 260° C. A content of aromatics in aromatic rich stream 370 may be at most 90%, at most 70%, at most 50%, or most 10% of the aromatic content of filtered liquid stream 360, as measured by UV analysis such as method SMS-2714. Aromatic rich stream 370 may suitable for use as a diluent for undesirable streams that may not otherwise be suitable for additional processing. The undesirable streams may have low P-values, phase instability, and/or asphaltenes. Addition of aromatic rich stream 370 to the undesirable streams may allow the undesirable streams to be processed and/or transported, thus increasing the economic value of the stream undesirable streams. Aromatic rich stream 370 may be sold as a diluent and/or used as a diluent for produced fluids. All or a portion of aromatic rich stream 370 may be recycled to separation unit 226.

[0508] In some embodiments, membrane separation unit 368 includes one or more membrane separators, for example, one or more nanofiltration membranes and/or one or more reverse osmosis membranes. The membrane may be a ceramic membrane and/or a polymeric membrane. The ceramic membrane may be a ceramic membrane having a molecular weight cut off of at most 2000 Daltons (Da), at most 1000 Da, or at most 500 Da.

[0509] The polymeric membrane includes a top layer made of a dense membrane and a base layer (support) made of a porous membrane. The polymeric membrane may be arranged to allow the liquid stream (permeate) to flow first through the dense membrane top layer and then through the base layer so that the pressure difference over the membrane pushes the top layer onto the base layer. The dense polymeric membrane has properties such that as liquid hydrocarbon stream 360 passes through the membrane aromatic hydrocarbons are selectively separated from the liquid hydrocarbon stream to form aromatic rich stream 370. In some embodiments, the dense membrane layer may separate at least a portion of or substantially all of the aromatics from liquid hydrocarbon stream 360. The dense membrane may be a silicon based membrane, a polyamide based membrane and/or a polyol membrane. Aromatic selective membranes may be purchased from W. R. Grace & Co. (New York, USA), PolyAn (Berlin, Germany), and/or Borsig Membrane Technology (Berlin, Germany).

[0510] Liquid stream 374 (retentate) from membrane separation unit 368 may be recycled back to the membrane separation unit. Continuous recycling of recycle liquid stream 374 idem through nanofiltration system can increase the production of aromatic rich stream 370 to as much as 95% of the original volume of the filtered liquid stream. Recycle liquid stream 374 may be continuously recycled through a spirally wound membrane module for at least 10 hours, for at least one day, for at least one week or until the desired content of aromatics in aromatic rich stream 370 is obtained. Upon completion of the filtration, or when the retentate includes an acceptable amount of aromatics, liquid stream 372 (retentate) from separation unit 368 may be sent to hydrotreating unit 358 and/or other processing units.

[0511] Membranes of separation unit 368 may be ceramic membranes and/or polymeric membranes. During separation of aromatic hydrocarbons from liquid stream 360 in separation unit 368, the pressure difference across the membrane may range from about 0.5 MPa to about 6 MPa, from about 1 MPa to about 5 MPa, or from about 2 MPa to about 4 MPa. Temperature of separation unit 368 during separation may range from the pour point of the liquid hydrocarbon stream 360 up to 100° C., from about −20° C. to about 100° C., from about 10° C. to about 90° C., or from about 20° C. to about 85° C. During a continuous operation, the permeate flux rate may be at most 50% of the initial flux, at most 70% of the initial flux, or at most 90% of the initial flux. A weight recovery of the permeate on feed may range from about 50% by weight to 97% by weight, from about 60% by weight to 90% by weight, or from about 70% by weight to 80% by weight.

[0512] As shown in FIGS. 3, and 9, liquid stream 338 and/or filtered liquid stream 344 may enter hydrotreating unit 358. In some embodiments, hydrogen source 376 enters hydrotreating unit 358 in addition to liquid stream 338 and/or filtered liquid stream 344. In some embodiments, the hydrogen source is not needed. Liquid stream 338 and/or filtered liquid stream 344 may be selectively hydrogenated in hydrotreating unit 358 such that di-olefins are reduced to mono-olefins. For example, liquid stream 338 and/or filtered liquid stream 344 is contacted with hydrogen in the presence of DN-200 (Criterion Catalysts & Technologies, Houston Tex., U.S.A.) at temperatures ranging from 100° C. to 200° C. and total pressures of 0.1 MPa to 40 MPa to produce liquid stream 378. In some embodiments, filtered liquid stream 344 is hydrotreated at a temperature ranging from about 190° C. to about 200° C. at a pressure of at least 6 MPa. Liquid stream 378 includes a reduced content of di-olefins and an increased content of mono-olefins relative to the di-olefin and mono-olefin content of liquid stream 338. The conversion of di-olefins to mono-olefins under these conditions is, in some embodiments, at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 80% or at least 90%. Liquid stream 378 exits hydrotreating unit 358 and enters one or more processing units positioned downstream of hydrotreating unit 358. The units positioned downstream of hydrotreating unit 358 may include distillation units, catalytic reforming units, hydrocracking units, hydrotreating units, hydrogenation units, hydrodesulfurization units, catalytic cracking units, delayed coking units, gasification units, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, hydrotreating prior to fractionation is not necessary. In some embodiments, liquid stream 378 may be severely hydrotreated to remove undesired compounds from the liquid stream prior to fractionation. In certain embodiments, liquid stream 378 may be fractionated and then produced streams may each be hydrotreated to meet industry standards and/or transportation standards.

[0513] Liquid stream 378 may exit hydrotreating unit 358 and enter fractionation unit 380. In fractionation unit 380, liquid stream 378 may be distilled to form one or more crude products. Crude products include, but are not limited to, C₃-C₅ hydrocarbon stream 382, naphtha stream 384, kerosene stream 386, diesel stream 388, and bottoms stream 354. Fractionation unit 380 may be operated at atmospheric and/or under vacuum conditions.

[0514] In some embodiments, hydrotreated liquid streams and/or streams produced from fractions (for example, aromatic rich streams, distillates and/or naphtha) are blended with the in situ heat treatment process liquid and/or formation fluid to produce a blended fluid. The blended fluid may have enhanced physical stability and chemical stability as compared to the formation fluid. The blended fluid may have a reduced amount of reactive species (for example, di-olefins, other olefins and/or compounds containing oxygen, sulfur and/or nitrogen) relative to the formation fluid. Thus, chemical stability of the blended fluid is enhanced. The blended fluid may decrease an amount of asphaltenes relative to the formation fluid. Thus, physical stability of the blended fluid is enhanced. The blended fluid may be a more a fungible feed than the formation fluid and/or the liquid stream produced from the in situ heat treatment process. The blended feed may be more suitable for transportation, for use in chemical processing units and/or for use in refining units than formation fluid.

[0515] In some embodiments, a fluid produced by methods described herein from an oil shale formation may be blended with heavy oil/tar sands in situ heat treatment process (IHTP) fluid. Since the oil shale liquid is substantially paraffinic and the heavy oil/tar sands IHTP fluid is substantially aromatic, the blended fluid exhibits enhanced stability. In certain embodiments, in situ heat treatment process fluid may be blended with bitumen to obtain a feed suitable for use in refining units. Blending the IHTP fluid and/or bitumen with the produced fluid may enhance the chemical and/or physical stability of the blended product. Thus, the blend may be transported and/or distributed to processing units.

[0516] As shown in FIGS. 3 and 9, C₃-C₅ hydrocarbon stream 382 produced from fractionation unit 380 and/or hydrocarbon gas stream 224 enter alkylation unit 396. In alkylation unit 396, reaction of the olefins in hydrocarbon gas stream 224 (for example, propylene, butylenes, amylenes, or combinations thereof) with the iso-paraffins in C₃-C₅ hydrocarbon stream 382 produces hydrocarbon stream 398. In some embodiments, the olefin content in hydrocarbon gas stream 224 is acceptable and an additional source of olefins is not needed. Hydrocarbon stream 398 includes hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 4. Hydrocarbons having a carbon number of at least 4 include, but are not limited to, butanes, pentanes, hexanes, heptanes, and octanes. In certain embodiments, hydrocarbons produced from alkylation unit 396 have an octane number greater than 70, greater than 80, or greater than 90. In some embodiments, hydrocarbon stream 398 is suitable for use as gasoline without further processing.

[0517] In some embodiments and as depicted in FIGS. 3 and 9, bottoms stream 354 may be hydrocracked to produce naphtha and/or other products. The resulting naphtha may, however, need reformation to alter the octane level so that the product may be sold commercially as gasoline. Alternatively, bottoms stream 354 may be treated in a catalytic cracker to produce naphtha and/or feed for an alkylation unit. In some embodiments, naphtha stream 384, kerosene stream 386, and diesel stream 388 have an imbalance of paraffinic hydrocarbons, olefinic hydrocarbons, and/or aromatic hydrocarbons. The streams may not have a suitable quantity of olefins and/or aromatics for use in commercial products. This imbalance may be changed by combining at least a portion of the streams to form combined stream 400 which has a boiling range distribution from about 38° C. to about 343° C. Catalytically cracking combined stream 400 may produce olefins and/or other streams suitable for use in an alkylation unit and/or other processing units. In some embodiments, naphtha stream 384 is hydrocracked to produce olefins.

[0518] Combined stream 400 and bottoms stream 354 from fractionation unit 380 enters catalytic cracking unit 402. Under controlled cracking conditions (for example, controlled temperatures and pressures), catalytic cracking unit 402 produces additional C₃-C₅ hydrocarbon stream 382′, gasoline hydrocarbons stream 404, and additional kerosene stream 386′.

[0519] Additional C₃-C₅ hydrocarbon stream 382′ may be sent to alkylation unit 396, combined with C₃-C₅ hydrocarbon stream 382, and/or combined with hydrocarbon gas stream 224 to produce gasoline suitable for commercial sale. In some embodiments, the olefin content in hydrocarbon gas stream 224 is acceptable and an additional source of olefins is not needed.

[0520] Many wells are needed for treating the hydrocarbon formation using the in situ heat treatment process. In some embodiments, vertical or substantially vertical wells are formed in the formation. In some embodiments, horizontal or U-shaped wells are formed in the formation. In some embodiments, combinations of horizontal and vertical wells are formed in the formation.

[0521] A manufacturing approach for the formation of wellbores in the formation may be used due to the large number of wells that need to be formed for the in situ heat treatment process. The manufacturing approach may be particularly applicable for forming wells for in situ heat treatment processes that utilize u-shaped wells or other types of wells that have long non-vertically oriented sections. Surface openings for the wells may be positioned in lines running along one or two sides of the treatment area. FIG. 10 depicts a schematic representation of an embodiment of a system for forming wellbores of the in situ heat treatment process.

[0522] The manufacturing approach for the formation of wellbores may include: 1) delivering flat rolled steel to near site tube manufacturing plant that forms coiled tubulars and/or pipe for surface pipelines; 2) manufacturing large diameter coiled tubing that is tailored to the required well length using electrical resistance welding (ERW), wherein the coiled tubing has customized ends for the bottom hole assembly (BHA) and hang off at the wellhead; 3) deliver the coiled tubing to a drilling rig on a large diameter reel; 4) drill to total depth with coil and a retrievable bottom hole assembly; 5) at total depth, disengage the coil and hang the coil on the wellhead; 6) retrieve the BHA; 7) launch an expansion cone to expand the coil against the formation; 8) return empty spool to the tube manufacturing plant to accept a new length of coiled tubing; 9) move the gantry type drilling platform to the next well location; and 10) repeat.

[0523] In situ heat treatment process locations may be distant from established cities and transportation networks. Transporting formed pipe or coiled tubing for wellbores to the in situ process location may be untenable due to the lengths and quantity of tubulars needed for the in situ heat treatment process. One or more tube manufacturing facilities 406 may be formed at or near to the in situ heat treatment process location. The tubular manufacturing facility may form plate steel into coiled tubing. The plate steel may be delivered to tube manufacturing facilities 406 by truck, train, ship or other transportation system. In some embodiments, different sections of the coiled tubing may be formed of different alloys. The tubular manufacturing facility may use ERW to longitudinally weld the coiled tubing.

[0524] Tube manufacturing facilities 406 may be able to produce tubing having various diameters. Tube manufacturing facilities may initially be used to produce coiled tubing for forming wellbores. The tube manufacturing facilities may also be used to produce heater components, piping for transporting formation fluid to surface facilities, and other piping and tubing needs for the in situ heat treatment process.

[0525] Tube manufacturing facilities 406 may produce coiled tubing used to form wellbores in the formation. The coiled tubing may have a large diameter. The diameter of the coiled tubing may be from about 4 inches to about 8 inches in diameter. In some embodiments, the diameter of the coiled tubing is about 6 inches in diameter. The coiled tubing may be placed on large diameter reels. Large diameter reels may be needed due to the large diameter of the tubing. The diameter of the reel may be from about 10 m to about 50 m. One reel may hold all of the tubing needed for completing a single well to total depth.

[0526] In some embodiments, tube manufacturing facilities 406 has the ability to apply expandable zonal inflow profiler (EZIP) material to one or more sections of the tubing that the facility produces. The EZIP material may be placed on portions of the tubing that are to be positioned near and next to aquifers or high permeability layers in the formation. When activated, the EZIP material forms a seal against the formation that may serve to inhibit migration of formation fluid between different layers. The use of EZIP layers may inhibit saline formation fluid from mixing with non-saline formation fluid.

[0527] The size of the reels used to hold the coiled tubing may prohibit transport of the reel using standard moving equipment and roads. Because tube manufacturing facility 406 is at or near the in situ heat treatment location, the equipment used to move the coiled tubing to the well sites does not have to meet existing road transportation regulations and can be designed to move large reels of tubing. In some embodiments the equipment used to move the reels of tubing is similar to cargo gantries used to move shipping containers at ports and other facilities. In some embodiments, the gantries are wheeled units. In some embodiments, the coiled tubing may be moved using a rail system or other transportation system.

[0528] The coiled tubing may be moved from the tubing manufacturing facility to the well site using gantries 408. Drilling gantry 410 may be used at the well site. Several drilling gantries 410 may be used to form wellbores at different locations. Supply systems for drilling fluid or other needs may be coupled to drilling gantries 410 from central facilities 412.

[0529] Drilling gantry 410 or other equipment may be used to set the conductor for the well. Drilling gantry 410 takes coiled tubing, passes the coiled tubing through a straightener, and a BHA attached to the tubing is used to drill the wellbore to depth. In some embodiments, a composite coil is positioned in the coiled tubing at tube manufacturing facility 406. The composite coil allows the wellbore to be formed without having drilling fluid flowing between the formation and the tubing. The composite coil also allows the BHA to be retrieved from the wellbore. The composite coil may be pulled from the tubing after wellbore formation. The composite coil may be returned to the tubing manufacturing facility to be placed in another length of coiled tubing. In some embodiments, the BHAs are not retrieved from the wellbores.

[0530] In some embodiments, drilling gantry 410 takes the reel of coiled tubing from gantry 408. In some embodiments, gantry 408 is coupled to drilling gantry 410 during the formation of the wellbore. For example, the coiled tubing may be fed from gantry 408 to drilling gantry 410, or the drilling gantry lifts the gantry to a feed position and the tubing is fed from the gantry to the drilling gantry.

[0531] The wellbore may be formed using the bottom hole assembly, coiled tubing and the drilling gantry. The BHA may be self-seeking to the destination. The BHA may form the opening at a fast rate. In some embodiments, the BHA forms the opening at a rate of about 100 meters per hour.

[0532] After the wellbore is drilled to total depth, the tubing may be suspended from the wellhead. An expansion cone may be used to expand the tubular against the formation. In some embodiments, the drilling gantry is used to install a heater and/or other equipment in the wellbore.

[0533] When drilling gantry 410 is finished at well site 414, the drilling gantry may release gantry 408 with the empty reel or return the empty reel to the gantry. Gantry 408 may take the empty reel back to tube manufacturing facility 406 to be loaded with another coiled tube. Gantries 408 may move on looped path 416 from tube manufacturing facility 406 to well sites 414 and back to the tube manufacturing facility.

[0534] Drilling gantry 410 may be moved to the next well site. Global positioning satellite information, lasers and/or other information may be used to position the drilling gantry at desired locations. Additional wellbores may be formed until all of the wellbores for the in situ heat treatment process are formed.

[0535] In some embodiments, positioning and/or tracking system may be utilized to track gantries 408, drilling gantries 410, coiled tubing reels and other equipment and materials used to develop the in situ heat treatment location. Tracking systems may include bar code tracking systems to ensure equipment and materials arrive where and when needed.

[0536] Directionally drilled wellbores may be formed using steerable motors. Deviations in wellbore trajectory may be made using a slide drilling systems or using rotary steerable systems (RSS). During use of slide drilling systems, the mud motor rotates the bit downhole with little or no rotation of the drilling string from the surface during trajectory changes. The BHA is fitted with a bent sub and/or a bent housing mud motor for directional drilling. The bent sub and the drill bit are oriented in the desired direction. With little or no rotation of the drilling string, the drill bit is rotated with the mud motor to set the trajectory. When the desired trajectory is obtained, the entire drilling string is rotated and drills straight rather than at an angle. Drill bit direction changes may be made by utilizing torque/rotary tweaking to nudge the drill bit in the desired direction. FIG. 11 depicts time at drilling string rotation during direction change versus rotation speed (rpm) of the drilling string for a conventional steerable motor BHA during a drill bit direction change.

[0537] By controlling the amount of wellbore drilled in the sliding and rotating modes, the wellbore trajectory can be controlled. Torque and drag during sliding and rotating modes may limit the capabilities of slide mode drilling. Steerable motors may produce tortuosity in the slide mode. Tortuosity may make further sliding more difficult. Many methods have been developed, or are being developed, to improve on slide drilling systems. Examples of improvements to slide drilling systems include agitators, low weight bits, slippery muds, and torque/toolface control systems.

[0538] Limitations inherent in slide drilling led to the development of rotary steerable systems (RSS). RSS drilling drills directionally with continuous rotation from the surface. There is no need to slide the drilling string. Continuous rotation transfers weight to the drill bit more efficiently, thus increasing the rate of penetration. Current RSS systems may be mechanically and/or electrically complicated with a high cost of delivery due to service companies requiring a high rate of return and due to relatively high failure rates for the systems.

[0539] In an embodiment, a dual motor RSS is used. The dual motor RSS allows a bent sub and/or bent housing mud motor to change the trajectory of the drilling while the drilling string remains in rotary mode. The dual motor RSS uses a second motor in the bottom hole assembly (BHA) to rotate a portion of the BHA in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the drilling string. The addition of the second motor may allow continuous forward rotation of a drilling string while simultaneously controlling the drill bit and, thus, the directional response of the BHA. Drill bit control may be achieved with the rotation speed of the drilling string.

[0540] FIG. 12 depicts a schematic representation of an embodiment of drilling string 418 with dual motors in BHA 420. Drilling string 418 is coupled to BHA 420. BHA 420 includes motor 422A and motor 422B. Motor 422A may be a bent sub and/or bent housing steerable mud motor that drives drill bit 424. Motor 422B may be a straight motor with a rotation direction that is opposite to the rotation of drilling string 418 and/or motor 422A. Motor 422B may operate at a relatively low rotary speed and have high torque capacity as compared to motor 422A. BHA 420 may include sensing array 426 between motors 422A, motor 422B.

[0541] Motor 422B may rotate in a direction opposite to the rotation of drilling string 418. Thus, portions of BHA 420 beyond motor 422B have less rotation in the direction of rotation of drilling string 418 due to motor 422B. The revolutions per minute (rpm) versus differential pressure relationship for BHA 420 may be assessed prior to running drilling string 418 and the BHA 420 in the formation to determine the differential pressure at neutral drilling speed (i.e., when the drilling string speed is equal and opposite to the speed of motor 422B). Measured differential pressure may be used by a control system during drilling to control the speed of the drilling string relative to the neutral drilling speed.

[0542] In some embodiments, motor 422B is operated at a substantially fixed speed. For example, motor 422B may be operated at a speed of 30 rpm. Other speeds may be used as desired.

[0543] The rotation speed of drilling string 418 may be used to control the trajectory of the wellbore being formed. For example, drilling string 418 may initially be rotating at 40 rpm, and motor 422B rotates at 30 rpm. The counter-rotation of motor 422B and drilling string 418 results in a forward rotation speed of 10 rpm in the lower portion of BHA 420 (the portion of the BHA below motor 422B). When a directional course correction is to be made, the speed of drilling string 418 is changed to the neutral drilling speed. Because drilling string 418 is rotating, there is no need to lift drill bit 424 off the bottom of the borehole. Operating at neutral drilling speed may effectively cancel the torque of the drilling string so that drill bit 424 is subjected to torque induced by motor 422A and the formation.

[0544] The continuous rotation of drilling string 418 keeps windup of the drilling string consistent and stabilizes drill bit 424. Directional changes of drill bit 424 may be made by changing the speed of drilling string 418. Using a dual motor RSS system allows the changing of the direction of the drilling string to occur while the drilling string rotates at or near the normal operating rotation speed of drilling string 418. FIG. 13 depicts time at rotation speed during directional change versus change in drilling string rotating speed for the dual motor drilling string during the drill bit direction change. Drill bit control is substantially the same as for conventional slide mode drilling where torque/rotary tweaking is used to nudge the drill bit in the desired direction, but 0 on the x-axis of FIG. 11 becomes N in FIG. 13 (the neutral drilling string speed).

[0545] The connection of BHA 420 to drilling string 418 of the dual motor RSS system depicted in FIG. 12 may be subjected to the net effect of all the torque components required to rotate the entire BHA (including torque generated at drill bit 424 during wellbore formation). Threaded connections along drilling string 418 may include profile-matched sleeves such as those known in the art for utilities drilling systems.

[0546] In some embodiments, the control system used to control wellbore formation includes a system that sets a desired rotation speed of drilling string 418 when direction changes in trajectory of the wellbore are to be implemented. The system may include fine tuning of the desired drilling string rotation speed.

[0547] In certain embodiments, drilling string 418 is integrated with position measurement and down hole tools (for example, sensing array 426) to autonomously control the hole path along a designed geometry. An autonomous control system for controlling the path of drilling string 418 may utilize at least three domains of functionality: measurement, trajectory, and control. Measurement may be made using sensor systems and/or other equipment hardware that assess angles, distances, magnetic fields and/or other data. Trajectory may include flight path calculation and algorithms that utilize physical measurements to calculate angular and spatial offsets from the design of the drilling string. The control system may implement actions to keep the drilling string in the proper path. The control system may include tools that utilize software/control interfaces built into an operating system of in the drilling equipment, drilling string and/or BHA.

[0548] In certain embodiments, the control system utilizes position and angle measurements to define spatial and angular offsets from the desired drilling geometry. The defined offsets may be used to determine a steering solution to move the trajectory of the drilling string (thus, the trajectory of the borehole) back into convergence with the desired drilling geometry. The steering solution may be based on an optimum alignment solution in which a desired rate of curvature of the borehole path is set and required angle change segments and angle change directions for the path are assessed (for example, by computation).

[0549] In some embodiments, the control system uses a fixed angle change rate associated with the drilling string, assesses the lengths of the sections of the drilling string, and assesses the desired directions of the drilling to autonomously execute and control movement of the drilling string. Thus, the control system assesses position measurements and controls of the drilling string to control the direction of the drilling string.

[0550] In some embodiments, differential pressure or torque across motor 422A and/or motor 422B is used to control the rate of penetration (ROP). A relationship between ROP, weight-on-bit (WOB) and torque may be assessed for drilling string 418. Measurements of torque and the ROP-WOB-torque relationship may be used to control the feed rate (the ROP) of drilling string 418 into the formation.

[0551] FIG. 14 depicts an embodiment for assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore using multiple magnets. First wellbore 428A is formed in a subsurface formation. Wellbore 428A may be formed by directionally drilling in the formation along a desired path. For example, wellbore 428A may be horizontally or vertically drilled in the subsurface formation.

[0552] Second wellbore 428B may be formed in the subsurface formation with drill bit 424 on drilling string 418. In certain embodiments, drilling string 418 includes one or more magnets 430. Wellbore 428B may be formed in a selected relationship to wellbore 428A. In certain embodiments, wellbore 428B is formed substantially parallel to wellbore 428A. In other embodiments, wellbore 428B is formed at other angles relative to wellbore 428A. In some embodiments, wellbore 428B is formed perpendicular relative to wellbore 428A.

[0553] In certain embodiments, wellbore 428A includes sensing array 426. Sensing array 426 may include two or more sensors 432. Sensors 432 may sense magnetic fields produced by magnets 430 in wellbore 428B. The sensed magnetic fields may be used to assess a position of wellbore 428A relative to wellbore 428B. In some embodiments, sensors 432 measure two or more magnetic fields provided by magnets 430.

[0554] Two or more sensors 432 in wellbore 428A may allow for continuous assessment of the relative position of wellbore 428A versus wellbore 428B. Using two or more sensors 432 in wellbore 428A may also allow the sensors to be used as gradiometers. In some embodiments, sensors 432 are positioned in advance (ahead of) magnets 430. Positioning sensors 432 in advance of magnets 430 allows the magnets to traverse past the sensors so that the magnet's position (the position of wellbore 428B) is measurable continuously or “live” during drilling of wellbore 428B. Sensing array 426 may be moved intermittently (at selected intervals) to move sensors 432 ahead of magnets 430. Positioning sensors 432 in advance of magnets 430 also allows the sensors to measure, store, and zero the Earth's field before sensing the magnetic fields of the magnets. The Earth's field may be zeroed by, for example, using a null function before arrival of the magnets, calculating background components from a known sensor attitude, or using a gradiometer setup.

[0555] The relative position of wellbore 428B versus wellbore 428A may be used to adjust the drilling of wellbore 428B using drilling string 418. For example, the direction of drilling for wellbore 428B may be adjusted so that wellbore 428B remains a set distance away from wellbore 428A and the wellbores remain substantially parallel. In certain embodiments, the drilling of wellbore 428B is continuously adjusted based on continuous position assessments made by sensors 432. Data from drilling string 418 (for example, orientation, attitude, and/or gravitational data) may be combined or synchronized with data from sensors 432 to continuously assess the relative positions of the wellbores and adjust the drilling of wellbore 428B accordingly. Continuously assessing the relative positions of the wellbores may allow for coiled tubing drilling of wellbore 428B.

[0556] In some embodiments, drilling string 418 may include two or more sensing arrays 426. Sensing arrays 426 may include two or more sensors 432. Using two or more sensing arrays 426 in drilling string 418 may allow for the direct measurement of magnetic interference of magnets 430 on the measurement of the Earth's magnetic field. Directly measuring any magnetic interference of magnets 430 on the measurement of the Earth's magnetic field may reduce errors in readings (for example, error to pointing azimuth). The direct measurement of the field gradient from the magnets from within drill string 418 also provides confirmation of reference field strength of the field to be measured from within wellbore 428A.

[0557] FIG. 15 depicts an embodiment for assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore using a continuous pulsed signal. Signal wire 434 may be placed in wellbore 428A. Sensor 432 may be located in drilling string 418 in wellbore 428B. In certain embodiments, wire 434 provides a reference voltage signal (for example, a pulsed DC reference signal). In one embodiment, the reference voltage signal is a 10 Hz pulsed DC signal. In one embodiment, the reference voltage signal is a 5 Hz pulsed DC signal.

[0558] The electromagnetic field provided by the voltage signal may be sensed by sensor 432. The sensed signal may be used to assess a position of wellbore 428B relative to wellbore 428A.

[0559] In some embodiments, wire 434 is a ranging wire located in wellbore 428A. In some embodiments, the voltage signal is provided by an electrical conductor that will be used as part of a heater in wellbore 428A. In some embodiments, the voltage signal is provided by an electrical conductor that is part of a heater or production equipment located in wellbore 428A. Wire 434, or other electrical conductors used to provide the voltage signal, may be grounded so that there is no current return along the wire or in the wellbore. Return current may cancel the electromagnetic field produced by the wire.

[0560] Where return current exists, the current may be measured and modeled to generate a “net current” from which a voltage signal may be resolved. For example, in some areas, a 600A signal current may only yield a 3-6A net current. Where it is not feasible to eliminate sufficient return current along the wellbore containing the conductor, in some embodiments, two conductors may be installed in separate wellbores. In this method, signal wires from each of the existing wellbores are connected to opposite voltage terminals of the signal generator. The return current path is in this way guided through the earth from the contactor region of one conductor to the other.

[0561] In certain embodiments, the reference voltage signal is turned on and off (pulsed) so that multiple measurements are taken by sensor 432 over a selected time period. The multiple measurements may be averaged to reduce or eliminate resolution error in sensing the reference voltage signal. In some embodiments, providing the reference voltage signal, sensing the signal, and adjusting the drilling based on the sensed signals are performed continuously without providing any data to the surface or any surface operator input to the downhole equipment. For example, an automated system located downhole may be used to perform all the downhole sensing and adjustment operations.

[0562] The signal field generated by the net current passing through the conductors needs to be resolved from the general background field existing when the signal field is “off”. A method for resolving the signal field from the general background field on a continuous basis may include: 1.) calculating background components based on the known attitude of the sensors and the known value background field strength and dip; 2.) a synchronized “null” function to be applied immediately before the reference field is switched “on”; and/or 3.) synchronized sampling of forward and reversed DC polarities (the subtraction of these sampled values may effectively remove the background field yielding the reference total current field).

[0563] FIG. 16 depicts an embodiment for assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore using a radio ranging signal. Sensor 432 may be placed in wellbore 428A. Source 436 may be located in drilling string 418 in wellbore 428B. In some embodiments, source 436 is located in wellbore 428A and sensor 432 is located in wellbore 428B. In certain embodiments, source 436 is an electromagnetic wave producing source. For example, source 436 may be an electromagnetic sonde. Sensor 432 may be an antenna (for example, an electromagnetic or radio antenna). In some embodiments sensor 432 is located in part of a heater in wellbore 428A.

[0564] The signal provided by source 436 may be sensed by sensor 432. The sensed signal may be used to assess a position of wellbore 428B relative to wellbore 428A. In certain embodiments, the signal is continuously sensed using sensor 432. The continuously sensed signal may be used to continuously and/or automatically adjust the drilling of wellbore 428B. The continuous sensing of the electromagnetic signal may be dual directional—creating a data link between transceivers. The antenna/sensor 432 may be directly connected to a surface interface allowing a data link between surface and subsurface to be established.

[0565] In some embodiments, source 436 and/or sensor 432 are sources and sensors used in a walkover radio locater system. Walkover radio locater systems are, for example, used in telecommunications to locate underground lines. In some embodiments, the walkover radio located system components may be modified to be located in wellbore 428A and wellbore 428B so that the relative positions of the wellbores are assessable using the walkover radio located system components.

[0566] In certain embodiments, multiple sources and multiple sensors may be used to assess and adjust the drilling of one or more wellbores. FIG. 17 depicts an embodiment for assessing a position of a plurality of first wellbores relative to a plurality of second wellbores using radio ranging signals. Sources 436 may be located in a plurality of wellbores 428A. Sensors 432 may be located in one or more wellbores 428B. In some embodiments, sources 436 are located in wellbores 428B and sensors 432 are located in wellbores 428A.

[0567] In one embodiment, wellbores 428A are drilled substantially vertically in the formation and wellbores 428B are drilled substantially horizontally in the formation. Thus, wellbores 428B are substantially perpendicular relative to wellbores 428A. Sensors 432 in wellbores 428B may detect signals from one or more of sources 436. Detecting signals from more than one source may allow for more accurate measurement of the relative positions of the wellbores in the formation. In some embodiments, electromagnetic attenuation and phase shift detected from multiple sources is used to define the position of a sensor (and the wellbore). The paths of the electromagnetic radio waves may be predicted to allow detection and use of the electromagnetic attenuation and the phase shift to define the sensor position.

[0568] FIGS. 18 and 19 depict an embodiment for assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore using a heater assembly as a current conductor. In some embodiments, a heater may be used as a long conductor for a reference current (pulsed DC or AC) to be injected for assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore. If a current is injected onto an insulated internal heater element, the current may pass to the end of heater element 438 where it makes contact with heater casing 440. This is the same current path when the heater is in heating mode. Once the current passes across to bottom hole assembly 420B, one may assume at least some of the current is absorbed by the earth on the current's return trip back to the surface, resulting in a net current (difference in Amps in (A_i) versus Amps out (A_o)).

[0569] Resulting electromagnetic field 442 is measured by sensor 432 (for example, a transceiving antenna) in bottom hole assembly 420A of first wellbore 428A being drilled in proximity to the location of heater 438. A predetermined “known” net current in the formation may be relied upon to provide a reference magnetic field.

[0570] The injection of the reference current may be rapidly pulsed and synchronized with the receiving antenna and/or sensor data. Access to a high data rate signal from the magnetometers can be used to filter the effects of sensor movement during drilling. The measurement of the reference magnetic field may provide a distance and direction to the heater. Averaging many of these results will provide the position of the actively drilled hole. The known position of the heater and known depth of the active sensors may be used to assess position coordinates of easting, northing, and elevation.

[0571] The quality of data generated with such a method may depend on the accuracy of the net current prediction along the length of the heater. Using formation resistivity data, a model may be used to predict the losses to earth along the bottom hole assembly. The bottom hole assembly may be in direct contact with the formation and borehole fluids.

[0572] The current may be measured on both the element and the bottom hole assembly at the surface. The difference in values is the overall current loss to the formation. It is anticipated that the net field strength will vary along the length of the heater. The field is expected to be greater at the surface when the positive voltage applies to the bottom hole assembly.

[0573] If there are minimal losses to earth in the formation, the net field may not be strong enough to provide a useful detection range. In some embodiments, a net current in the range of about 2A to about 50A, about 5A to about 40A, or about 10A to about 30A, may be employed.

[0574] In some embodiments, two heaters are used as a long conductor for a reference current (pulsed DC or AC) to be injected for assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore. Utilizing two separate heater elements may result in relatively better control of return current path and therefore better control of reference current strength.

[0575] A two heater method may not rely on the accuracy of a “model of current loss to formation”, as current is contained in the heater element along the full length of the heaters. Current may be rapidly pulsed and synchronized with the transceiving antenna and/or sensor data to resolve distance and direction to the heater. FIGS. 20 and 21 depict an embodiment for assessing a position of first wellbore 428A relative to second wellbore 428B using two heater assemblies 438A and 438B as current conductors. Resulting electromagnetic field 442 is measured by sensor 432 (for example, a transceiving antenna) in bottom hole assembly 420A of first wellbore 428A being drilled in proximity to the location of heaters 438A and 438A in second wellbore 428B.

[0576] In some embodiments, parallel well tracking may be used for assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore. Parallel well tracking may utilize magnets of a known strength and a known length positioned in the pre-drilled second wellbore. Magnetic sensors positioned in the active first wellbore may be used to measure the field from the magnets in the second wellbore. Measuring the generated magnetic field in the second wellbore with sensors in the first wellbore may assess distance and direction of the active first wellbore. In some embodiments, magnets positioned in the second wellbore may be carefully positioned and multiple static measurements taken to resolve any general “background” magnetic field. Background magnetic fields may be resolved through use of a null function before positioning the magnets in the second wellbore, calculating background components from known sensor attitudes, and/or a gradiometer setup.

[0577] In some embodiments, reference magnets may be positioned in the drilling bottom hole assembly of the first wellbore. Sensors may be positioned in the passive second wellbore. The prepositioned sensors may be nulled prior to the arrival of the magnets in the detectable range to eliminate Earth's background field. This may significantly reduce the time required to assess the position and direction of the first wellbore during drilling as the bottom hole assembly continues drilling with no stoppages. The commercial availability of low cost sensors such as a terrella (utilizing magnetoresistives rather than fluxgates) may be incorporated into the wall of a deployment coil at useful separations.

[0578] In some embodiments, multiple types of sources may be used in combination with two or more sensors to assess and adjust the drilling of one or more wellbores. A method of assessing a position of a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore may include a combination of angle sensors, telemetry, and/or ranging systems. Such a method may be referred to as umbilical position control.

[0579] Angle sensors may assess an attitude (azimuth, inclination, and roll) of a bottom hole assembly. Assessing the attitude of a bottom hole assembly may include measuring, for example, azimuth, inclination, and/or roll. Telemetry may transmit data (for example, measurements) between the surface and, for example, sensors positioned in a wellbore. Ranging may assess the position of a bottom hole assembly in a first wellbore relative to a second wellbore. The second wellbore, in some embodiments, may include an existing, previously drilled wellbore.

[0580] FIG. 22 depicts a first embodiment of the umbilical positioning control system employing a wireless linking system. Second transceiver 444B may be deployed from the surface down second wellbore 428B, which effectively functions as a telemetry system for first wellbore 428A. A transceiver may communicate with the surface via wire or fiber optics (for example, wire 446) coupled to the transceiver.

[0581] In first wellbore 428A, sensor 432A may be coupled to first transceiving antenna 444A. First transceiving antenna 444A may communicate with second transceiving antenna 444B in second wellbore 428B. The first transceiving antenna may be positioned on bottom hole assembly 420. Sensors coupled to the first transceiving antenna may include, for example, magnetometers and/or accelerometers. In certain embodiments, sensors coupled to the first transceiving antenna may include dual magnetometer/accelerometer sets.

[0582] To accomplish data transfer, first transceiving antenna 444A transmits (“short hops”) measured data through the ground to second transceiving antenna 444B located in the second wellbore. The data may then be transmitted to the surface via embedded wires 446 in the deployment tubular.

[0583] Two redundant ranging systems may be utilized for umbilical control systems. A first ranging system may include a version of a plasma wave tracker (PWT). FIG. 23 depicts an embodiment of umbilical positioning control system employing a magnetic gradiometer system. A PWT may include a pair of sensors 432B (for example, magnetometer/accelerometer sets) embedded in the wall of second wellbore deployment coil (the umbilical). These sensors act as a magnetic gradiometer to detect the magnetic field from reference magnet 430 installed in bottom hole assembly 420 of first wellbore 428A. In a horizontal section of the second wellbore, a relative position of the umbilical to the first wellbore reference magnet(s) may be determined by the gradient. Data may be sent to the surface through fiber optic cables or wires 446.

[0584] FIGS. 24 and 25 depict an embodiment of umbilical positioning control system employing a combination of systems being used in a first stage of deployment and a second stage of deployment, respectively. A third set of sensors 432C (for example, magnetometers) may be located on the leading end of wire 446. Sensors 432B, 432C may detect magnetic fields produced by reference magnets 430. The role of sensors 432C may include mapping the Earth's magnetic field ahead of the arrival of the gradient sensors and confirming that the angle of the deployment tubular matches that of the originally defined hole geometry. Since the attitude of the magnetic field sensors are known based on the original survey of the hole and the checks of sensors 432B, 432C, the values for the Earth's field can be calculated based on current sensor orientation (inclinometers measure the roll and inclination and the model defines azimuth, Mag total, and Mag dip). Using this method, an estimation of the field vector due to reference magnets 430 can be calculated allowing distance and direction to be resolved.

[0585] A second ranging system may be based on using the signal strength and phase of the “through the earth” wireless link (for example, radio) established between first transceiving antenna 444A in first wellbore 428A and second transceiving antenna 444B in second wellbore 428B. Sensor 432A may be coupled to first transceiving antenna 444A. Given the close spacing of wellbores 428A, 428B and the variability in electrical properties of the formation, the attenuation rates for the electromagnetic signal may be predictable. Predictable attenuation rates for the electromagnetic signal allow the signal strength to be used as a measure of separation between first and second transceiver pairs 444A, 444B. The vector direction of the magnetic field induced by the electromagnetic transmissions from the first wellbore may provide the direction. A transceiver may communicate with the surface via wire or fiber optics (for example, wire 446) coupled to the transceiver.

[0586] With a known resistivity of the formation and operating frequency, the distance between the source and point of measurement may be calculated. FIG. 26 depicts two examples of the relationship between power received and distance based upon two different formations with different resistivities 448 and 450. If 10 W is transmitted at a 12 Hz frequency in 20 ohm·m formation 448, the power received amounts to approximately 9.10 W at 30 m distance. The resistivity was chosen at random and may vary depending on where you are in the ground. If a higher resistivity was chosen at the given frequency, such as 100 ohm·m formation 450, a lower attenuation is observed, and a low characterization occurs whereupon it receives 9.58 W at 30 m distance. Thus, high resistivity, although transmitting power desirably, shows a negative affect in electromagnetic ranging possibilities. Since the main influence in attenuation is the distance itself, calculations may be made solving for the distance between a source and a point of measurement.

[0587] The frequency the electromagnetic source operates on is another factor that affects attenuation. Typically, the higher the frequency, the higher the attenuation and vice versa. A strategy for choosing between various frequencies may depend on the formation chosen. For example, while the attenuation at a resistivity of 100 ohm·m may be good for data communications, it may not be sufficient for distance calculations. Thus, a higher frequency may be chosen to increase attenuation. Alternatively, a lower frequency may be chosen for the opposite purpose.

[0588] Wireless data communications in ground may allow an opportunity for electromagnetic ranging and the variable frequency it operates on must be observed to balance out benefits for both functionalities. Benefits of wireless data communication may include, but are not be limited to: 1) automatic depth sync through the use of ranging and telemetry; 2) fast communications with dedicated hardwired (for example, optic fiber) coil for a transceiving antenna running in, for example, the second wellbore; 3) functioning as an alternative method for fast communication when hardwire in, for example, the first wellbore is not available; 4) functioning in under balanced and over balanced drilling; 5) providing a similar method for transmitting control commands to a bottom hole assembly; 6) sensors are reusable reducing costs and waste; 7) decreasing noise measurement functions split between the first wellbore and the second wellbore; and/or 8) multiple position measurement techniques simultaneously supported may provide real time best estimate of position and attitude.

[0589] In some embodiments, it may be advisable to employ sensors able to compensate for magnetic fields produced internally by carbon steel casing built in the vertical section of a reference hole (for example, high range magnetometers). In some embodiments, modification may be made to account for problems with wireless antenna communications between wellbores penetrating through wellbore casings.

[0590] Increasing the density and quality of directional data during drilling may increase the accuracy and efficiency in forming wellbores in subsurface formations. The quality of directional data may be diminished by vibrations and angular accelerations during rotary drilling, especially during rotary drilling segments of wellbore formation using slide mode drilling.

[0591] In certain embodiments, the quality of the data assessed during rotary drilling is increased by installing directional sensors in a non-rotating housing. FIG. 27 depicts an embodiment of drilling string 418 with non-rotating sensor 432. In certain embodiments, non-rotating sensor 432 is located behind motor 422. Motor 422 may be a steerable motor. Motor 422 may be located behind drill bit 424. In certain embodiments, sensor 432 is located between non-magnetic components in drilling string 418. In some embodiments, non-rotating sensor 432 is located in a sleeve over motor 422. In some embodiments, non-rotating sensor 432 is run on any bottom hole assembly (BHA) for improved data assessment.

[0592] In certain embodiments, non-rotating sensor 432 includes one or more transceivers for communicating data either into drilling string 418 within the BHA or to similar transceivers in nearby boreholes. The transceivers may be used for telemetry of data and/or as a means of position assessment or verification. In certain embodiments, use of non-rotating sensor 432 allows continuous position measurement. Continuous position measurement may be useful in control systems used for drilling position systems and/or umbilical position control.

[0593] Pieces of formation or rock may protrude or fall into the wellbore due to various failures including rock breakage or plastic deformation during and/or after wellbore formation. Protrusions may interfere with drill string movement and/or the flow of drilling fluids. Protrusions may prevent running tubulars into the wellbore after the drill string has been removed from the wellbore. Significant amounts of material entering or protruding into the wellbore may cause wellbore integrity failure and/or lead to the drill string becoming stuck in the wellbore. Some causes of wellbore integrity failure may be in situ stresses and high pore pressures. Mud weight may be increased to hold back the formation and inhibit wellbore integrity failure during wellbore formation. When increasing the mud weight is not practical, the wellbore may be reamed.

[0594] Reaming the wellbore may be accomplished by moving the drill string up and down one joint while rotating and circulating. Picking the drill string up can be difficult because of material protruding into the borehole above the bit or BHA (bottom hole assembly). Picking up the drill string may be facilitated by placing upward facing cutting structures on the drill bit. Without upward facing cutting structures on the drill bit, the rock protruding into the borehole above the drill bit must be broken by grinding or crushing rather than by cutting. Grinding or crushing may induce additional wellbore failure.

[0595] Moving the drill string up and down may induce surging or pressure pulses that contribute to wellbore failure. Pressure surging or fluctuations may be aggravated or made worse by blockage of normal drilling fluid flow by protrusions into the wellbore. Thus, attempts to clear the borehole of debris may cause even more debris to enter the wellbore.

[0596] When the wellbore fails further up the drill string than one joint from the drill bit, the drill string must be raised more than one joint. Lifting more than one joint in length may require that joints be removed from the drill string during lifting and placed back on the drill string when lowered. Removing and adding joints requires additional time and labor, and increases the risk of surging as circulation is stopped and started for each joint connection.

[0597] In some embodiments, cutting structures may be positioned at various points along the drill string. Cutting structures may be positioned on the drill string at selected locations, for example, where the diameter of the drill string or BHA changes. FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B depict cutting structures 452 located at or near diameter changes in drill string 418 near to drill bit 424 and/or BHA 420. As depicted in FIG. 28C, cutting structures 452 may be positioned at selected locations along the length of BHA 420 and/or drill string 418 that has a substantially uniform diameter. Cutting structures 452 may remove formation that extends into the wellbore as the drilling string is rotated. Cuttings formed by the cutting structures 452 may be removed from the wellbore by the normal circulation used during the formation of the wellbore.

[0598] FIG. 29 depicts an embodiment of drill bit 424 including cutting structures 452. Drill bit 424 includes downward facing cutting structures 452b for forming the wellbore. Cutting structures 452a are upwardly facing cutting structures for reaming out the wellbore to remove protrusions from the wellbore.

[0599] In some embodiments, some cutting structures may be upwardly facing, some cutting structures may be downwardly facing, and/or some cutting structures may be oriented substantially perpendicular to the drill string. FIG. 30 depicts an embodiment of a portion of drilling string 418 including upward facing cutting structures 452a, downward facing cutting structures 452b, and cutting structures 452c that are substantially perpendicular to the drill string. Cutting structures 452a may remove protrusions extending into wellbore 428 that would inhibit upward movement of drill string 418. Cutting structures 452a may facilitate reaming of wellbore 428 and/or removal of drill string 418 from the wellbore for drill bit change, BHA maintenance and/or when total depth has been reached. Cutting structures 452b may remove protrusions extending into wellbore 428 that would inhibit downward movement of drill string 418. Cutting structures 452c may ensure that enlarged diameter portions of drill string 418 do not become stuck in wellbore 428.

[0600] Positioning downward facing cutting structures 452b at various locations along a length of the drill string may allow for reaming of the wellbore while the drill bit forms additional borehole at the bottom of the wellbore. The ability to ream while drilling may avoid pressure surges in the wellbore caused by lifting the drill string. Reaming while drilling allows the wellbore to be reamed without interrupting normal drilling operation. Reaming while drilling allows the wellbore to be formed in less time because a separate reaming operation is avoided. Upward facing cutting structures 452a allow for easy removal of the drill string from the wellbore.

[0601] In some embodiments, the drill string includes a plurality of cutting structures positioned along the length of the drill string, but not necessarily along the entire length of the drill string. The cutting structures may be positioned at regular or irregular intervals along the length of the drill string. Positioning cutting structures along the length of the drill string allows the entire wellbore to be reamed without the need to remove the entire drill string from the wellbore.

[0602] Cutting structures may be coupled or attached to the drill string using techniques known in the art (for example, by welding). In some embodiments, cutting structures are formed as part of a hinged ring or multi-piece ring that may be bolted, welded, or otherwise attached to the drill string. In some embodiments, the distance that the cutting structures extend beyond the drill string may be adjustable. For example, the cutting element of the cutting structure may include threading and a locking ring that allows for positioning and setting of the cutting element.

[0603] In some wellbores, a wash over or over-coring operation may be needed to free or recover an object in the wellbore that is stuck in the wellbore due to caving, closing, or squeezing of the formation around the object. The object may be a canister, tool, drill string, or other item. A wash-over pipe with downward facing cutting structures at the bottom of the pipe may be used. The wash over pipe may also include upward facing cutting structures and downward facing cutting structures at locations near the end of the wash-over pipe. The additional upward facing cutting structures and downward facing cutting structures may facilitate freeing and/or recovery of the object stuck in the wellbore. The formation holding the object may be cut away rather than broken by relying on hydraulics and force to break the portion of the formation holding the stuck object.

[0604] A problem in some formations is that the formed borehole begins to close soon after the drill string is removed from the borehole. Boreholes which close up soon after being formed make it difficult to insert objects such as tubulars, canisters, tools, or other equipment into the wellbore. In some embodiments, reaming while drilling applied to the core drill string allows for emplacement of the objects in the center of the core drill pipe. The core drill pipe includes one or more upward facing cutting structures in addition to cutting structures located at the end of the core drill pipe. The core drill pipe may be used to form the wellbore for the object to be inserted in the formation. The object may be positioned in the core of the core drill pipe. Then, the core drill pipe may be removed from the formation. Any parts of the formation that may inhibit removal of the core drill pipe are cut by the upward facing cutting structures as the core drill pipe is removed from the formation.

[0605] Replacement canisters may be positioned in the formation using over core drill pipe. First, the existing canister to be replaced is over cored. The existing canister is then pulled from within the core drill pipe without removing the core drill pipe from the borehole. The replacement canister is then run inside of the core drill pipe. Then, the core drill pipe is removed from the borehole. Upward facing cutting structures positioned along the length of the core drill pipe cut portions of the formation that may inhibit removal of the core drill pipe.

[0606] FIG. 31 depicts a schematic drawing of a drilling system. Pilot bit 454 may form an opening in the formation. Pilot bit 454 may be followed by final diameter bit 456. In some embodiments, pilot bit 454 may be about 2.5 cm in diameter. Pilot bit 454 may be one or more meters below final diameter bit 456. Pilot bit 454 may rotate in a first direction and final diameter bit 456 may rotate in the opposite direction. Counter-rotating bits may allow for the formation of the wellbore along a desired path. Standard mud may be used in both pilot bit 454 and final diameter bit 456. In some embodiments, air or mist may be used as the drilling fluid in one or both bits.

[0607] During some in situ heat treatment processes, wellbores may need to be formed in heated formations. Wellbores drilled into hot formation may be additional or replacement heater wells, additional or replacement production wells and/or monitor wells. Cooling while drilling may enhance wellbore stability, safety, and longevity of drilling tools. When the drilling fluid is liquid, significant wellbore cooling can occur due to the circulation of the drilling fluid.

[0608] In some in situ heat treatment processes, a barrier formed around all or a portion of the in situ heat treatment process is formed by freeze wells that form a low temperature zone around the freeze wells. A portion of the cooling capacity of the freeze well equipment may be utilized to cool the equipment needed to drill into the hot formation. Drilling bits may be advanced slowly in hot sections to ensure that the formed wellbore cools sufficiently to preclude drilling problems.

[0609] When using conventional circulation, drilling fluid flows down the inside of the drilling string and back up the outside of the drilling string. Other circulation systems, such as reverse circulation, may also be used. In some embodiments, the drill pipe may be positioned in a pipe-in-pipe configuration.

[0610] Drilling string used to form the wellbore may function as a counter-flow heat exchanger. The deeper the well, the more the drilling fluid heats up on the way down to the drill bit as the drilling string passes through heated portions of the formation. Thus, the counter-flow heat exchanger effect reduces downhole cooling. When normal circulation does not deliver low enough temperature drilling fluid to the drill bit to provide adequate cooling, two options have been employed to enhance cooling. Mud coolers on the surface can be used to reduce the inlet temperature of the drilling fluid being pumped downhole. If cooling is still inadequate, insulated drilling string can be used to reduce the counter-flow heat exchanger effect.

[0611] FIG. 32 depicts a schematic drawing of a system for drilling into a hot formation. Cold mud is introduced to drilling bit 456 through conduit 458. As the drill bit penetrates into the formation, the mud cools the drill bit and the surrounding formation. In an embodiment, a pilot hole is formed first and the wellbore is finished with a larger drill bit later. In an embodiment, the finished wellbore is formed without a pilot hole being formed. Well advancement is very slow to ensure sufficient cooling.

[0612] In some embodiments, all or a portion of conduit 458 may be insulated to reduce heat transfer to the cooled mud as the mud passes into the formation. Insulating all or a portion of conduit 458 may allow colder mud to be provided to the drill bit than if the conduit is not insulated. Conduit 458 may be insulated for greater than ¼ of the length of the conduit, for greater than ½ the length of the conduit, for greater than ¾ the length of the conduit, or for substantially all of the length of the conduit.

[0613] FIG. 33 depicts a schematic drawing of a system for drilling into a hot formation. Mud is introduced through conduit 458. Closed loop system 460 is used to circulate cooling fluid within conduit 458. Closed loop system 460 may include a pump, a heat exchanger system, inlet leg 462, and exit leg 464. The pump may be used to draw cooling fluid through exit leg 464 to the heat exchanger system. The pump and the heat exchanger system may be located at the surface. The heat exchanger system may be used to remove heat from cooling fluid returning through exit leg 464. Cooling fluid may exit the heat exchanger system into inlet leg 462. Cooling fluid may flow down inlet leg 462 in conduit 458 to a region near drill bit 456. The cooling fluid flows out of conduit 458 through exit leg 464. The cooling fluid cools the drilling mud and the formation as drilling bit 456 slowly penetrates into the formation. The cooled drilling mud may also cool the bottom hole assembly.

[0614] All or a portion of inlet leg 462 may be insulated to inhibit heat transfer to the cooling fluid entering closed loop system 460 from cooling fluid leaving the closing loop system through exit leg 464 and/or with the drilling mud. Insulating all or a portion of inlet leg 462 may also maintain the cooling fluid at a low temperature so that the cooling fluid is able to absorb heat from the drilling mud in a region near drill bit 456 so that the drilling mud is able to cool the drill bit and/or the formation. In some embodiments, all or a portion of inlet leg 462 is made of a material with low thermal conductivity to limit heat transfer to the cooling fluid in the inlet leg. For example, all or a portion of inlet leg 462 may be made of a polyethylene pipe.

[0615] In some embodiments, inlet leg 462 and the exit leg 464 for the cooling fluid are arranged in a conduit-in-conduit configuration. In one embodiment, cooling fluid flows down the inner conduit (the inlet leg) and returns through the space between the inner conduit and the outer conduit (the exit leg). The inner conduit may be insulated or made of a material with low thermal conductivity to inhibit or reduce heat transfer between the cooling fluid going down the inner conduit and the cooling fluid returning through the space between the inner conduit and the outer conduit. In some embodiments, the inner conduit may be made of a polymer, such as high density polyethylene.

[0616] FIG. 34 depicts a schematic drawing of a system for drilling into a hot formation. Drilling mud is introduced through conduit 458. Pilot bit 454 is followed by final diameter drill bit 456. Closed loop system 460 is used to circulate cooling fluid. Closed loop system may be the same type of system as described with reference to FIG. 33, with the addition of inlet leg 462′ and exit leg 464′ that supply and remove cooling fluid that cools the drilling mud supplied to pilot bit 454. The cooling fluid cools the drilling mud supplied to drill bits 454, 456. The cooled drilling mud cools drill bits 454, 456 and/or the formation near the drill bits.

[0617] For various reasons including lost circulation, wells are frequently drilled with gas (for, example air, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, methane, ethane, and other light hydrocarbon gases) as the drilling fluid primarily to maintain a low equivalent circulating density (low downhole pressure gradient). Gas has low potential for cooling the wellbore because mass flow rates of gas drilling are much lower than when liquid drilling fluid is used. Also, gas has a low heat capacity compared to liquid. As a result of heat flow from the outside to the inside of the drilling string, the gas arrives at the drill bit at close to formation temperature. Controlling the inlet temperature of the gas (analogous to using mud coolers when drilling with liquid) or using insulated drilling string only marginally reduces the counter-flow heat exchanger effect when gas drilling. Some gases are more effective than others at transferring heat, but the use of gasses with better heat transfer properties does not significantly improve wellbore cooling while gas drilling.

[0618] Gas drilling may deliver the drilling fluid to the drill bit at close to the formation temperature. The gas may have little capacity to absorb heat. A defining feature of gas drilling is the low density column in the annulus. Immaterial to the benefits of gas drilling is the phase of the drilling fluid flowing down the inside of the drilling pipe. Thus, the benefits of gas drilling can be accomplished if the drilling fluid is liquid while flowing down the drilling string and gas while flowing back up the annulus. The heat of vaporization is used to cool the drill bit and the formation rather than the sensible heat of the drilling fluid.

[0619] An advantage of this approach is that even though the liquid arrives at the bit at close to formation temperature, it can absorb heat by vaporizing. In fact, the heat of vaporization is typically larger than the heat that can be absorbed by a temperature rise. As a comparison, consider drilling a 7⅞″ wellbore with 3½″ drilling string circulating low density mud at about 203 gpm and with about a 100 ft/min typical annular velocity. Drilling through a 450° F. zone at 1000 feet will result in a mud exit temperature about 8° F. hotter than the inlet temperature. This results in the removal of about 14,000 Btu/min. The removal of this much heat lowers the bit temperature from about 450° F. to about 285° F. If liquid water is injected down the drilling string and allowed to boil at the bit and steam is produced up the annulus, the mass flow required to remove ½″ cuttings is about 34 lbm/min assuming the back pressure is about 100 psia. At 34 lbm/min the heat removed from the wellbore would be about 34 lbm/min×(1187-180) Btu/lbm or about 34,000 Btu/min. This heat removal amount is about 2.4 times the liquid cooling case. Thus, at reasonable annular steam flow rates, a significant amount of heat can be removed by vaporization.

[0620] The high velocities required for gas drilling are achieved by the expansion that occurs during vaporization rather than by employing compressors on the surface. Eliminating the need for compressors may simplify the drilling process, eliminate the cost of the compressor, and eliminate a source of heat applied to the drilling fluid on the way to the drill bit.

[0621] Critical to the process of delivering liquid to the drill bit is preventing boiling within the drilling string. If the drilling fluid flowing downwards boils before reaching the drill bit, the heat of vaporization is used to extract heat from the drilling fluid flowing up the annulus. The heat transferred from the annulus (outside the drilling string) to inside the drilling string boiling the fluid is heat that is not rejected from the well when drilling fluid reaches the surface. Boiling that occurs inside of the drilling string before the drilling fluid reaches the bottom of the hole is not beneficial to drill bit and/or wellbore cooling.

[0622] If the pressure in the drilling string is maintained above the boiling pressure for a given temperature by use of a back pressure device, then the transfer of heat from outside the drilling string to inside can be minimized or essentially eliminated. The liquid supplied to the drill bit may be vaporized. Vaporization may result in the drilling fluid adsorbing the heat of vaporization from the drill bit and formation. For example, if the back pressure device is set to allow flow only when the back pressure is above 250 psi, the fluid within the drilling string will not boil unless the temperature is above 400° F. If the temperature of the formation is above this (for example, 500° F.) steps may be taken to inhibit boiling of the fluid on the way down to the drill bit. In an embodiment, the back pressure device is set to maintain a back pressure that inhibits boiling of the drilling fluid at the temperature of the formation (for example, 580 psi to inhibit boiling up to a temperature of 500° F.). In another embodiment, the drilling pipe is insulated and/or the drilling fluid is cooled so that the back pressure device is able to maintain the drilling fluid that reaches the drill bit as a liquid.

[0623] Two back pressure devices that may be used to maintain elevated pressure within the drilling string are a choke and a pressure activated valve. Other types of back pressure devices may also be used. Chokes have a restriction in flow area that creates back pressure by resisting flow. Resisting the flow results in increased upstream pressure to force the fluid through the restriction. Pressure activated valves do not open until a minimum upstream pressure is obtained. The pressure difference across a pressure activated valves may determine if the pressure activated valve is open to allow flow or closed.

[0624] In some embodiments, both a choke and pressure activated valve may be used. A choke can be the bit nozzles allowing the liquid to be jetted toward the drill bit and the bottom of the hole. The bit nozzles may enhance drill bit cleaning and help prevent fouling of the drill bit and pressure activated valve. Fouling may occur if boiling in the drill bit or pressure activated valve caused solids to precipitate. The pressure activated valve may prevent premature boiling at low flow rates below flow rates at which the chokes are effective.

[0625] Additives may be added to the drilling fluid. The additives may modify the properties of the fluids in the liquid phase and/or the gas phase. Additives may include, but are not limited to surfactants to foam the fluid, additives to chemically alter the interaction of the fluid with the formations (for example, to stabilize the formation), additives to control corrosion, and additives for other benefits.

[0626] In some embodiments, a non-condensable gas may be added to the drilling fluid pumped down the drilling string. The non-condensable gas may be, but is not limited to nitrogen, carbon dioxide, air, and mixtures thereof. Adding the non-condensable gas results in pumping a two phase mixture down the drilling string. One reason for adding the non-condensable gas is to enhance the flow of the fluid out of the formation. The presence of the non-condensable gas may inhibit condensation of the vaporized drilling fluid and help to carry cuttings out of the formation. In some embodiments, one or more heaters may be present at one or more locations in the wellbore to provide heat that inhibits condensation and reflux of drilling fluid leaving the formation.

[0627] Managed pressure drilling and/or managed volumetric drilling may be used during formation of wellbores. The back pressure on the wellbore may be held to a prescribed value to control the down hole pressure. Similarly, the volume of fluid entering and exiting the well may be balanced so that there is no net influx or out-flux of drilling fluid into the formation.

[0628] In some embodiments, one piece of equipment may be used to drill multiple wellbores in a single day. The wellbores may be formed at penetration rates that are many times faster than the penetration rates using conventional drilling with drilling bits. The high penetration rate allows separate equipment to accomplish drilling and casing operations in a more efficient manner than using a one-trip approach. The high penetration rate requires accurate, real time directional drilling in three dimensions.

[0629] In some embodiments, high penetration rates may be attained using composite coiled tubing in combination with particle jet drilling. Particle jet drilling forms an opening in a formation by impacting the formation with high pressure fluid containing particles to remove material from the formation. The particles may function as abrasives. In addition to composite coiled tubing and particle jet drilling, a downhole electric orienter, bubble entrained mud, downhole inertial navigation, and a computer control system may be needed. Other types of drilling fluid and drilling fluid systems may be used instead of using bubble entrained mud. Such drilling fluid systems may include, but are not limited to, straight liquid circulation systems, multiphase circulation systems using liquid and gas, and/or foam circulation systems.

[0630] Composite coiled tubing has a fatigue life that is significantly greater than the fatigue life of coiled steel tubing. Composite coiled tubing is available from Airborne Composites BV (The Hague, The Netherlands). Composite coiled tubing can be used to form many boreholes in a formation. The composite coiled tubing may include integral power lines for providing electricity to downhole tools. The composite coiled tubing may include integral data lines for providing real time information regarding downhole conditions to the computer control system and for sending real time control information from the computer control system to the downhole equipment.

[0631] The coiled tubing may include an abrasion resistant outer sheath. The outer sheath may inhibit damage to the coiled tubing due to sliding experienced by the coiled tubing during deployment and retrieval. In some embodiments, the coiled tubing may be rotated during use in lieu of or in addition to having an abrasion resistant outer sheath to minimize uneven wear of the composite coiled tubing.

[0632] Particle jet drilling may advantageously allow for stepped changes in the drilling rate. Drill bits are no longer needed and downhole motors are eliminated. Particle jet drilling may decouple cutting formation to form the borehole from the bottom hole assembly. Decoupling cutting formation to form the borehole from the bottom hole assembly reduces the impact that variable formation properties (for example, formation dip, vugs, fractures and transition zones) have on wellbore trajectory. By decoupling cutting formation to form the borehole from the bottom hole assembly, directional drilling may be reduced to orienting one or more particle jet nozzles in appropriate directions. Additionally, particle jet drilling may be used to under ream one or more portions of a wellbore to form a larger diameter opening.

[0633] Particles may be introduced into a high pressure injection stream during particle jet drilling. The ability to achieve and circulate high particle laden fluid under high pressure may facilitate the successful use of particle jet drilling. One type of pump that may be used for particle jet drilling is a heavy duty piston membrane pump. Heavy duty piston membrane pumps may be available from ABEL GmbH & Co. KG (Buchen, Germany). Piston membrane pumps have been used for long term, continuous pumping of slurries containing high total solids in the mining and power industries. Piston membrane pumps are similar to triplex pumps used for drilling operations in the oil and gas industry except heavy duty preformed membranes separate the slurry from the hydraulic side of the pump. In this fashion, the solids laden fluid is brought up to pressure in the injection line in one step and circulated downhole without damaging the internal mechanisms of the pump.

[0634] Another type of pump that may be used for particle jet drilling is an annular pressure exchange pump. Annular pressure exchange pumps may be available from Macmahon Mining Services Pty Ltd (Lonsdale, Australia). Annular pressure exchange pumps have been used for long term, continuous pumping of slurries containing high total solids in the mining industry. Annular pressure exchange pumps use hydraulic oil to compress a hose inside a high-strength pressure chamber in a peristaltic like way to displace the contents of the hose. Annular pressure exchange pumps may obtain continuous flow by having twin chambers. One chamber fills while the other chamber is purged.

[0635] The bottom hole assembly may include a downhole electric orienter. The downhole electric orienter may allow for directional drilling by directing one or more particle jet drilling nozzles in desired directions. The downhole electric orienter may be coupled to a computer control system through one or more integral data lines of the composite coiled tubing. Power for the downhole electric orienter may be supplied through an integral power line of the composite coiled tubing or through a battery system in the bottom hole assembly.

[0636] Bubble entrained mud may be used as the drilling fluid. Bubble entrained mud may allow for particle jet drilling without raising the equivalent circulating density to unacceptable levels. A form of managed pressure drilling may be affected by varying the density of bubble entrainment. In some embodiments, particles in the drilling fluid may be separated from the drilling fluid using magnetic recovery when the particles include iron or alloys that may be influenced by magnetic fields. Bubble entrained mud may be used because using air or other gas as the drilling fluid may result in excessive wear of components from high velocity particles in the return stream. The density of the bubble entrained mud going downhole as a function of real time gains and losses of fluid may be automated using the computer control system.

[0637] In some embodiments, multiphase systems are used. For example, if gas injection rates are low enough that wear rates are acceptable, a gas-liquid circulating system may be used. Bottom hole circulating pressures may be adjusted by the computer control system. The computer control system may adjust the gas and/or liquid injection rates.

[0638] In some embodiments, pipe-in-pipe drilling is used. Pipe-in-pipe drilling may include circulating fluid through the space between the outer pipe and the inner pipe instead of between the wellbore and the drill string. Pipe-in-pipe drilling may be used if contact of the drilling fluid with one or more fresh water aquifers is not acceptable. Pipe-in-pipe drilling may be used if the density of the drilling fluid cannot be adjusted low enough to effectively reduce potential lost circulation issues.

[0639] Downhole inertial navigation may be part of the bottom hole assembly. The use of downhole inertial navigation allows for determination of the position (including depth, azimuth and inclination) without magnetic sensors. Magnetic interference from casings and/or emissions from the high density of wells in the formation may interfere with a system that determines the position of the bottom hole assembly based on magnet sensors.

[0640] The computer control system may receive information from the bottom hole assembly. The computer control system may process the information to determine the position of the bottom hole assembly. The computer control system may control drilling fluid rate, drilling fluid density, drilling fluid pressure, particle density, other variables, and/or the downhole electric orienter to control the rate of penetration and/or the direction of borehole formation.

[0641] In some embodiments, robots are used to perform a task in a wellbore formed or being formed using composite coiled tubing. The task may be, but is not limited to, providing traction to move the coiled tubing, surveying, removing cuttings, logging, and/or freeing pipe. For example, a robot may be used when drilling a horizontal opening if enough weight cannot be applied to the bottom hole assembly to advance the coiled tubing and bottom hole assembly in the formed borehole. The robot may be sent down the borehole. The robot may clamp to the composite coiled tubing. Portions of the robot may extend to engage the formation. Traction between the robot and the formation may be used to advance the robot forward so that the composite coiled tubing and the bottom hole assembly advance forward.

[0642] The robots may be battery powered. To use the robot, drilling could be stopped, and the robot could be connected to the outside of the composite coiled tubing. The robot would run along the outside of the composite coiled tubing to the bottom of the hole. If needed, the robot could electrically couple to the bottom hole assembly. The robot could couple to a contact plate on the bottom hole assembly. The bottom hole assembly may include a step-down transformer that brings the high voltage, low current electricity supplied to the bottom hole assembly to a lower voltage and higher current (for example, one third the voltage and three times the amperage supplied to the bottom hole assembly). The lower voltage, higher current electricity supplied from the step-down transformer may be used to recharge the batteries of the robot. In some embodiments, the robot may function while coupled to the bottom hole assembly. The batteries may supply sufficient energy for the robot to travel to the drill bit and back to the surface.

[0643] Some wellbores formed in the formation may be used to facilitate formation of a perimeter barrier around a treatment area. Heat sources in the treatment area may heat hydrocarbons in the formation within the treatment area. The perimeter barrier may be, but is not limited to, a low temperature or frozen barrier formed by freeze wells, a wax barrier formed in the formation, dewatering wells, a grout wall formed in the formation, a sulfur cement barrier, a barrier formed by a gel produced in the formation, a barrier formed by precipitation of salts in the formation, a barrier formed by a polymerization reaction in the formation, and/or sheets driven into the formation. Heat sources, production wells, injection wells, dewatering wells, and/or monitoring wells may be installed in the treatment area defined by the barrier prior to, simultaneously with, or after installation of the barrier.

[0644] A low temperature zone around at least a portion of a treatment area may be formed by freeze wells. In an embodiment, refrigerant is circulated through freeze wells to form low temperature zones around each freeze well. The freeze wells are placed in the formation so that the low temperature zones overlap and form a low temperature zone around the treatment area. The low temperature zone established by freeze wells is maintained below the freezing temperature of aqueous fluid in the formation. Aqueous fluid entering the low temperature zone freezes and forms the frozen barrier. In other embodiments, the freeze barrier is formed by batch operated freeze wells. A cold fluid, such as liquid nitrogen, is introduced into the freeze wells to form low temperature zones around the freeze wells. The fluid is replenished as needed.

[0645] In some embodiments, two or more rows of freeze wells are located about all or a portion of the perimeter of the treatment area to form a thick interconnected low temperature zone. Thick low temperature zones may be formed adjacent to areas in the formation where there is a high flow rate of aqueous fluid in the formation. The thick barrier may ensure that breakthrough of the frozen barrier established by the freeze wells does not occur.

[0646] In some embodiments, a double barrier system is used to isolate a treatment area. The double barrier system may be formed with a first barrier and a second barrier. The first barrier may be formed around at least a portion of the treatment area to inhibit fluid from entering or exiting the treatment area. The second barrier may be formed around at least a portion of the first barrier to isolate an inter-barrier zone between the first barrier and the second barrier. The inter-barrier zone may have a thickness from about 1 m to about 300 m. In some embodiments, the thickness of the inter-barrier zone is from about 10 m to about 100 m, or from about 20 m to about 50 m.

[0647] The double barrier system may allow greater project depths than a single barrier system. Greater depths are possible with the double barrier system because the stepped differential pressures across the first barrier and the second barrier is less than the differential pressure across a single barrier. The smaller differential pressures across the first barrier and the second barrier make a breach of the double barrier system less likely to occur at depth for the double barrier system as compared to the single barrier system.

[0648] The first barrier and the second barrier may be the same type of barrier or different types of barriers. In some embodiments, the first barrier and the second barrier are formed by freeze wells. In some embodiments, the first barrier is formed by freeze wells, and the second barrier is a grout wall. The grout wall may be formed of cement, sulfur, sulfur cement, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, a portion of the first barrier and/or a portion of the second barrier is a natural barrier, such as an impermeable rock formation.

[0649] Vertically positioned freeze wells and/or horizontally positioned freeze wells may be positioned around sides of the treatment area. If the upper layer (the overburden) or the lower layer (the underburden) of the formation is likely to allow fluid flow into the treatment area or out of the treatment area, horizontally positioned freeze wells may be used to form an upper and/or a lower barrier for the treatment area. In some embodiments, an upper barrier and/or a lower barrier may not be necessary if the upper layer and/or the lower layer are at least substantially impermeable. If the upper freeze barrier is formed, portions of heat sources, production wells, injection wells, and/or dewatering wells that pass through the low temperature zone created by the freeze wells forming the upper freeze barrier wells may be insulated and/or heat traced so that the low temperature zone does not adversely affect the functioning of the heat sources, production wells, injection wells and/or dewatering wells passing through the low temperature zone.

[0650] FIG. 35 depicts an embodiment of freeze well 466. Freeze well 466 may include canister 468, inlet conduit 470, spacers 472, and wellcap 474. Spacers 472 may position inlet conduit 470 in canister 468 so that an annular space is formed between the canister and the conduit. Spacers 472 may promote turbulent flow of refrigerant in the annular space between inlet conduit 470 and canister 468, but the spacers may also cause a significant fluid pressure drop. Turbulent fluid flow in the annular space may be promoted by roughening the inner surface of canister 468, by roughening the outer surface of inlet conduit 470, and/or by having a small cross-sectional area annular space that allows for high refrigerant velocity in the annular space. In some embodiments, spacers are not used. Wellhead 476 may suspend canister 468 in wellbore 428.

[0651] Formation refrigerant may flow through cold side conduit 478 from a refrigeration unit to inlet conduit 470 of freeze well 466. The formation refrigerant may flow through an annular space between inlet conduit 470 and canister 468 to warm side conduit 480. Heat may transfer from the formation to canister 468 and from the canister to the formation refrigerant in the annular space. Inlet conduit 470 may be insulated to inhibit heat transfer to the formation refrigerant during passage of the formation refrigerant into freeze well 466. In an embodiment, inlet conduit 470 is a high density polyethylene tube. At cold temperatures, some polymers may exhibit a large amount of thermal contraction. For example, a 260 m initial length of polyethylene conduit subjected to a temperature of about −25° C. may contract by 6 m or more. If a high density polyethylene conduit, or other polymer conduit, is used, the large thermal contraction of the material must be taken into account in determining the final depth of the freeze well. For example, the freeze well may be drilled deeper than needed, and the conduit may be allowed to shrink back during use. In some embodiments, inlet conduit 470 is an insulated metal tube. In some embodiments, the insulation may be a polymer coating, such as, but not limited to, polyvinylchloride, high density polyethylene, and/or polystyrene.

[0652] Freeze well 466 may be introduced into the formation using a coiled tubing rig. In an embodiment, canister 468 and inlet conduit 470 are wound on a single reel. The coiled tubing rig introduces the canister and inlet conduit 470 into the formation. In an embodiment, canister 468 is wound on a first reel and inlet conduit 470 is wound on a second reel. The coiled tubing rig introduces canister 468 into the formation. Then, the coiled tubing rig is used to introduce inlet conduit 470 into the canister. In other embodiments, freeze well is assembled in sections at the wellbore site and introduced into the formation.

[0653] An insulated section of freeze well 466 may be placed adjacent to overburden 482. An uninsulated section of freeze well 466 may be placed adjacent to layer or layers 484 where a low temperature zone is to be formed. In some embodiments, uninsulated sections of the freeze wells may be positioned adjacent only to aquifers or other permeable portions of the formation that would allow fluid to flow into or out of the treatment area. Portions of the formation where uninsulated sections of the freeze wells are to be placed may be determined using analysis of cores and/or logging techniques.

[0654] FIG. 36 depicts an embodiment of the lower portion of freeze well 466. Freeze well may include canister 468, and inlet conduit 470. Latch pin 486 may be welded to canister 468. Latch pin 486 may include tapered upper end 488 and groove 490. Tapered upper end 488 may facilitate placement of a latch of inlet conduit 470 on latch pin 486. A spring ring of the latch may be positioned in groove 490 to couple inlet conduit 470 to canister 468.

[0655] Inlet conduit 470 may include plastic portion 492, transition piece 494, outer sleeve 496, and inner sleeve 498. Plastic portion 492 may be a plastic conduit that carries refrigerant into freeze well 466. In some embodiments, plastic portion 492 is high density polyethylene pipe.

[0656] Transition piece 494 may be a transition between plastic portion 492 and outer sleeve 496. A plastic end of transition piece 494 may be fusion welded to the end of plastic portion 492. A metal portion of transition piece may be butt welded to outer sleeve 496. In some embodiments, the metal portion and outer sleeve 496 are formed of 304 stainless steel. Other material may be used in other embodiments. Transition pieces 494 may be available from Central Plastics Company (Shawnee, Okla.).

[0657] In some embodiments, outer sleeve 496 may include stop 500. Stop 500 may engage a stop of inner sleeve 498 to limit a bottom position of the outer sleeve relative to the inner sleeve. In some embodiments, outer sleeve 496 may include opening 502. Opening 502 may align with a corresponding opening in inner sleeve 498. A shear pin may be positioned in the openings during insertion of inlet conduit 470 in canister 468 to inhibit movement of outer sleeve 496 relative to inner sleeve 498. Shear pin is strong enough to support the weight of inner sleeve 498, but weak enough to shear due to force applied to the shear pin when outer sleeve 496 moves upwards in the wellbore due to thermal contraction or during installation of the inlet conduit after inlet conduit is coupled to canister 468.

[0658] Inner sleeve 498 may be positioned in outer sleeve 496. Inner sleeve has a length sufficient to inhibit separation of the inner sleeve from outer sleeve 496 when inlet conduit has fully contracted due to exposure of the inlet conduit to low temperature refrigerant. Inner sleeve 498 may include a plurality of slip rings 504 held in place by positioners 506, a plurality of openings 508, stop 510, and latch 512. Slip rings 504 may position inner sleeve 498 relative to outer sleeve 496 and allow the outer sleeve to move relative to the inner sleeve. In some embodiments, slip rings 504 are TEFLON® rings, such as polytetrafluoroethylene rings. Slip rings 504 may be made of different material in other embodiments. Positioners 506 may be steel rings welded to inner sleeve. Positioners 506 may be thinner than slip rings 504. Positioners 506 may inhibit movement of slip rings 504 relative to inner sleeve 498.

[0659] Openings 508 may be formed in a portion of inner sleeve 498 near the bottom of the inner sleeve. Openings 508 may allow refrigerant to pass from inlet conduit 470 to canister 468. A majority of refrigerant flowing through inlet conduit 470 may pass through openings 508 to canister 468. Some refrigerant flowing through inlet conduit 470 may pass to canister 468 through the space between inner sleeve 498 and outer sleeve 496.

[0660] Stop 510 may be located above openings 508. Stop 510 interacts with stop 500 of outer sleeve 496 to limit the downward movement of the outer sleeve relative to inner sleeve 498.

[0661] Latch 512 may be welded to the bottom of inner sleeve 498. Latch 512 may include flared opening 514 that engages tapered end 488 of latch pin 486. Latch 512 may include spring ring 516 that snaps into groove of latch pin 490 to couple inlet conduit 470 to canister 468.

[0662] To install freeze well 466, a wellbore is formed in the formation and canister 468 is placed in the wellbore. The bottom of canister 468 has latch pin 486. Transition piece is fusion welded to an end of coiled plastic portion 492 of inlet conduit 470. Latch 512 is placed in canister 468 and inlet conduit is spooled into the canister. Spacers may be coupled to plastic portion 492 at selected positions. Latch may be lowered until flared opening 514 engages tapered end 488 of latch pin 486 and spring ring 504 snaps into the groove of the latch pin. After spring ring 504 engages latch pin 486, inlet conduit 470 may be moved upwards to shear the pin joining outer sleeve 496 to inner sleeve 498. Inlet conduit 470 may be coupled to the refrigerant supply piping and canister may be coupled to the refrigerant return piping.

[0663] If needed, inlet conduit 470 may be removed from canister 468. Inlet conduit may be pulled upwards to separate outer sleeve 496 from inner sleeve 498. Plastic portion 492, transition piece 494, and outer sleeve 496 may be pulled out of canister 468. A removal instrument may be lowered into canister 468. The removal instrument may secure to inner sleeve 498. The removal instrument may be pulled upwards to pull spring ring 516 of latch 512 out of groove 490 of latch pin 486. The removal tool may be withdrawn out of canister 468 to remove inner sleeve 498 from the canister.

[0664] Grout, wax, polymer or other material may be used in combination with freeze wells to provide a barrier for the in situ heat treatment process. The material may fill cavities (vugs) in the formation and reduces the permeability of the formation. The material may have higher thermal conductivity than gas and/or formation fluid that fills cavities in the formation. Placing material in the cavities may allow for faster low temperature zone formation. The material may form a perpetual barrier in the formation that may strengthen the formation. The use of material to form the barrier in unconsolidated or substantially unconsolidated formation material may allow for larger well spacing than is possible without the use of the material. The combination of the material and the low temperature zone formed by freeze wells may constitute a double barrier for environmental regulation purposes. In some embodiments, the material is introduced into the formation as a liquid, and the liquid sets in the formation to form a solid. The material may be, but is not limited to, fine cement, micro fine cement, sulfur, sulfur cement, viscous thermoplastics, and/or waxes. The material may include surfactants, stabilizers or other chemicals that modify the properties of the material. For example, the presence of surfactant in the material may promote entry of the material into small openings in the formation.

[0665] Material may be introduced into the formation through freeze well wellbores. The material may be allowed to set. The integrity of the wall formed by the material may be checked. The integrity of the material wall may be checked by logging techniques and/or by hydrostatic testing. If the permeability of a section formed by the material is too high, additional material may be introduced into the formation through freeze well wellbores. After the permeability of the section is sufficiently reduced, freeze wells may be installed in the freeze well wellbores.

[0666] Material may be injected into the formation at a pressure that is high, but below the fracture pressure of the formation. In some embodiments, injection of material is performed in 16 m increments in the freeze wellbore. Larger or smaller increments may be used if desired. In some embodiments, material is only applied to certain portions of the formation. For example, material may be applied to the formation through the freeze wellbore only adjacent to aquifer zones and/or to relatively high permeability zones (for example, zones with a permeability greater than about 0.1 darcy). Applying material to aquifers may inhibit migration of water from one aquifer to a different aquifer. For material placed in the formation through freeze well wellbores, the material may inhibit water migration between aquifers during formation of the low temperature zone. The material may also inhibit water migration between aquifers when an established low temperature zone is allowed to thaw.

[0667] In some embodiments, the material used to form a barrier may be fine cement and micro fine cement. Cement may provide structural support in the formation. Fine cement may be ASTM type 3 Portland cement. Fine cement may be less expensive than micro fine cement. In an embodiment, a freeze wellbore is formed in the formation. Selected portions of the freeze wellbore are grouted using fine cement. Then, micro fine cement is injected into the formation through the freeze wellbore. The fine cement may reduce the permeability down to about 10 millidarcy. The micro fine cement may further reduce the permeability to about 0.1 millidarcy. After the grout is introduced into the formation, a freeze wellbore canister may be inserted into the formation. The process may be repeated for each freeze well that will be used to form the barrier.

[0668] In some embodiments, fine cement is introduced into every other freeze wellbore. Micro fine cement is introduced into the remaining wellbores. For example, grout may be used in a formation with freeze wellbores set at about 5 m spacing. A first wellbore is drilled and fine cement is introduced into the formation through the wellbore. A freeze well canister is positioned in the first wellbore. A second wellbore is drilled 10 m away from the first wellbore. Fine cement is introduced into the formation through the second wellbore. A freeze well canister is positioned in the second wellbore. A third wellbore is drilled between the first wellbore and the second wellbore. In some embodiments, grout from the first and/or second wellbores may be detected in the cuttings of the third wellbore. Micro fine cement is introduced into the formation through the third wellbore. A freeze wellbore canister is positioned in the third wellbore. The same procedure is used to form the remaining freeze wells that will form the barrier around the treatment area.

[0669] In some embodiments, material including wax is used to form a barrier in a formation. Wax barriers may be formed in wet, dry, or oil wetted formations. Wax barriers may be formed above, at the bottom of, and/or below the water table. Material including liquid wax introduced into the formation may permeate into adjacent rock and fractures in the formation. The material may permeate into rock to fill microscopic as well as macroscopic pores and vugs in the rock. The wax solidifies to form a barrier that inhibits fluid flow into or out of a treatment area. A wax barrier may provide a minimal amount of structural support in the formation. Molten wax may reduce the strength of poorly consolidated soil by reducing inter-grain friction so that the poorly consolidated soil sloughs or liquefies. Poorly consolidated layers may be consolidated by use of cement or other binding agents before introduction of molten wax.

[0670] In some embodiments, the formation where a wax barrier is to be established is dewatered before and/or during formation of the wax barrier. In some embodiments, the portion of the formation where the wax barrier is to form is dewatered or diluted to remove or reduce saline water that could adversely affect the properties of the material introduced into the formation to form the wax barrier.

[0671] In some embodiments, water is introduced into the formation during formation of the wax barrier. Water may be introduced into the formation when the barrier is to be formed below the water table or in a dry portion of the formation. The water may be used to heat the formation to a desired temperature before introducing the material that forms the wax barrier. The water may be introduced at an elevated temperature and/or the water may be heated in the formation from one or more heaters.

[0672] The wax of the barrier may be a branched paraffin to inhibit biological degradation of the wax. The wax may include stabilizers, surfactants or other chemicals that modify the physical and/or chemical properties of the wax. The physical properties may be tailored to meet specific needs. The wax may melt at a relative low temperature (for example, the wax may have a typical melting point of about 52° C.). The temperature at which the wax congeals may be at least 5° C., 10° C., 20° C., or 30° C. above the ambient temperature of the formation prior to any heating of the formation. When molten, the wax may have a relatively low viscosity (for example, 4 to 10 cp at about 99° C.). The flash point of the wax may be relatively high (for example, the flash point may be over 204° C.). The wax may have a density less than the density of water and may have a heat capacity that is less than half the heat capacity of water. The solid wax may have a low thermal conductivity (for example, about 0.18 W/m ° C.) so that the solid wax is a thermal insulator. Waxes suitable for forming a barrier are available as WAXFIX™ from Carter Technologies Company (Sugar Land, Tex., U.S.A.). WAXFIX™ is very resistant to microbial attack. WAXFIX™ may have a half life of greater than 5000 years.

[0673] In some embodiments, a wax barrier or wax barriers may be used as the barriers for the in situ heat treatment process. In some embodiments, a wax barrier may be used in conjunction with freeze wells that form a low temperature barrier around the treatment area. In some embodiments, the wax barrier is formed and freeze wells are installed in the wellbores used for introducing wax into the formation. In some embodiments, the wax barrier is formed in wellbores offset from the freeze well wellbores. The wax barrier may be on the outside or the inside of the freeze wells. In some embodiments, a wax barrier may be formed on both the inside and outside of the freeze wells. The wax barrier may inhibit water flow in the formation that would inhibit the formation of the low temperature zone by the freeze wells. In some embodiments, a wax barrier is formed in the inter-barrier zone between two freeze barriers of a double barrier system.

[0674] Material used to form the wax barrier may be introduced into the formation through wellbores. The wellbores may include vertical wellbores, slanted wellbores, and/or horizontal wellbores (for example, wellbores with sections that are horizontally or near horizontally oriented). The use of vertical wellbores, slanted wellbores, and/or horizontal wellbores for forming the wax barrier allows the formation of a barrier that seals both horizontal and vertical fractures.

[0675] Wellbores may be formed in the formation around the treatment area at a close spacing. In some embodiments, the spacing is from about 1.5 m to about 4 m. Larger or smaller spacings may be used. Low temperature heaters may be inserted in the wellbores. The heaters may operate at temperatures from about 260° C. to about 320° C. so that the temperature at the formation face is below the pyrolysis temperature of hydrocarbons in the formation. The heaters may be activated to heat the formation until the overlap between two adjacent heaters raises the temperature of the zone between the two heaters above the melting temperature of the wax. Heating the formation to obtain superposition of heat with a temperature above the melting temperature of the wax may take one month, two months, or longer. After heating, the heaters may be turned off. In some embodiments, the heaters are downhole antennas that operate at about 10 MHz to heat the formation.

[0676] After heating, the material used to form the wax barrier may be introduced into the wellbores to form the barrier. The material may flow into the formation and fill any fractures and porosity that has been heated. The wax in the material congeals when the wax flows to cold regions beyond the heated circumference. This wax barrier formation method may form a more complete barrier than some other methods of wax barrier formation, but the time for heating may be longer than for some of the other methods. Also, if a low temperature barrier is to be formed with the freeze wells placed in the wellbores used for injection of the material used to form the barrier, the freeze wells will have to remove the heat supplied to the formation to allow for introduction of the material used to form the barrier. The low temperature barrier may take longer to form.

[0677] In some embodiments, the wax barrier may be formed using a conduit placed in the wellbore. FIG. 37 depicts an embodiment of a system for forming a wax barrier in a formation. Wellbore 428 may extend into one or more layers 484 below overburden 482. Wellbore 428 may be an open wellbore below overburden 482. One or more of the layers 484 may include fracture systems 518. One or more of the layers may be vuggy so that the layer or a portion of the layer has a high porosity. Conduit 520 may be positioned in wellbore 428. In some embodiments, low temperature heater 522 may be strapped or attached to conduit 520. In some embodiments, conduit 520 may be a heater element. Heater 522 may be operated so that the heater does not cause pyrolysis of hydrocarbons adjacent to the heater. At least a portion of wellbore 428 may be filled with fluid. The fluid may be formation fluid or water. Heater 522 may be activated to heat the fluid. A portion of the heated fluid may move outwards from heater 522 into the formation. The heated fluid may be injected into the fractures and permeable vuggy zones. The heated fluid may be injected into the fractures and permeable vuggy zones by introducing heated barrier material into wellbore 428 in the annular space between conduit 520 and the wellbore. The introduced material flows to the areas heated by the fluid and congeals when the fluid reaches cold regions not heated by the fluid. The material fills fracture systems 518 and permeable vuggy pathways heated by the fluid, but the material may not permeate through a significant portion of the rock matrix as when the hot material is introduced into a heated formation as described above. The material flows into fracture systems 518 a sufficient distance to join with material injected from an adjacent well so that a barrier to fluid flow through the fracture systems forms when the wax congeals. A portion of material may congeal along the wall of a fracture or a vug without completely blocking the fracture or filling the vug. The congealed material may act as an insulator and allow additional liquid wax to flow beyond the congealed portion to penetrate deeply into the formation and form blockages to fluid flow when the material cools below the melting temperature of the wax in the material.

[0678] Material in the annular space of wellbore 428 between conduit 520 and the formation may be removed through conduit by displacing the material with water or other fluid. Conduit 520 may be removed and a freeze well may be installed in the wellbore. This method may use less material than the method described above. The heating of the fluid may be accomplished in less than a week or within a day. The small amount of heat input may allow for quicker formation of a low temperature barrier if freeze wells are to be positioned in the wellbores used to introduce material into the formation.

[0679] In some embodiments, a heater may be suspended in the well without a conduit that allows for removal of excess material from the wellbore. The material may be introduced into the well. After material introduction, the heater may be removed from the well. In some embodiments, a conduit may be positioned in the wellbore, but a heater may not be coupled to the conduit. Hot material may be circulated through the conduit so that the wax enters fractures systems and/or vugs adjacent to the wellbore.

[0680] In some embodiments, material may be used during the formation of a wellbore to improve inter-zonal isolation and protect a low-pressure zone from inflow from a high-pressure zone. During wellbore formation where a high pressure zone and a low pressure zone are penetrated by a common wellbore, it is possible for fluid from the high pressure zone to flow into the low pressure zone and cause an underground blowout. To avoid this, the wellbore may be formed through the first zone. Then, an intermediate casing may be set and cemented through the first zone. Setting casing may be time consuming and expensive. Instead of setting a casing, material may be introduced to form a wax barrier that seals the first zone. The material may also inhibit or prevent mixing of high salinity brines from lower, high pressure zones with fresher brines in upper, lower pressure zones.

[0681] FIG. 38A depicts wellbore 428 drilled to a first depth in formation 524. After the surface casing for wellbore 428 is set and cemented in place, the wellbore is drilled to the first depth which passes through a permeable zone, such as an aquifer. The permeable zone may be fracture system 518′. In some embodiments, a heater is placed in wellbore 428 to heat the vertical interval of fracture system 518′. In some embodiments, hot fluid is circulated in wellbore 428 to heat the vertical interval of fracture system 518′. After heating, molten material is pumped down wellbore 428. The molten material flows a selected distance into fracture system 518′ before the material cools sufficiently to solidify and form a seal. The molten material is introduced into formation 524 at a pressure below the fracture pressure of the formation. In some embodiments, pressure is maintained on the wellhead until the material has solidified. In some embodiments, the material is allowed to cool until the material in wellbore 428 is almost to the congealing temperature of the material. The material in wellbore 428 may then be displaced out of the wellbore. Wax in the material makes the portion of formation 524 near wellbore 428 into a substantially impermeable zone. Wellbore 428 may be drilled to depth through one or more permeable zones that are at higher pressures than the pressure in the first permeable zone, such as fracture system 518″. Congealed wax in fracture system 518′ may inhibit blowout into the lower pressure zone. FIG. 38B depicts wellbore 428 drilled to depth with congealed wax 526 in formation 524.

[0682] In some embodiments, a material including wax may be used to contain and inhibit migration in a subsurface formation that has liquid hydrocarbon contaminants (for example, compounds such as benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene) condensed in fractures in the formation. The location of the contaminants may be surrounded with heated injection wells. The material may be introduced into the wells to form an outer wax barrier. The material injected into the fractures from the injection wells may mix with the contaminants. The contaminants may be solubilized into the material. When the material congeals, the contaminants may be permanently contained in the solid wax phase of the material.

[0683] In some embodiments, a portion or all of the wax barrier may be removed after completion of the in situ heat treatment process. Removing all or a portion of the wax barrier may allow fluid to flow into and out of the treatment area of the in situ heat treatment process. Removing all or a portion of the wax barrier may return flow conditions in the formation to substantially the same conditions as existed before the in situ heat treatment process. To remove a portion or all of the wax barrier, heaters may be used to heat the formation adjacent to the wax barrier. In some embodiments, the heaters raise the temperature above the decomposition temperature of the material forming the wax barrier. In some embodiments, the heaters raise the temperature above the melting temperature of the material forming the wax barrier. Fluid (for example water) may be introduced into the formation to drive the molten material to one or more production wells positioned in the formation. The production wells may remove the material from the formation.

[0684] In some embodiments, a composition that includes a cross-linkable polymer may be used with or in addition to a material that includes wax to form the barrier. Such composition may be provided to the formation as is described above for the material that includes wax. The composition may be configured to react and solidify after a selected time in the formation, thereby allowing the composition to be provided as a liquid to the formation. The cross-linkable polymer may include, for example, acrylates, methacrylates, urethanes, and/or epoxies. A cross-linking initiator may be included in the composition. The composition may also include a cross-linking inhibitor. The cross-linking inhibitor may be configured to degrade while in the formation, thereby allowing the composition to solidify.

[0685] In situ heat treatment processes and solution mining processes may heat the treatment area, remove mass from the treatment area, and greatly increase the permeability of the treatment area. In certain embodiments, the treatment area after being treated may have a permeability of at least 0.1 darcy. In some embodiments, the treatment area after being treated has a permeability of at least 1 darcy, of at least 10 darcy, or of at least 100 darcy. The increased permeability allows the fluid to spread in the formation into fractures, microfractures, and/or pore spaces in the formation. Outside of the treatment area, the permeability may remain at the initial permeability of the formation. The increased permeability allows fluid introduced to flow easily within the formation.

[0686] In certain embodiments, a barrier may be formed in the formation after a solution mining process and/or an in situ heat treatment process by introducing a fluid into the formation. The barrier may inhibit formation fluid from entering the treatment area after the solution mining and/or in situ heat treatment processes have ended. The barrier formed by introducing fluid into the formation may allow for isolation of the treatment area.

[0687] The fluid introduced into the formation to form a barrier may include wax, bitumen, heavy oil, sulfur, polymer, gel, saturated saline solution, and/or one or more reactants that react to form a precipitate, solid or high viscosity fluid in the formation. In some embodiments, bitumen, heavy oil, reactants and/or sulfur used to form the barrier are obtained from treatment facilities associated with the in situ heat treatment process. For example, sulfur may be obtained from a Claus process used to treat produced gases to remove hydrogen sulfide and other sulfur compounds.

[0688] The fluid may be introduced into the formation as a liquid, vapor, or mixed phase fluid. The fluid may be introduced into a portion of the formation that is at an elevated temperature. In some embodiments, the fluid is introduced into the formation through wells located near a perimeter of the treatment area. The fluid may be directed away from the treatment area. The elevated temperature of the formation maintains or allows the fluid to have a low viscosity so that the fluid moves away from the wells. A portion of the fluid may spread outwards in the formation towards a cooler portion of the formation. The relatively high permeability of the formation allows fluid introduced from one wellbore to spread and mix with fluid introduced from other wellbores. In the cooler portion of the formation, the viscosity of the fluid increases, a portion of the fluid precipitates, and/or the fluid solidifies or thickens so that the fluid forms the barrier to flow of formation fluid into or out of the treatment area.

[0689] In some embodiments, a low temperature barrier formed by freeze wells surrounds all or a portion of the treatment area. As the fluid introduced into the formation approaches the low temperature barrier, the temperature of the formation becomes colder. The colder temperature increases the viscosity of the fluid, enhances precipitation, and/or solidifies the fluid to form the barrier to the flow of formation fluid into or out of the formation. The fluid may remain in the formation as a highly viscous fluid or a solid after the low temperature barrier has dissipated.

[0690] In certain embodiments, saturated saline solution is introduced into the formation. Components in the saturated saline solution may precipitate out of solution when the solution reaches a colder temperature. The solidified particles may form the barrier to the flow of formation fluid into or out of the formation. The solidified components may be substantially insoluble in formation fluid.

[0691] In certain embodiments, brine is introduced into the formation as a reactant. A second reactant, such as carbon dioxide, may be introduced into the formation to react with the brine. The reaction may generate a mineral complex that grows in the formation. The mineral complex may be substantially insoluble to formation fluid. In an embodiment, the brine solution includes a sodium and aluminum solution. The second reactant introduced in the formation is carbon dioxide. The carbon dioxide reacts with the brine solution to produce dawsonite. The minerals may solidify and form the barrier to the flow of formation fluid into or out of the formation.

[0692] In some embodiments, the barrier may be formed around a treatment area using sulfur. Advantageously, elemental sulfur is insoluble in water. Liquid and/or solid sulfur in the formation may form a barrier to formation fluid flow into or out of the treatment area.

[0693] A sulfur barrier may be established in the formation during or before initiation of heating to heat the treatment area of the in situ heat treatment process. In some embodiments, sulfur may be introduced into wellbores in the formation that are located between the treatment area and a first barrier (for example, a low temperature barrier established by freeze wells). The formation adjacent to the wellbores that the sulfur is introduced into may be dewatered. In some embodiments, the formation adjacent to the wellbores that the sulfur is introduced into is heated to facilitate removal of water and to prepare the wellbores and adjacent formation for the introduction of sulfur. The formation adjacent to the wellbores may be heated to a temperature below the pyrolysis temperature of hydrocarbons in the formation. The formation may be heated so that the temperature of a portion of the formation between two adjacent heaters is influenced by both heaters. In some embodiments, the heat may increase the permeability of the formation so that a first wellbore is in fluid communication with an adjacent wellbore.

[0694] After the formation adjacent to the wellbores is heated, molten sulfur at a temperature below the pyrolysis temperature of hydrocarbons in the formation is introduced into the formation. Over a certain temperature range, the viscosity of molten sulfur increases with increasing temperature. The molten sulfur introduced into the formation may be near the melting temperature of sulfur (about 115° C.) so that the sulfur has a relatively low viscosity (about 4-10 cp). Heaters in the wellbores may be temperature limited heaters with Curie temperatures near the melting temperature of sulfur so that the temperature of the molten sulfur stays relatively constant and below temperatures resulting in the formation of viscous molten sulfur. In some embodiments, the region adjacent to the wellbores may be heated to a temperature above the melting point of sulfur, but below the pyrolysis temperature of hydrocarbons in the formation. The heaters may be turned off and the temperature in the wellbores may be monitored (for example, using a fiber optic temperature monitoring system). When the temperature in the wellbore cools to a temperature near the melting temperature of sulfur, molten sulfur may be introduced into the formation.

[0695] The sulfur introduced into the formation is allowed to flow and diffuse into the formation from the wellbores. As the sulfur enters portions of the formation below the melting temperature, the sulfur solidifies and forms a barrier to fluid flow in the formation. Sulfur may be introduced until the formation is not able to accept additional sulfur. Heating may be stopped, and the formation may be allowed to naturally cool so that the sulfur in the formation solidifies. After introduction of the sulfur, the integrity of the formed barrier may be tested using pulse tests and/or tracer tests.

[0696] A barrier may be formed around the treatment area after the in situ heat treatment process. The sulfur may form a substantially permanent barrier in the formation. In some embodiments, a low temperature barrier formed by freeze wells surrounds the treatment area. Sulfur may be introduced on one or both sides of the low temperature barrier to form a barrier in the formation. The sulfur may be introduced into the formation as vapor or a liquid. As the sulfur approaches the low temperature barrier, the sulfur may condense and/or solidify in the formation to form the barrier.

[0697] In some embodiments, the sulfur may be introduced in the heated portion of the portion. The sulfur may be introduced into the formation through wells located near the perimeter of the treatment area. The temperature of the formation may be hotter than the vaporization temperature of sulfur (about 445° C.). The sulfur may be introduced as a liquid, vapor or mixed phase fluid. If a part of the introduced sulfur is in the liquid phase, the heat of the formation may vaporize the sulfur. The sulfur may flow outwards from the introduction wells towards cooler portions of the formation. The sulfur may condense and/or solidify in the formation to form the barrier.

[0698] In some embodiments, the Claus reaction may be used to form sulfur in the formation after the in situ heat treatment process. The Claus reaction is a gas phase equilibrium reaction. The Claus reaction is:
4H₂S+2SO₂←→3S₂+4H₂O  (EQN. 1)

[0699] Hydrogen sulfide may be obtained by separating the hydrogen sulfide from the produced fluid of an ongoing in situ heat treatment process. A portion of the hydrogen sulfide may be burned to form the needed sulfur dioxide. Hydrogen sulfide may be introduced into the formation through a number of wells in the formation. Sulfur dioxide may be introduced into the formation through other wells. The wells used for injecting sulfur dioxide or hydrogen sulfide may have been production wells, heater wells, monitor wells or other type of well during the in situ heat treatment process. The wells used for injecting sulfur dioxide or hydrogen sulfide may be near the perimeter of the treatment area. The number of wells may be enough so that the formation in the vicinity of the injection wells does not cool to a point where the sulfur dioxide and the hydrogen sulfide can form sulfur and condense, rather than remain in the vapor phase. The wells used to introduce the sulfur dioxide into the formation may also be near the perimeter of the treatment area. In some embodiments, the hydrogen sulfide and sulfur dioxide may be introduced into the formation through the same wells (for example, through two conduits positioned in the same wellbore). The hydrogen sulfide and the sulfur dioxide may react in the formation to form sulfur and water. The sulfur may flow outwards in the formation and condense and/or solidify to form the barrier in the formation.

[0700] The sulfur barrier may form in the formation beyond the area where hydrocarbons in formation fluid generated by the heat treatment process condense in the formation. Regions near the perimeter of the treated area may be at lower temperatures than the treated area. Sulfur may condense and/or solidify from the vapor phase in these lower temperature regions. Additional hydrogen sulfide, and/or sulfur dioxide may diffuse to these lower temperature regions. Additional sulfur may form by the Claus reaction to maintain an equilibrium concentration of sulfur in the vapor phase. Eventually, a sulfur barrier may form around the treated zone. The vapor phase in the treated region may remain as an equilibrium mixture of sulfur, hydrogen sulfide, sulfur dioxide, water vapor and other vapor products present or evolving from the formation.

[0701] The conversion to sulfur is favored at lower temperatures, so the conversion of hydrogen sulfide and sulfur dioxide to sulfur may take place a distance away from the wells that introduce the reactants into the formation. The Claus reaction may result in the formation of sulfur where the temperature of the formation is cooler (for example where the temperature of the formation is at temperatures from about 180° C. to about 240° C.).

[0702] A temperature monitoring system may be installed in wellbores of freeze wells and/or in monitor wells adjacent to the freeze wells to monitor the temperature profile of the freeze wells and/or the low temperature zone established by the freeze wells. The monitoring system may be used to monitor progress of low temperature zone formation. The monitoring system may be used to determine the location of high temperature areas, potential breakthrough locations, or breakthrough locations after the low temperature zone has formed. Periodic monitoring of the temperature profile of the freeze wells and/or low temperature zone established by the freeze wells may allow additional cooling to be provided to potential trouble areas before breakthrough occurs. Additional cooling may be provided at or adjacent to breakthroughs and high temperature areas to ensure the integrity of the low temperature zone around the treatment area. Additional cooling may be provided by increasing refrigerant flow through selected freeze wells, installing an additional freeze well or freeze wells, and/or by providing a cryogenic fluid, such as liquid nitrogen, to the high temperature areas. Providing additional cooling to potential problem areas before breakthrough occurs may be more time efficient and cost efficient than sealing a breach, reheating a portion of the treatment area that has been cooled by influx of fluid, and/or remediating an area outside of the breached frozen barrier.

[0703] In some embodiments, a traveling thermocouple may be used to monitor the temperature profile of selected freeze wells or monitor wells. In some embodiments, the temperature monitoring system includes thermocouples placed at discrete locations in the wellbores of the freeze wells, in the freeze wells, and/or in the monitoring wells. In some embodiments, the temperature monitoring system comprises a fiber optic temperature monitoring system.

[0704] Fiber optic temperature monitoring systems are available from Sensornet (London, United Kingdom), Sensa (Houston, Tex., U.S.A.), Luna Energy (Blacksburg, Va., U.S.A.), Lios Technology GMBH (Cologne, Germany), Oxford Electronics Ltd. (Hampshire, United Kingdom), and Sabeus Sensor Systems (Calabasas, Calif., U.S.A.). The fiber optic temperature monitoring system includes a data system and one or more fiber optic cables. The data system includes one or more lasers for sending light to the fiber optic cable; and one or more computers, software and peripherals for receiving, analyzing, and outputting data. The data system may be coupled to one or more fiber optic cables.

[0705] A single fiber optic cable may be several kilometers long. The fiber optic cable may be installed in many freeze wells and/or monitor wells. In some embodiments, two fiber optic cables may be installed in each freeze well and/or monitor well. The two fiber optic cables may be coupled. Using two fiber optic cables per well allows for compensation due to optical losses that occur in the wells and allows for better accuracy of measured temperature profiles.

[0706] The fiber optic temperature monitoring system may be used to detect the location of a breach or a potential breach in a frozen barrier. The search for potential breaches may be performed at scheduled intervals, for example, every two or three months. To determine the location of the breach or potential breach, flow of formation refrigerant to the freeze wells of interest is stopped. In some embodiments, the flow of formation refrigerant to all of the freeze wells is stopped. The rise in the temperature profiles, as well as the rate of change of the temperature profiles, provided by the fiber optic temperature monitoring system for each freeze well can be used to determine the location of any breaches or hot spots in the low temperature zone maintained by the freeze wells. The temperature profile monitored by the fiber optic temperature monitoring system for the two freeze wells closest to the hot spot or fluid flow will show the quickest and greatest rise in temperature. A temperature change of a few degrees Centigrade in the temperature profiles of the freeze wells closest to a troubled area may be sufficient to isolate the location of the trouble area. The shut down time of flow of circulation fluid in the freeze wells of interest needed to detect breaches, potential breaches, and hot spots may be on the order of a few hours or days, depending on the well spacing and the amount of fluid flow affecting the low temperature zone.

[0707] Fiber optic temperature monitoring systems may also be used to monitor temperatures in heated portions of the formation during in situ heat treatment processes. The fiber of a fiber optic cable used in the heated portion of the formation may be clad with a reflective material to facilitate retention of a signal or signals transmitted down the fiber. In some embodiments, the fiber is clad with gold, copper, nickel, aluminum and/or alloys thereof. The cladding may be formed of a material that is able to withstand chemical and temperature conditions in the heated portion of the formation. For example, gold cladding may allow an optical sensor to be used up to temperatures of 700° C. In some embodiments, the fiber is clad with aluminum. The fiber may be dipped in or run through a bath of liquid aluminum. The clad fiber may then be allowed to cool to secure the aluminum to the fiber. The gold or aluminum cladding may reduce hydrogen darkening of the optical fiber.

[0708] A potential source of heat loss from the heated formation is due to reflux in wells. Refluxing occurs when vapors condense in a well and flow into a portion of the well adjacent to the heated portion of the formation. Vapors may condense in the well adjacent to the overburden of the formation to form condensed fluid. Condensed fluid flowing into the well adjacent to the heated formation absorbs heat from the formation. Heat absorbed by condensed fluids cools the formation and necessitates additional energy input into the formation to maintain the formation at a desired temperature. Some fluids that condense in the overburden and flow into the portion of the well adjacent to the heated formation may react to produce undesired compounds and/or coke. Inhibiting fluids from refluxing may significantly improve the thermal efficiency of the in situ heat treatment system and/or the quality of the product produced from the in situ heat treatment system.

[0709] For some well embodiments, the portion of the well adjacent to the overburden section of the formation is cemented to the formation. In some well embodiments, the well includes packing material placed near the transition from the heated section of the formation to the overburden. The packing material inhibits formation fluid from passing from the heated section of the formation into the section of the wellbore adjacent to the overburden. Cables, conduits, devices, and/or instruments may pass through the packing material, but the packing material inhibits formation fluid from passing up the wellbore adjacent to the overburden section of the formation.

[0710] In some embodiments, one or more baffle systems may be placed in the wellbores to inhibit reflux. The baffle systems may be obstructions to fluid flow into the heated portion of the formation. In some embodiments, refluxing fluid may revaporize on the baffle system before coming into contact with the heated portion of the formation.

[0711] In some embodiments, a gas may be introduced into the formation through wellbores to inhibit reflux in the wellbores. In some embodiments, gas may be introduced into wellbores that include baffle systems to inhibit reflux of fluid in the wellbores. The gas may be carbon dioxide, methane, nitrogen or other desired gas. In some embodiments, the introduction of gas may be used in conjunction with one or more baffle systems in the wellbores. The introduced gas may enhance heat exchange at the baffle systems to help maintain top portions of the baffle systems colder than the lower portions of the baffle systems.

[0712] The flow of production fluid up the well to the surface is desired for some types of wells, especially for production wells. Flow of production fluid up the well is also desirable for some heater wells that are used to control pressure in the formation. The overburden, or a conduit in the well used to transport formation fluid from the heated portion of the formation to the surface, may be heated to inhibit condensation on or in the conduit. Providing heat in the overburden, however, may be costly and/or may lead to increased cracking or coking of formation fluid as the formation fluid is being produced from the formation.

[0713] To avoid the need to heat the overburden or to heat the conduit passing through the overburden, one or more diverters may be placed in the wellbore to inhibit fluid from refluxing into the wellbore adjacent to the heated portion of the formation. In some embodiments, the diverter retains fluid above the heated portion of the formation. Fluids retained in the diverter may be removed from the diverter using a pump, gas lifting, and/or other fluid removal technique. In certain embodiments, two or more diverters that retain fluid above the heated portion of the formation may be located in the production well. Two or more diverters provide a simple way of separating initial fractions of condensed fluid produced from the in situ heat treatment system. A pump may be placed in each of the diverters to remove condensed fluid from the diverters.

[0714] In some embodiments, the diverter directs fluid to a sump below the heated portion of the formation. An inlet for a lift system may be located in the sump. In some embodiments, the intake of the lift system is located in casing in the sump. In some embodiments, the intake of the lift system is located in an open wellbore. The sump is below the heated portion of the formation. The intake of the pump may be located 1 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m or more below the deepest heater used to heat the heated portion of the formation. The sump may be at a cooler temperature than the heated portion of the formation. The sump may be more than 10° C., more than 50° C., more than 75° C., or more than 100° C. below the temperature of the heated portion of the formation. A portion of the fluid entering the sump may be liquid. A portion of the fluid entering the sump may condense within the sump. The lift system moves the fluid in the sump to the surface.

[0715] Production well lift systems may be used to efficiently transport formation fluid from the bottom of the production wells to the surface. Production well lift systems may provide and maintain the maximum required well drawdown (minimum reservoir producing pressure) and producing rates. The production well lift systems may operate efficiently over a wide range of high temperature/multiphase fluids (gas/vapor/steam/water/hydrocarbon liquids) and production rates expected during the life of a typical project. Production well lift systems may include dual concentric rod pump lift systems, chamber lift systems and other types of lift systems.

[0716] Temperature limited heaters may be in configurations and/or may include materials that provide automatic temperature limiting properties for the heater at certain temperatures. In certain embodiments, ferromagnetic materials are used in temperature limited heaters. Ferromagnetic material may self-limit temperature at or near the Curie temperature of the material and/or the phase transformation temperature range to provide a reduced amount of heat when a time-varying current is applied to the material. In certain embodiments, the ferromagnetic material self-limits temperature of the temperature limited heater at a selected temperature that is approximately the Curie temperature and/or in the phase transformation temperature range. In certain embodiments, the selected temperature is within about 35° C., within about 25° C., within about 20° C., or within about 10° C. of the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. In certain embodiments, ferromagnetic materials are coupled with other materials (for example, highly conductive materials, high strength materials, corrosion resistant materials, or combinations thereof) to provide various electrical and/or mechanical properties. Some parts of the temperature limited heater may have a lower resistance (caused by different geometries and/or by using different ferromagnetic and/or non-ferromagnetic materials) than other parts of the temperature limited heater. Having parts of the temperature limited heater with various materials and/or dimensions allows for tailoring the desired heat output from each part of the heater.

[0717] Temperature limited heaters may be more reliable than other heaters. Temperature limited heaters may be less apt to break down or fail due to hot spots in the formation. In some embodiments, temperature limited heaters allow for substantially uniform heating of the formation. In some embodiments, temperature limited heaters are able to heat the formation more efficiently by operating at a higher average heat output along the entire length of the heater. The temperature limited heater operates at the higher average heat output along the entire length of the heater because power to the heater does not have to be reduced to the entire heater, as is the case with typical constant wattage heaters, if a temperature along any point of the heater exceeds, or is about to exceed, a maximum operating temperature of the heater. Heat output from portions of a temperature limited heater approaching a Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the heater automatically reduces without controlled adjustment of the time-varying current applied to the heater. The heat output automatically reduces due to changes in electrical properties (for example, electrical resistance) of portions of the temperature limited heater. Thus, more power is supplied by the temperature limited heater during a greater portion of a heating process.

[0718] In certain embodiments, the system including temperature limited heaters initially provides a first heat output and then provides a reduced (second heat output) heat output, near, at, or above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of an electrically resistive portion of the heater when the temperature limited heater is energized by a time-varying current. The first heat output is the heat output at temperatures below which the temperature limited heater begins to self-limit. In some embodiments, the first heat output is the heat output at a temperature about 50° C., about 75° C., about 100° C., or about 125° C. below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic material in the temperature limited heater.

[0719] The temperature limited heater may be energized by time-varying current (alternating current or modulated direct current) supplied at the wellhead. The wellhead may include a power source and other components (for example, modulation components, transformers, and/or capacitors) used in supplying power to the temperature limited heater. The temperature limited heater may be one of many heaters used to heat a portion of the formation.

[0720] In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater includes a conductor that operates as a skin effect or proximity effect heater when time-varying current is applied to the conductor. The skin effect limits the depth of current penetration into the interior of the conductor. For ferromagnetic materials, the skin effect is dominated by the magnetic permeability of the conductor. The relative magnetic permeability of ferromagnetic materials is typically between 10 and 1000 (for example, the relative magnetic permeability of ferromagnetic materials is typically at least 10 and may be at least 50, 100, 500, 1000 or greater). As the temperature of the ferromagnetic material is raised above the Curie temperature, or the phase transformation temperature range, and/or as the applied electrical current is increased, the magnetic permeability of the ferromagnetic material decreases substantially and the skin depth expands rapidly (for example, the skin depth expands as the inverse square root of the magnetic permeability). The reduction in magnetic permeability results in a decrease in the AC or modulated DC resistance of the conductor near, at, or above the Curie temperature, the phase transformation temperature range, and/or as the applied electrical current is increased. When the temperature limited heater is powered by a substantially constant current source, portions of the heater that approach, reach, or are above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range may have reduced heat dissipation. Sections of the temperature limited heater that are not at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range may be dominated by skin effect heating that allows the heater to have high heat dissipation due to a higher resistive load.

[0721] Curie temperature heaters have been used in soldering equipment, heaters for medical applications, and heating elements for ovens (for example, pizza ovens). Some of these uses are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,579,575 to Lamome et al.; 5,065,501 to Henschen et al.; and 5,512,732 to Yagnik et al., all of which are incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein. U.S. Pat. No. 4,849,611 to Whitney et al., which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes a plurality of discrete, spaced-apart heating units including a reactive component, a resistive heating component, and a temperature responsive component.

[0722] An advantage of using the temperature limited heater to heat hydrocarbons in the formation is that the conductor is chosen to have a Curie temperature and/or a phase transformation temperature range in a desired range of temperature operation. Operation within the desired operating temperature range allows substantial heat injection into the formation while maintaining the temperature of the temperature limited heater, and other equipment, below design limit temperatures. Design limit temperatures are temperatures at which properties such as corrosion, creep, and/or deformation are adversely affected. The temperature limiting properties of the temperature limited heater inhibit overheating or burnout of the heater adjacent to low thermal conductivity “hot spots” in the formation. In some embodiments, the temperature limited heater is able to lower or control heat output and/or withstand heat at temperatures above 25° C., 37° C., 100° C., 250° C., 500° C., 700° C., 800° C., 900° C., or higher up to 1131° C., depending on the materials used in the heater.

[0723] The temperature limited heater allows for more heat injection into the formation than constant wattage heaters because the energy input into the temperature limited heater does not have to be limited to accommodate low thermal conductivity regions adjacent to the heater. For example, in Green River oil shale there is a difference of at least a factor of 3 in the thermal conductivity of the lowest richness oil shale layers and the highest richness oil shale layers. When heating such a formation, substantially more heat is transferred to the formation with the temperature limited heater than with the conventional heater that is limited by the temperature at low thermal conductivity layers. The heat output along the entire length of the conventional heater needs to accommodate the low thermal conductivity layers so that the heater does not overheat at the low thermal conductivity layers and burn out. The heat output adjacent to the low thermal conductivity layers that are at high temperature will reduce for the temperature limited heater, but the remaining portions of the temperature limited heater that are not at high temperature will still provide high heat output. Because heaters for heating hydrocarbon formations typically have long lengths (for example, at least 10 m, 100 m, 300 m, 500 m, 1 km or more up to about 10 km), the majority of the length of the temperature limited heater may be operating below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range while only a few portions are at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the temperature limited heater.

[0724] The use of temperature limited heaters allows for efficient transfer of heat to the formation. Efficient transfer of heat allows for reduction in time needed to heat the formation to a desired temperature. For example, in Green River oil shale, pyrolysis typically requires 9.5 years to 10 years of heating when using a 12 m heater well spacing with conventional constant wattage heaters. For the same heater spacing, temperature limited heaters may allow a larger average heat output while maintaining heater equipment temperatures below equipment design limit temperatures. Pyrolysis in the formation may occur at an earlier time with the larger average heat output provided by temperature limited heaters than the lower average heat output provided by constant wattage heaters. For example, in Green River oil shale, pyrolysis may occur in 5 years using temperature limited heaters with a 12 m heater well spacing. Temperature limited heaters counteract hot spots due to inaccurate well spacing or drilling where heater wells come too close together. In certain embodiments, temperature limited heaters allow for increased power output over time for heater wells that have been spaced too far apart, or limit power output for heater wells that are spaced too close together. Temperature limited heaters also supply more power in regions adjacent the overburden and underburden to compensate for temperature losses in these regions.

[0725] Temperature limited heaters may be advantageously used in many types of formations. For example, in tar sands formations or relatively permeable formations containing heavy hydrocarbons, temperature limited heaters may be used to provide a controllable low temperature output for reducing the viscosity of fluids, mobilizing fluids, and/or enhancing the radial flow of fluids at or near the wellbore or in the formation. Temperature limited heaters may be used to inhibit excess coke formation due to overheating of the near wellbore region of the formation.

[0726] The use of temperature limited heaters, in some embodiments, eliminates or reduces the need for expensive temperature control circuitry. For example, the use of temperature limited heaters eliminates or reduces the need to perform temperature logging and/or the need to use fixed thermocouples on the heaters to monitor potential overheating at hot spots.

[0727] In certain embodiments, phase transformation (for example, crystalline phase transformation or a change in the crystal structure) of materials used in a temperature limited heater change the selected temperature at which the heater self-limits. Ferromagnetic material used in the temperature limited heater may have a phase transformation (for example, a transformation from ferrite to austenite) that decreases the magnetic permeability of the ferromagnetic material. This reduction in magnetic permeability is similar to reduction in magnetic permeability due to the magnetic transition of the ferromagnetic material at the Curie temperature. The Curie temperature is the magnetic transition temperature of the ferrite phase of the ferromagnetic material. The reduction in magnetic permeability results in a decrease in the AC or modulated DC resistance of the temperature limited heater near, at, or above the temperature of the phase transformation and/or the Curie temperature of the ferromagnetic material.

[0728] The phase transformation of the ferromagnetic material may occur over a temperature range. The temperature range of the phase transformation depends on the ferromagnetic material and may vary, for example, over a range of about 5° C. to a range of about 200° C. Because the phase transformation takes place over a temperature range, the reduction in the magnetic permeability due to the phase transformation takes place over the temperature range. The reduction in magnetic permeability may also occur hysteretically over the temperature range of the phase transformation. In some embodiments, the phase transformation back to the lower temperature phase of the ferromagnetic material is slower than the phase transformation to the higher temperature phase (for example, the transition from austenite back to ferrite is slower than the transition from ferrite to austenite). The slower phase transformation back to the lower temperature phase may cause hysteretic operation of the heater at or near the phase transformation temperature range that allows the heater to slowly increase to higher resistance after the resistance of the heater reduces due to high temperature.

[0729] In some embodiments, the phase transformation temperature range overlaps with the reduction in the magnetic permeability when the temperature approaches the Curie temperature of the ferromagnetic material. The overlap may produce a faster drop in electrical resistance versus temperature than if the reduction in magnetic permeability is solely due to the temperature approaching the Curie temperature. The overlap may also produce hysteretic behavior of the temperature limited heater near the Curie temperature and/or in the phase transformation temperature range.

[0730] In certain embodiments, the hysteretic operation due to the phase transformation is a smoother transition than the reduction in magnetic permeability due to magnetic transition at the Curie temperature. The smoother transition may be easier to control (for example, electrical control using a process control device that interacts with the power supply) than the sharper transition at the Curie temperature. In some embodiments, the Curie temperature is located inside the phase transformation range for selected metallurgies used in temperature limited heaters. This phenomenon provides temperature limited heaters with the smooth transition properties of the phase transformation in addition to a sharp and definite transition due to the reduction in magnetic properties at the Curie temperature. Such temperature limited heaters may be easy to control (due to the phase transformation) while providing finite temperature limits (due to the sharp Curie temperature transition). Using the phase transformation temperature range instead of and/or in addition to the Curie temperature in temperature limited heaters increases the number and range of metallurgies that may be used for temperature limited heaters.

[0731] In certain embodiments, alloy additions are made to the ferromagnetic material to adjust the temperature range of the phase transformation. For example, adding carbon to the ferromagnetic material may increase the phase transformation temperature range and lower the onset temperature of the phase transformation. Adding titanium to the ferromagnetic material may increase the onset temperature of the phase transformation and decrease the phase transformation temperature range. Alloy compositions may be adjusted to provide desired Curie temperature and phase transformation properties for the ferromagnetic material. The alloy composition of the ferromagnetic material may be chosen based on desired properties for the ferromagnetic material (such as, but not limited to, magnetic permeability transition temperature or temperature range, resistance versus temperature profile, or power output). Addition of titanium may allow higher Curie temperatures to be obtained when adding cobalt to 410 stainless steel by raising the ferrite to austenite phase transformation temperature range to a temperature range that is above, or well above, the Curie temperature of the ferromagnetic material.

[0732] In some embodiments, temperature limited heaters are more economical to manufacture or make than standard heaters. Typical ferromagnetic materials include iron, carbon steel, or ferritic stainless steel. Such materials are inexpensive as compared to nickel-based heating alloys (such as nichrome, Kanthal™ (Bulten-Kanthal AB, Sweden), and/or LOHM™ (Driver-Harris Company, Harrison, N.J., U.S.A.)) typically used in insulated conductor (mineral insulated cable) heaters. In one embodiment of the temperature limited heater, the temperature limited heater is manufactured in continuous lengths as an insulated conductor heater to lower costs and improve reliability.

[0733] In some embodiments, the temperature limited heater is placed in the heater well using a coiled tubing rig. A heater that can be coiled on a spool may be manufactured by using metal such as ferritic stainless steel (for example, 409 stainless steel) that is welded using electrical resistance welding (ERW). U.S. Pat. No. 7,032,809 to Hopkins, which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes forming seam-welded pipe. To form a heater section, a metal strip from a roll is passed through a former where it is shaped into a tubular and then longitudinally welded using ERW.

[0734] In some embodiments, a composite tubular may be formed from the seam-welded tubular. The seam-welded tubular is passed through a second former where a conductive strip (for example, a copper strip) is applied, drawn down tightly on the tubular through a die, and longitudinally welded using ERW. A sheath may be formed by longitudinally welding a support material (for example, steel such as 347H or 347HH) over the conductive strip material. The support material may be a strip rolled over the conductive strip material. An overburden section of the heater may be formed in a similar manner.

[0735] In certain embodiments, the overburden section uses a non-ferromagnetic material such as 304 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel instead of a ferromagnetic material. The heater section and overburden section may be coupled using standard techniques such as butt welding using an orbital welder. In some embodiments, the overburden section material (the non-ferromagnetic material) may be pre-welded to the ferromagnetic material before rolling. The pre-welding may eliminate the need for a separate coupling step (for example, butt welding). In an embodiment, a flexible cable (for example, a furnace cable such as a MGT 1000 furnace cable) may be pulled through the center after forming the tubular heater. An end bushing on the flexible cable may be welded to the tubular heater to provide an electrical current return path. The tubular heater, including the flexible cable, may be coiled onto a spool before installation into a heater well. In an embodiment, the temperature limited heater is installed using the coiled tubing rig. The coiled tubing rig may place the temperature limited heater in a deformation resistant container in the formation. The deformation resistant container may be placed in the heater well using conventional methods.

[0736] Temperature limited heaters may be used for heating hydrocarbon formations including, but not limited to, oil shale formations, coal formations, tar sands formations, and formations with heavy viscous oils. Temperature limited heaters may also be used in the field of environmental remediation to vaporize or destroy soil contaminants. Embodiments of temperature limited heaters may be used to heat fluids in a wellbore or sub-sea pipeline to inhibit deposition of paraffin or various hydrates. In some embodiments, a temperature limited heater is used for solution mining a subsurface formation (for example, an oil shale or a coal formation). In certain embodiments, a fluid (for example, molten salt) is placed in a wellbore and heated with a temperature limited heater to inhibit deformation and/or collapse of the wellbore. In some embodiments, the temperature limited heater is attached to a sucker rod in the wellbore or is part of the sucker rod itself. In some embodiments, temperature limited heaters are used to heat a near wellbore region to reduce near wellbore oil viscosity during production of high viscosity crude oils and during transport of high viscosity oils to the surface. In some embodiments, a temperature limited heater enables gas lifting of a viscous oil by lowering the viscosity of the oil without coking the oil. Temperature limited heaters may be used in sulfur transfer lines to maintain temperatures between about 110° C. and about 130° C.

[0737] The ferromagnetic alloy or ferromagnetic alloys used in the temperature limited heater determine the Curie temperature of the heater. Curie temperature data for various metals is listed in “American Institute of Physics Handbook,” Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, pages 5-170 through 5-176. Ferromagnetic conductors may include one or more of the ferromagnetic elements (iron, cobalt, and nickel) and/or alloys of these elements. In some embodiments, ferromagnetic conductors include iron-chromium (Fe—Cr) alloys that contain tungsten (W) (for example, HCM12A and SAVE12 (Sumitomo Metals Co., Japan) and/or iron alloys that contain chromium (for example, Fe—Cr alloys, Fe—Cr—W alloys, Fe—Cr—V (vanadium) alloys, and Fe—Cr—Nb (Niobium) alloys). Of the three main ferromagnetic elements, iron has a Curie temperature of approximately 770° C.; cobalt (Co) has a Curie temperature of approximately 1131° C.; and nickel has a Curie temperature of approximately 358° C. An iron-cobalt alloy has a Curie temperature higher than the Curie temperature of iron. For example, iron-cobalt alloy with 2% by weight cobalt has a Curie temperature of approximately 800° C.; iron-cobalt alloy with 12% by weight cobalt has a Curie temperature of approximately 900° C.; and iron-cobalt alloy with 20% by weight cobalt has a Curie temperature of approximately 950° C. Iron-nickel alloy has a Curie temperature lower than the Curie temperature of iron. For example, iron-nickel alloy with 20% by weight nickel has a Curie temperature of approximately 720° C., and iron-nickel alloy with 60% by weight nickel has a Curie temperature of approximately 560° C.

[0738] Some non-ferromagnetic elements used as alloys raise the Curie temperature of iron. For example, an iron-vanadium alloy with 5.9% by weight vanadium has a Curie temperature of approximately 815° C. Other non-ferromagnetic elements (for example, carbon, aluminum, copper, silicon, and/or chromium) may be alloyed with iron or other ferromagnetic materials to lower the Curie temperature. Non-ferromagnetic materials that raise the Curie temperature may be combined with non-ferromagnetic materials that lower the Curie temperature and alloyed with iron or other ferromagnetic materials to produce a material with a desired Curie temperature and other desired physical and/or chemical properties. In some embodiments, the Curie temperature material is a ferrite such as NiFe₂O₄. In other embodiments, the Curie temperature material is a binary compound such as FeNi₃ or Fe₃Al.

[0739] In some embodiments, the improved alloy includes carbon, cobalt, iron, manganese, silicon, or mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 0.1% to about 10% cobalt; about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% manganese, about 0.5% silicon, with the balance being iron. In certain embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 0.1% to about 10% cobalt; about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% manganese, about 0.5% silicon, with the balance being iron.

[0740] In some embodiments, the improved alloy includes chromium, carbon, cobalt, iron, manganese, silicon, titanium, vanadium, or mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 5% to about 20% cobalt, about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% manganese, about 0.5% silicon, about 0.1% to about 2% vanadium with the balance being iron. In some embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 12% chromium, about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% silicon, about 0.1% to about 0.5% manganese, above 0% to about 15% cobalt, above 0% to about 2% vanadium, above 0% to about 1% titanium, with the balance being iron. In some embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 12% chromium, about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% silicon, about 0.1% to about 0.5% manganese, above 0% to about 2% vanadium, above 0% to about 1% titanium, with the balance being iron. In some embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 12% chromium, about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% silicon, about 0.1% to about 0.5% manganese, above 0% to about 2% vanadium, with the balance being iron. In certain embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 12% chromium, about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% silicon, about 0.1% to about 0.5% manganese, above 0% to about 15% cobalt, above 0% to about 1% titanium, with the balance being iron. In certain embodiments, the improved alloy includes, by weight: about 12% chromium, about 0.1% carbon, about 0.5% silicon, about 0.1% to about 0.5% manganese, above 0% to about 15% cobalt, with the balance being iron. The addition of vanadium may allow for use of higher amounts of cobalt in the improved alloy.

[0741] Certain embodiments of temperature limited heaters may include more than one ferromagnetic material. Such embodiments are within the scope of embodiments described herein if any conditions described herein apply to at least one of the ferromagnetic materials in the temperature limited heater.

[0742] Ferromagnetic properties generally decay as the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range is approached. The “Handbook of Electrical Heating for Industry” by C. James Erickson (IEEE Press, 1995) shows a typical curve for 1% carbon steel (steel with 1% carbon by weight). The loss of magnetic permeability starts at temperatures above 650° C. and tends to be complete when temperatures exceed 730° C. Thus, the self-limiting temperature may be somewhat below the actual Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. The skin depth for current flow in 1% carbon steel is 0.132 cm at room temperature and increases to 0.445 cm at 720° C. From 720° C. to 730° C., the skin depth sharply increases to over 2.5 cm. Thus, a temperature limited heater embodiment using 1% carbon steel begins to self-limit between 650° C. and 730° C.

[0743] Skin depth generally defines an effective penetration depth of time-varying current into the conductive material. In general, current density decreases exponentially with distance from an outer surface to the center along the radius of the conductor. The depth at which the current density is approximately 1/e of the surface current density is called the skin depth. For a solid cylindrical rod with a diameter much greater than the penetration depth, or for hollow cylinders with a wall thickness exceeding the penetration depth, the skin depth, δ, is:
δ=1981.5*(ρ/(μ*f))^1/2  (EQN. 2)
in which:

• • [0744] δ=skin depth in inches;
  • [0745] ρ=resistivity at operating temperature (ohm-cm);
  • [0746] μ=relative magnetic permeability; and
  • [0747] f=frequency (Hz).
    EQN. 2 is obtained from “Handbook of Electrical Heating for Industry” by C. James Erickson (IEEE Press, 1995). For most metals, resistivity (ρ) increases with temperature. The relative magnetic permeability generally varies with temperature and with current. Additional equations may be used to assess the variance of magnetic permeability and/or skin depth on both temperature and/or current. The dependence of μ on current arises from the dependence of μ on the electromagnetic field.

[0748] Materials used in the temperature limited heater may be selected to provide a desired turndown ratio. Turndown ratios of at least 1.1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 10:1, 30:1, or 50:1 may be selected for temperature limited heaters. Larger turndown ratios may also be used. A selected turndown ratio may depend on a number of factors including, but not limited to, the type of formation in which the temperature limited heater is located (for example, a higher turndown ratio may be used for an oil shale formation with large variations in thermal conductivity between rich and lean oil shale layers) and/or a temperature limit of materials used in the wellbore (for example, temperature limits of heater materials). In some embodiments, the turndown ratio is increased by coupling additional copper or another good electrical conductor to the ferromagnetic material (for example, adding copper to lower the resistance above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range).

[0749] The temperature limited heater may provide a maximum heat output (power output) below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the heater. In certain embodiments, the maximum heat output is at least 400 W/m (Watts per meter), 600 W/m, 700 W/m, 800 W/m, or higher up to 2000 W/m. The temperature limited heater reduces the amount of heat output by a section of the heater when the temperature of the section of the heater approaches or is above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. The reduced amount of heat may be substantially less than the heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. In some embodiments, the reduced amount of heat is at most 400 W/m, 200 W/m, 100 W/m or may approach 0 W/m.

[0750] In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater operates substantially independently of the thermal load on the heater in a certain operating temperature range. “Thermal load” is the rate that heat is transferred from a heating system to its surroundings. It is to be understood that the thermal load may vary with temperature of the surroundings and/or the thermal conductivity of the surroundings. In an embodiment, the temperature limited heater operates at or above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the temperature limited heater such that the operating temperature of the heater increases at most by 3° C., 2° C., 1.5° C., 1° C., or 0.5° C. for a decrease in thermal load of 1 W/m proximate to a portion of the heater. In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater operates in such a manner at a relatively constant current.

[0751] The AC or modulated DC resistance and/or the heat output of the temperature limited heater may decrease as the temperature approaches the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range and decrease sharply near or above the Curie temperature due to the Curie effect and/or phase transformation effect. In certain embodiments, the value of the electrical resistance or heat output above or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range is at most one-half of the value of electrical resistance or heat output at a certain point below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. In some embodiments, the heat output above or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range is at most 90%, 70%, 50%, 30%, 20%, 10%, or less (down to 1%) of the heat output at a certain point below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range (for example, 30° C. below the Curie temperature, 40° C. below the Curie temperature, 50° C. below the Curie temperature, or 100° C. below the Curie temperature). In certain embodiments, the electrical resistance above or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range decreases to 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, or less (down to 1%) of the electrical resistance at a certain point below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range (for example, 30° C. below the Curie temperature, 40° C. below the Curie temperature, 50° C. below the Curie temperature, or 100° C. below the Curie temperature).

[0752] In some embodiments, AC frequency is adjusted to change the skin depth of the ferromagnetic material. For example, the skin depth of 1% carbon steel at room temperature is 0.132 cm at 60 Hz, 0.0762 cm at 180 Hz, and 0.046 cm at 440 Hz. Since heater diameter is typically larger than twice the skin depth, using a higher frequency (and thus a heater with a smaller diameter) reduces heater costs. For a fixed geometry, the higher frequency results in a higher turndown ratio. The turndown ratio at a higher frequency is calculated by multiplying the turndown ratio at a lower frequency by the square root of the higher frequency divided by the lower frequency. In some embodiments, a frequency between 100 Hz and 1000 Hz, between 140 Hz and 200 Hz, or between 400 Hz and 600 Hz is used (for example, 180 Hz, 540 Hz, or 720 Hz). In some embodiments, high frequencies may be used. The frequencies may be greater than 1000 Hz.

[0753] To maintain a substantially constant skin depth until the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the temperature limited heater is reached, the heater may be operated at a lower frequency when the heater is cold and operated at a higher frequency when the heater is hot. Line frequency heating is generally favorable, however, because there is less need for expensive components such as power supplies, transformers, or current modulators that alter frequency. Line frequency is the frequency of a general supply of current. Line frequency is typically 60 Hz, but may be 50 Hz or another frequency depending on the source for the supply of the current. Higher frequencies may be produced using commercially available equipment such as solid state variable frequency power supplies. Transformers that convert three-phase power to single-phase power with three times the frequency are commercially available. For example, high voltage three-phase power at 60 Hz may be transformed to single-phase power at 180 Hz and at a lower voltage. Such transformers are less expensive and more energy efficient than solid state variable frequency power supplies. In certain embodiments, transformers that convert three-phase power to single-phase power are used to increase the frequency of power supplied to the temperature limited heater.

[0754] In certain embodiments, modulated DC (for example, chopped DC, waveform modulated DC, or cycled DC) may be used for providing electrical power to the temperature limited heater. A DC modulator or DC chopper may be coupled to a DC power supply to provide an output of modulated direct current. In some embodiments, the DC power supply may include means for modulating DC. One example of a DC modulator is a DC-to-DC converter system. DC-to-DC converter systems are generally known in the art. DC is typically modulated or chopped into a desired waveform. Waveforms for DC modulation include, but are not limited to, square-wave, sinusoidal, deformed sinusoidal, deformed square-wave, triangular, and other regular or irregular waveforms.

[0755] The modulated DC waveform generally defines the frequency of the modulated DC. Thus, the modulated DC waveform may be selected to provide a desired modulated DC frequency. The shape and/or the rate of modulation (such as the rate of chopping) of the modulated DC waveform may be varied to vary the modulated DC frequency. DC may be modulated at frequencies that are higher than generally available AC frequencies. For example, modulated DC may be provided at frequencies of at least 1000 Hz. Increasing the frequency of supplied current to higher values advantageously increases the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater.

[0756] In certain embodiments, the modulated DC waveform is adjusted or altered to vary the modulated DC frequency. The DC modulator may be able to adjust or alter the modulated DC waveform at any time during use of the temperature limited heater and at high currents or voltages. Thus, modulated DC provided to the temperature limited heater is not limited to a single frequency or even a small set of frequency values. Waveform selection using the DC modulator typically allows for a wide range of modulated DC frequencies and for discrete control of the modulated DC frequency. Thus, the modulated DC frequency is more easily set at a distinct value whereas AC frequency is generally limited to multiples of the line frequency. Discrete control of the modulated DC frequency allows for more selective control over the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater. Being able to selectively control the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater allows for a broader range of materials to be used in designing and constructing the temperature limited heater.

[0757] In some embodiments, the modulated DC frequency or the AC frequency is adjusted to compensate for changes in properties (for example, subsurface conditions such as temperature or pressure) of the temperature limited heater during use. The modulated DC frequency or the AC frequency provided to the temperature limited heater is varied based on assessed downhole conditions. For example, as the temperature of the temperature limited heater in the wellbore increases, it may be advantageous to increase the frequency of the current provided to the heater, thus increasing the turndown ratio of the heater. In an embodiment, the downhole temperature of the temperature limited heater in the wellbore is assessed.

[0758] In certain embodiments, the modulated DC frequency, or the AC frequency, is varied to adjust the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater. The turndown ratio may be adjusted to compensate for hot spots occurring along a length of the temperature limited heater. For example, the turndown ratio is increased because the temperature limited heater is getting too hot in certain locations. In some embodiments, the modulated DC frequency, or the AC frequency, are varied to adjust a turndown ratio without assessing a subsurface condition.

[0759] At or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic material, a relatively small change in voltage may cause a relatively large change in current to the load. The relatively small change in voltage may produce problems in the power supplied to the temperature limited heater, especially at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. The problems include, but are not limited to, reducing the power factor, tripping a circuit breaker, and/or blowing a fuse. In some cases, voltage changes may be caused by a change in the load of the temperature limited heater. In certain embodiments, an electrical current supply (for example, a supply of modulated DC or AC) provides a relatively constant amount of current that does not substantially vary with changes in load of the temperature limited heater. In an embodiment, the electrical current supply provides an amount of electrical current that remains within 15%, within 10%, within 5%, or within 2% of a selected constant current value when a load of the temperature limited heater changes.

[0760] Temperature limited heaters may generate an inductive load. The inductive load is due to some applied electrical current being used by the ferromagnetic material to generate a magnetic field in addition to generating a resistive heat output. As downhole temperature changes in the temperature limited heater, the inductive load of the heater changes due to changes in the ferromagnetic properties of ferromagnetic materials in the heater with temperature. The inductive load of the temperature limited heater may cause a phase shift between the current and the voltage applied to the heater.

[0761] A reduction in actual power applied to the temperature limited heater may be caused by a time lag in the current waveform (for example, the current has a phase shift relative to the voltage due to an inductive load) and/or by distortions in the current waveform (for example, distortions in the current waveform caused by introduced harmonics due to a non-linear load). Thus, it may take more current to apply a selected amount of power due to phase shifting or waveform distortion. The ratio of actual power applied and the apparent power that would have been transmitted if the same current were in phase and undistorted is the power factor. The power factor is always less than or equal to 1. The power factor is 1 when there is no phase shift or distortion in the waveform.

[0762] Actual power applied to a heater due to a phase shift may be described by EQN. 3:
P=I×V×cos(θ);  (EQN. 3)
in which P is the actual power applied to a heater; I is the applied current; V is the applied voltage; and θ is the phase angle difference between voltage and current. Other phenomena such as waveform distortion may contribute to further lowering of the power factor. If there is no distortion in the waveform, then cos(θ) is equal to the power factor.

[0763] In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater includes an inner conductor inside an outer conductor. The inner conductor and the outer conductor are radially disposed about a central axis. The inner and outer conductors may be separated by an insulation layer. In certain embodiments, the inner and outer conductors are coupled at the bottom of the temperature limited heater. Electrical current may flow into the temperature limited heater through the inner conductor and return through the outer conductor. One or both conductors may include ferromagnetic material.

[0764] The insulation layer may comprise an electrically insulating ceramic with high thermal conductivity, such as magnesium oxide, aluminum oxide, silicon dioxide, beryllium oxide, boron nitride, silicon nitride, or combinations thereof. The insulating layer may be a compacted powder (for example, compacted ceramic powder). Compaction may improve thermal conductivity and provide better insulation resistance. For lower temperature applications, polymer insulation made from, for example, fluoropolymers, polyimides, polyamides, and/or polyethylenes, may be used. In some embodiments, the polymer insulation is made of perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) or polyetheretherketone (PEEK™ (Victrex Ltd, England)). The insulating layer may be chosen to be substantially infrared transparent to aid heat transfer from the inner conductor to the outer conductor. In an embodiment, the insulating layer is transparent quartz sand. The insulation layer may be air or a non-reactive gas such as helium, nitrogen, or sulfur hexafluoride. If the insulation layer is air or a non-reactive gas, there may be insulating spacers designed to inhibit electrical contact between the inner conductor and the outer conductor. The insulating spacers may be made of, for example, high purity aluminum oxide or another thermally conducting, electrically insulating material such as silicon nitride. The insulating spacers may be a fibrous ceramic material such as Nextel™ 312 (3M Corporation, St. Paul, Minn., U.S.A.), mica tape, or glass fiber. Ceramic material may be made of alumina, alumina-silicate, alumina-borosilicate, silicon nitride, boron nitride, or other materials.

[0765] The insulation layer may be flexible and/or substantially deformation tolerant. For example, if the insulation layer is a solid or compacted material that substantially fills the space between the inner and outer conductors, the temperature limited heater may be flexible and/or substantially deformation tolerant. Forces on the outer conductor can be transmitted through the insulation layer to the solid inner conductor, which may resist crushing. Such a temperature limited heater may be bent, dog-legged, and spiraled without causing the outer conductor and the inner conductor to electrically short to each other. Deformation tolerance may be important if the wellbore is likely to undergo substantial deformation during heating of the formation.

[0766] In certain embodiments, an outermost layer of the temperature limited heater (for example, the outer conductor) is chosen for corrosion resistance, yield strength, and/or creep resistance. In one embodiment, austenitic (non-ferromagnetic) stainless steels such as 201, 304H, 347H, 347HH, 316H, 310H, 347HP, NF709 (Nippon Steel Corp., Japan) stainless steels, or combinations thereof may be used in the outer conductor. The outermost layer may also include a clad conductor. For example, a corrosion resistant alloy such as 800H or 347H stainless steel may be clad for corrosion protection over a ferromagnetic carbon steel tubular. If high temperature strength is not required, the outermost layer may be constructed from ferromagnetic metal with good corrosion resistance such as one of the ferritic stainless steels. In one embodiment, a ferritic alloy of 82.3% by weight iron with 17.7% by weight chromium (Curie temperature of 678° C.) provides desired corrosion resistance.

[0767] The Metals Handbook, vol. 8, page 291 (American Society of Materials (ASM)) includes a graph of Curie temperature of iron-chromium alloys versus the amount of chromium in the alloys. In some temperature limited heater embodiments, a separate support rod or tubular (made from 347H stainless steel) is coupled to the temperature limited heater made from an iron-chromium alloy to provide yield strength and/or creep resistance. In certain embodiments, the support material and/or the ferromagnetic material is selected to provide a 100,000 hour creep-rupture strength of at least 20.7 MPa at 650° C. In some embodiments, the 100,000 hour creep-rupture strength is at least 13.8 MPa at 650° C. or at least 6.9 MPa at 650° C. For example, 347H steel has a favorable creep-rupture strength at or above 650° C. In some embodiments, the 100,000 hour creep-rupture strength ranges from 6.9 MPa to 41.3 MPa or more for longer heaters and/or higher earth or fluid stresses.

[0768] In temperature limited heater embodiments with both an inner ferromagnetic conductor and an outer ferromagnetic conductor, the skin effect current path occurs on the outside of the inner conductor and on the inside of the outer conductor. Thus, the outside of the outer conductor may be clad with the corrosion resistant alloy, such as stainless steel, without affecting the skin effect current path on the inside of the outer conductor.

[0769] A ferromagnetic conductor with a thickness of at least the skin depth at the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range allows a substantial decrease in resistance of the ferromagnetic material as the skin depth increases sharply near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. In certain embodiments when the ferromagnetic conductor is not clad with a highly conducting material such as copper, the thickness of the conductor may be 1.5 times the skin depth near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, 3 times the skin depth near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, or even 10 or more times the skin depth near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. If the ferromagnetic conductor is clad with copper, thickness of the ferromagnetic conductor may be substantially the same as the skin depth near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. In some embodiments, the ferromagnetic conductor clad with copper has a thickness of at least three-fourths of the skin depth near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range.

[0770] In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater includes a composite conductor with a ferromagnetic tubular and a non-ferromagnetic, high electrical conductivity core. The non-ferromagnetic, high electrical conductivity core reduces a required diameter of the conductor. For example, the conductor may be composite 1.19 cm diameter conductor with a core of 0.575 cm diameter copper clad with a 0.298 cm thickness of ferritic stainless steel or carbon steel surrounding the core. The core or non-ferromagnetic conductor may be copper or copper alloy. The core or non-ferromagnetic conductor may also be made of other metals that exhibit low electrical resistivity and relative magnetic permeabilities near 1 (for example, substantially non-ferromagnetic materials such as aluminum and aluminum alloys, phosphor bronze, beryllium copper, and/or brass). A composite conductor allows the electrical resistance of the temperature limited heater to decrease more steeply near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. As the skin depth increases near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range to include the copper core, the electrical resistance decreases very sharply.

[0771] The composite conductor may increase the conductivity of the temperature limited heater and/or allow the heater to operate at lower voltages. In an embodiment, the composite conductor exhibits a relatively flat resistance versus temperature profile at temperatures below a region near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor of the composite conductor. In some embodiments, the temperature limited heater exhibits a relatively flat resistance versus temperature profile between 100° C. and 750° C. or between 300° C. and 600° C. The relatively flat resistance versus temperature profile may also be exhibited in other temperature ranges by adjusting, for example, materials and/or the configuration of materials in the temperature limited heater. In certain embodiments, the relative thickness of each material in the composite conductor is selected to produce a desired resistivity versus temperature profile for the temperature limited heater.

[0772] In certain embodiments, the relative thickness of each material in a composite conductor is selected to produce a desired resistivity versus temperature profile for a temperature limited heater. In an embodiment, the composite conductor is an inner conductor surrounded by 0.127 cm thick magnesium oxide powder as an insulator. The outer conductor may be 304H stainless steel with a wall thickness of 0.127 cm. The outside diameter of the heater may be about 1.65 cm.

[0773] A composite conductor (for example, a composite inner conductor or a composite outer conductor) may be manufactured by methods including, but not limited to, coextrusion, roll forming, tight fit tubing (for example, cooling the inner member and heating the outer member, then inserting the inner member in the outer member, followed by a drawing operation and/or allowing the system to cool), explosive or electromagnetic cladding, arc overlay welding, longitudinal strip welding, plasma powder welding, billet coextrusion, electroplating, drawing, sputtering, plasma deposition, coextrusion casting, magnetic forming, molten cylinder casting (of inner core material inside the outer or vice versa), insertion followed by welding or high temperature braising, shielded active gas welding (SAG), and/or insertion of an inner pipe in an outer pipe followed by mechanical expansion of the inner pipe by hydroforming or use of a pig to expand and swage the inner pipe against the outer pipe. In some embodiments, a ferromagnetic conductor is braided over a non-ferromagnetic conductor. In certain embodiments, composite conductors are formed using methods similar to those used for cladding (for example, cladding copper to steel). A metallurgical bond between copper cladding and base ferromagnetic material may be advantageous. Composite conductors produced by a coextrusion process that forms a good metallurgical bond (for example, a good bond between copper and 446 stainless steel) may be provided by Anomet Products, Inc. (Shrewsbury, Mass., U.S.A.).

[0774] FIGS. 39-60 depict various embodiments of temperature limited heaters. One or more features of an embodiment of the temperature limited heater depicted in any of these figures may be combined with one or more features of other embodiments of temperature limited heaters depicted in these figures. In certain embodiments described herein, temperature limited heaters are dimensioned to operate at a frequency of 60 Hz AC. It is to be understood that dimensions of the temperature limited heater may be adjusted from those described herein to operate in a similar manner at other AC frequencies or with modulated DC current.

[0775] The temperature limited heaters may be used in conductor-in-conduit heaters. In some embodiments of conductor-in-conduit heaters, the majority of the resistive heat is generated in the conductor, and the heat radiatively, conductively and/or convectively transfers to the conduit. In some embodiments of conductor-in-conduit heaters, the majority of the resistive heat is generated in the conduit.

[0776] FIG. 39 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the temperature limited heater with an outer conductor having a ferromagnetic section and a non-ferromagnetic section. FIGS. 40 and 41 depict transverse cross-sectional views of the embodiment shown in FIG. 39. In one embodiment, ferromagnetic section 528 is used to provide heat to hydrocarbon layers in the formation. Non-ferromagnetic section 530 is used in the overburden of the formation. Non-ferromagnetic section 530 provides little or no heat to the overburden, thus inhibiting heat losses in the overburden and improving heater efficiency. Ferromagnetic section 528 includes a ferromagnetic material such as 409 stainless steel or 410 stainless steel. Ferromagnetic section 528 has a thickness of 0.3 cm. Non-ferromagnetic section 530 is copper with a thickness of 0.3 cm. Inner conductor 532 is copper. Inner conductor 532 has a diameter of 0.9 cm. Electrical insulator 534 is silicon nitride, boron nitride, magnesium oxide powder, or another suitable insulator material. Electrical insulator 534 has a thickness of 0.1 cm to 0.3 cm.

[0777] FIG. 42 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of a temperature limited heater with an outer conductor having a ferromagnetic section and a non-ferromagnetic section placed inside a sheath. FIGS. 43, 44, and 45 depict transverse cross-sectional views of the embodiment shown in FIG. 42. Ferromagnetic section 528 is 410 stainless steel with a thickness of 0.6 cm. Non-ferromagnetic section 530 is copper with a thickness of 0.6 cm. Inner conductor 532 is copper with a diameter of 0.9 cm. Outer conductor 536 includes ferromagnetic material. Outer conductor 536 provides some heat in the overburden section of the heater. Providing some heat in the overburden inhibits condensation or refluxing of fluids in the overburden. Outer conductor 536 is 409, 410, or 446 stainless steel with an outer diameter of 3.0 cm and a thickness of 0.6 cm. Electrical insulator 534 includes compacted magnesium oxide powder with a thickness of 0.3 cm. In some embodiments, electrical insulator 534 includes silicon nitride, boron nitride, or hexagonal type boron nitride. Conductive section 538 may couple inner conductor 532 with ferromagnetic section 528 and/or outer conductor 536.

[0778] FIG. 46A and FIG. 46B depict cross-sectional representations of an embodiment of a temperature limited heater with a ferromagnetic inner conductor. Inner conductor 532 is a 1″ Schedule XXS 446 stainless steel pipe. In some embodiments, inner conductor 532 includes 409 stainless steel, 410 stainless steel, Invar 36, alloy 42-6, alloy 52, or other ferromagnetic materials. Inner conductor 532 has a diameter of 2.5 cm. Electrical insulator 534 includes compacted silicon nitride, boron nitride, or magnesium oxide powders; or polymers, Nextel ceramic fiber, mica, or glass fibers. Outer conductor 536 is copper or any other non-ferromagnetic material, such as but not limited to copper alloys, aluminum and/or aluminum alloys. Outer conductor 536 is coupled to jacket 540. Jacket 540 is 304H, 316H, or 347H stainless steel. In this embodiment, a majority of the heat is produced in inner conductor 532.

[0779] FIG. 47A and FIG. 47B depict cross-sectional representations of an embodiment of a temperature limited heater with a ferromagnetic inner conductor and a non-ferromagnetic core. Inner conductor 532 may be made of 446 stainless steel, 409 stainless steel, 410 stainless steel, carbon steel, Armco ingot iron, iron-cobalt alloys, or other ferromagnetic materials. Core 542 may be tightly bonded inside inner conductor 532. Core 542 is copper or other non-ferromagnetic material. In certain embodiments, core 542 is inserted as a tight fit inside inner conductor 532 before a drawing operation. In some embodiments, core 542 and inner conductor 532 are coextrusion bonded. Outer conductor 536 is 347H stainless steel. A drawing or rolling operation to compact electrical insulator 534 (for example, compacted silicon nitride, boron nitride, or magnesium oxide powder) may ensure good electrical contact between inner conductor 532 and core 542. In this embodiment, heat is produced primarily in inner conductor 532 until the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range is approached. Resistance then decreases sharply as current penetrates core 542.

[0780] FIG. 48A and FIG. 48B depict cross-sectional representations of an embodiment of a temperature limited heater with a ferromagnetic outer conductor. Inner conductor 532 is nickel-clad copper. Electrical insulator 534 is silicon nitride, boron nitride, or magnesium oxide. Outer conductor 536 is a 1″ Schedule XXS carbon steel pipe. In this embodiment, heat is produced primarily in outer conductor 536, resulting in a small temperature differential across electrical insulator 534.

[0781] FIG. 49A and FIG. 49B depict cross-sectional representations of an embodiment of a temperature limited heater with a ferromagnetic outer conductor that is clad with a corrosion resistant alloy. Inner conductor 532 is copper. Outer conductor 536 is a 1″ Schedule XXS carbon steel pipe. Outer conductor 536 is coupled to jacket 540. Jacket 540 is made of corrosion resistant material (for example, 347H stainless steel). Jacket 540 provides protection from corrosive fluids in the wellbore (for example, sulfidizing and carburizing gases). Heat is produced primarily in outer conductor 536, resulting in a small temperature differential across electrical insulator 534.

[0782] FIG. 50A and FIG. 50B depict cross-sectional representations of an embodiment of a temperature limited heater with a ferromagnetic outer conductor. The outer conductor is clad with a conductive layer and a corrosion resistant alloy. Inner conductor 532 is copper. Electrical insulator 534 is silicon nitride, boron nitride, or magnesium oxide. Outer conductor 536 is a 1″ Schedule 80 446 stainless steel pipe. Outer conductor 536 is coupled to jacket 540. Jacket 540 is made from corrosion resistant material such as 347H stainless steel. In an embodiment, conductive layer 544 is placed between outer conductor 536 and jacket 540. Conductive layer 544 is a copper layer. Heat is produced primarily in outer conductor 536, resulting in a small temperature differential across electrical insulator 534. Conductive layer 544 allows a sharp decrease in the resistance of outer conductor 536 as the outer conductor approaches the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. Jacket 540 provides protection from corrosive fluids in the wellbore.

[0783] In some embodiments, the conductor (for example, an inner conductor, an outer conductor, or a ferromagnetic conductor) is the composite conductor that includes two or more different materials. In certain embodiments, the composite conductor includes two or more ferromagnetic materials. In some embodiments, the composite ferromagnetic conductor includes two or more radially disposed materials. In certain embodiments, the composite conductor includes a ferromagnetic conductor and a non-ferromagnetic conductor. In some embodiments, the composite conductor includes the ferromagnetic conductor placed over a non-ferromagnetic core. Two or more materials may be used to obtain a relatively flat electrical resistivity versus temperature profile in a temperature region below the Curie temperature, and/or the phase transformation temperature range, and/or a sharp decrease (a high turndown ratio) in the electrical resistivity at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. In some cases, two or more materials are used to provide more than one Curie temperature and/or phase transformation temperature range for the temperature limited heater.

[0784] The composite electrical conductor may be used as the conductor in any electrical heater embodiment described herein. For example, the composite conductor may be used as the conductor in a conductor-in-conduit heater or an insulated conductor heater. In certain embodiments, the composite conductor may be coupled to a support member such as a support conductor. The support member may be used to provide support to the composite conductor so that the composite conductor is not relied upon for strength at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. The support member may be useful for heaters of lengths of at least 100 m. The support member may be a non-ferromagnetic member that has good high temperature creep strength. Examples of materials that are used for a support member include, but are not limited to, Haynes® 625 alloy and Haynes® HR120® alloy (Haynes International, Kokomo, Ind., U.S.A.), NF709, Incoloy® 800H alloy and 347HP alloy (Allegheny Ludlum Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa., U.S.A.). In some embodiments, materials in a composite conductor are directly coupled (for example, brazed, metallurgically bonded, or swaged) to each other and/or the support member. Using a support member may reduce the need for the ferromagnetic member to provide support for the temperature limited heater, especially at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. Thus, the temperature limited heater may be designed with more flexibility in the selection of ferromagnetic materials.

[0785] FIG. 51 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the composite conductor with the support member. Core 542 is surrounded by ferromagnetic conductor 546 and support member 548. In some embodiments, core 542, ferromagnetic conductor 546, and support member 548 are directly coupled (for example, brazed together or metallurgically bonded together). In one embodiment, core 542 is copper, ferromagnetic conductor 546 is 446 stainless steel, and support member 548 is 347H alloy. In certain embodiments, support member 548 is a Schedule 80 pipe. Support member 548 surrounds the composite conductor having ferromagnetic conductor 546 and core 542. Ferromagnetic conductor 546 and core 542 may be joined to form the composite conductor by, for example, a coextrusion process. For example, the composite conductor is a 1.9 cm outside diameter 446 stainless steel ferromagnetic conductor surrounding a 0.95 cm diameter copper core.

[0786] In certain embodiments, the diameter of core 542 is adjusted relative to a constant outside diameter of ferromagnetic conductor 546 to adjust the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater. For example, the diameter of core 542 may be increased to 1.14 cm while maintaining the outside diameter of ferromagnetic conductor 546 at 1.9 cm to increase the turndown ratio of the heater.

[0787] In some embodiments, conductors (for example, core 542 and ferromagnetic conductor 546) in the composite conductor are separated by support member 548. FIG. 52 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the composite conductor with support member 548 separating the conductors. In one embodiment, core 542 is copper with a diameter of 0.95 cm, support member 548 is 347H alloy with an outside diameter of 1.9 cm, and ferromagnetic conductor 546 is 446 stainless steel with an outside diameter of 2.7 cm. The support member depicted in FIG. 52 has a lower creep strength relative to the support members depicted in FIG. 51.

[0788] In certain embodiments, support member 548 is located inside the composite conductor. FIG. 53 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the composite conductor surrounding support member 548. Support member 548 is made of 347H alloy. Inner conductor 532 is copper. Ferromagnetic conductor 546 is 446 stainless steel. In one embodiment, support member 548 is 1.25 cm diameter 347H alloy, inner conductor 532 is 1.9 cm outside diameter copper, and ferromagnetic conductor 546 is 2.7 cm outside diameter 446 stainless steel. The turndown ratio is higher than the turndown ratio for the embodiments depicted in FIGS. 51, 52, and 54 for the same outside diameter, but the creep strength is lower.

[0789] In some embodiments, the thickness of inner conductor 532, which is copper, is reduced and the thickness of support member 548 is increased to increase the creep strength at the expense of reduced turndown ratio. For example, the diameter of support member 548 is increased to 1.6 cm while maintaining the outside diameter of inner conductor 532 at 1.9 cm to reduce the thickness of the conduit. This reduction in thickness of inner conductor 532 results in a decreased turndown ratio relative to the thicker inner conductor embodiment but an increased creep strength.

[0790] In one embodiment, support member 548 is a conduit (or pipe) inside inner conductor 532 and ferromagnetic conductor 546. FIG. 54 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the composite conductor surrounding support member 548. In one embodiment, support member 548 is 347H alloy with a 0.63 cm diameter center hole. In some embodiments, support member 548 is a preformed conduit. In certain embodiments, support member 548 is formed by having a dissolvable material (for example, copper dissolvable by nitric acid) located inside the support member during formation of the composite conductor. The dissolvable material is dissolved to form the hole after the conductor is assembled. In an embodiment, support member 548 is 347H alloy with an inside diameter of 0.63 cm and an outside diameter of 1.6 cm, inner conductor 532 is copper with an outside diameter of 1.8 cm, and ferromagnetic conductor 546 is 446 stainless steel with an outside diameter of 2.7 cm.

[0791] In certain embodiments, the composite electrical conductor is used as the conductor in the conductor-in-conduit heater. For example, the composite electrical conductor may be used as conductor 550 in FIG. 55.

[0792] FIG. 55 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the conductor-in-conduit heater. Conductor 550 is disposed in conduit 552. Conductor 550 is a rod or conduit of electrically conductive material. Low resistance sections 554 are present at both ends of conductor 550 to generate less heating in these sections. Low resistance section 554 is formed by having a greater cross-sectional area of conductor 550 in that section, or the sections are made of material having less resistance. In certain embodiments, low resistance section 554 includes a low resistance conductor coupled to conductor 550.

[0793] Conduit 552 is made of an electrically conductive material. Conduit 552 is disposed in opening 556 in hydrocarbon layer 484. Opening 556 has a diameter that accommodates conduit 552.

[0794] Conductor 550 may be centered in conduit 552 by centralizers 558. Centralizers 558 electrically isolate conductor 550 from conduit 552. Centralizers 558 inhibit movement and properly locate conductor 550 in conduit 552. Centralizers 558 are made of ceramic material or a combination of ceramic and metallic materials. Centralizers 558 inhibit deformation of conductor 550 in conduit 552. Centralizers 558 are touching or spaced at intervals between approximately 0.1 m (meters) and approximately 3 m or more along conductor 550.

[0795] A second low resistance section 554 of conductor 550 may couple conductor 550 to wellhead 476. Electrical current may be applied to conductor 550 from power cable 560 through low resistance section 554 of conductor 550. Electrical current passes from conductor 550 through sliding connector 562 to conduit 552. Conduit 552 may be electrically insulated from overburden casing 564 and from wellhead 476 to return electrical current to power cable 560. Heat may be generated in conductor 550 and conduit 552. The generated heat may radiate in conduit 552 and opening 556 to heat at least a portion of hydrocarbon layer 484.

[0796] Overburden casing 564 may be disposed in overburden 482. Overburden casing 564 is, in some embodiments, surrounded by materials (for example, reinforcing material and/or cement) that inhibit heating of overburden 482. Low resistance section 554 of conductor 550 may be placed in overburden casing 564. Low resistance section 554 of conductor 550 is made of, for example, carbon steel. Low resistance section 554 of conductor 550 may be centralized in overburden casing 564 using centralizers 558. Centralizers 558 are spaced at intervals of approximately 6 m to approximately 12 m or, for example, approximately 9 m along low resistance section 554 of conductor 550. In a heater embodiment, low resistance section 554 of conductor 550 is coupled to conductor 550 by one or more welds. In other heater embodiments, low resistance sections are threaded, threaded and welded, or otherwise coupled to the conductor. Low resistance section 554 generates little or no heat in overburden casing 564. Packing 566 may be placed between overburden casing 564 and opening 556. Packing 566 may be used as a cap at the junction of overburden 482 and hydrocarbon layer 484 to allow filling of materials in the annulus between overburden casing 564 and opening 556. In some embodiments, packing 566 inhibits fluid from flowing from opening 556 to surface 568.

[0797] FIG. 56 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of a removable conductor-in-conduit heat source. Conduit 552 may be placed in opening 556 through overburden 482 such that a gap remains between the conduit and overburden casing 564. Fluids may be removed from opening 556 through the gap between conduit 552 and overburden casing 564. Fluids may be removed from the gap through conduit 570. Conduit 552 and components of the heat source included in the conduit that are coupled to wellhead 476 may be removed from opening 556 as a single unit. The heat source may be removed as a single unit to be repaired, replaced, and/or used in another portion of the formation.

[0798] For a temperature limited heater in which the ferromagnetic conductor provides a majority of the resistive heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, a majority of the current flows through material with highly non-linear functions of magnetic field (H) versus magnetic induction (B). These non-linear functions may cause strong inductive effects and distortion that lead to decreased power factor in the temperature limited heater at temperatures below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. These effects may render the electrical power supply to the temperature limited heater difficult to control and may result in additional current flow through surface and/or overburden power supply conductors. Expensive and/or difficult to implement control systems such as variable capacitors or modulated power supplies may be used to compensate for these effects and to control temperature limited heaters where the majority of the resistive heat output is provided by current flow through the ferromagnetic material.

[0799] In certain temperature limited heater embodiments, the ferromagnetic conductor confines a majority of the flow of electrical current to an electrical conductor coupled to the ferromagnetic conductor when the temperature limited heater is below or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. The electrical conductor may be a sheath, jacket, support member, corrosion resistant member, or other electrically resistive member. In some embodiments, the ferromagnetic conductor confines a majority of the flow of electrical current to the electrical conductor positioned between an outermost layer and the ferromagnetic conductor. The ferromagnetic conductor is located in the cross section of the temperature limited heater such that the magnetic properties of the ferromagnetic conductor at or below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor confine the majority of the flow of electrical current to the electrical conductor. The majority of the flow of electrical current is confined to the electrical conductor due to the skin effect of the ferromagnetic conductor. Thus, the majority of the current is flowing through material with substantially linear resistive properties throughout most of the operating range of the heater.

[0800] In certain embodiments, the ferromagnetic conductor and the electrical conductor are located in the cross section of the temperature limited heater so that the skin effect of the ferromagnetic material limits the penetration depth of electrical current in the electrical conductor and the ferromagnetic conductor at temperatures below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. Thus, the electrical conductor provides a majority of the electrically resistive heat output of the temperature limited heater at temperatures up to a temperature at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. In certain embodiments, the dimensions of the electrical conductor may be chosen to provide desired heat output characteristics.

[0801] Because the majority of the current flows through the electrical conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, the temperature limited heater has a resistance versus temperature profile that at least partially reflects the resistance versus temperature profile of the material in the electrical conductor. Thus, the resistance versus temperature profile of the temperature limited heater is substantially linear below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor if the material in the electrical conductor has a substantially linear resistance versus temperature profile. For example, the temperature limited heater in which the majority of the current flows in the electrical conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range may have a resistance versus temperature profile similar to the profile shown in FIG. 260. The resistance of the temperature limited heater has little or no dependence on the current flowing through the heater until the temperature nears the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. The majority of the current flows in the electrical conductor rather than the ferromagnetic conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range.

[0802] Resistance versus temperature profiles for temperature limited heaters in which the majority of the current flows in the electrical conductor also tend to exhibit sharper reductions in resistance near or at the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. For example, the reduction in resistance shown in FIG. 260 is sharper than the reduction in resistance shown in FIG. 246. The sharper reductions in resistance near or at the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range are easier to control than more gradual resistance reductions near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range because little current is flowing through the ferromagnetic material.

[0803] In certain embodiments, the material and/or the dimensions of the material in the electrical conductor are selected so that the temperature limited heater has a desired resistance versus temperature profile below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor.

[0804] Temperature limited heaters in which the majority of the current flows in the electrical conductor rather than the ferromagnetic conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range are easier to predict and/or control. Behavior of temperature limited heaters in which the majority of the current flows in the electrical conductor rather than the ferromagnetic conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range may be predicted by, for example, the resistance versus temperature profile and/or the power factor versus temperature profile. Resistance versus temperature profiles and/or power factor versus temperature profiles may be assessed or predicted by, for example, experimental measurements that assess the behavior of the temperature limited heater, analytical equations that assess or predict the behavior of the temperature limited heater, and/or simulations that assess or predict the behavior of the temperature limited heater.

[0805] In certain embodiments, assessed or predicted behavior of the temperature limited heater is used to control the temperature limited heater. The temperature limited heater may be controlled based on measurements (assessments) of the resistance and/or the power factor during operation of the heater. In some embodiments, the power, or current, supplied to the temperature limited heater is controlled based on assessment of the resistance and/or the power factor of the heater during operation of the heater and the comparison of this assessment versus the predicted behavior of the heater. In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater is controlled without measurement of the temperature of the heater or a temperature near the heater. Controlling the temperature limited heater without temperature measurement eliminates operating costs associated with downhole temperature measurement. Controlling the temperature limited heater based on assessment of the resistance and/or the power factor of the heater also reduces the time for making adjustments in the power or current supplied to the heater compared to controlling the heater based on measured temperature.

[0806] As the temperature of the temperature limited heater approaches or exceeds the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor, reduction in the ferromagnetic properties of the ferromagnetic conductor allows electrical current to flow through a greater portion of the electrically conducting cross section of the temperature limited heater. Thus, the electrical resistance of the temperature limited heater is reduced and the temperature limited heater automatically provides reduced heat output at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. In certain embodiments, a highly electrically conductive member is coupled to the ferromagnetic conductor and the electrical conductor to reduce the electrical resistance of the temperature limited heater at or above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. The highly electrically conductive member may be an inner conductor, a core, or another conductive member of copper, aluminum, nickel, or alloys thereof.

[0807] The ferromagnetic conductor that confines the majority of the flow of electrical current to the electrical conductor at temperatures below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range may have a relatively small cross section compared to the ferromagnetic conductor in temperature limited heaters that use the ferromagnetic conductor to provide the majority of resistive heat output up to or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. A temperature limited heater that uses the electrical conductor to provide a majority of the resistive heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range has low magnetic inductance at temperatures below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range because less current is flowing through the ferromagnetic conductor as compared to the temperature limited heater where the majority of the resistive heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range is provided by the ferromagnetic material. Magnetic field (H) at radius (r) of the ferromagnetic conductor is proportional to the current (I) flowing through the ferromagnetic conductor and the core divided by the radius, or:
H∝I/r.  (EQN. 4)
Since only a portion of the current flows through the ferromagnetic conductor for a temperature limited heater that uses the outer conductor to provide a majority of the resistive heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, the magnetic field of the temperature limited heater may be significantly smaller than the magnetic field of the temperature limited heater where the majority of the current flows through the ferromagnetic material. The relative magnetic permeability (μ) may be large for small magnetic fields.

[0808] The skin depth (δ) of the ferromagnetic conductor is inversely proportional to the square root of the relative magnetic permeability (μ):
δ∝(1/μ)^1/2  (EQN. 5)
Increasing the relative magnetic permeability decreases the skin depth of the ferromagnetic conductor. However, because only a portion of the current flows through the ferromagnetic conductor for temperatures below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, the radius (or thickness) of the ferromagnetic conductor may be decreased for ferromagnetic materials with large relative magnetic permeabilities to compensate for the decreased skin depth while still allowing the skin effect to limit the penetration depth of the electrical current to the electrical conductor at temperatures below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. The radius (thickness) of the ferromagnetic conductor may be between 0.3 mm and 8 mm, between 0.3 mm and 2 mm, or between 2 mm and 4 mm depending on the relative magnetic permeability of the ferromagnetic conductor. Decreasing the thickness of the ferromagnetic conductor decreases costs of manufacturing the temperature limited heater, as the cost of ferromagnetic material tends to be a significant portion of the cost of the temperature limited heater. Increasing the relative magnetic permeability of the ferromagnetic conductor provides a higher turndown ratio and a sharper decrease in electrical resistance for the temperature limited heater at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor.

[0809] Ferromagnetic materials (such as purified iron or iron-cobalt alloys) with high relative magnetic permeabilities (for example, at least 200, at least 1000, at least 1×10⁴, or at least 1×10⁵) and/or high Curie temperatures (for example, at least 600° C., at least 700° C., or at least 800° C.) tend to have less corrosion resistance and/or less mechanical strength at high temperatures. The electrical conductor may provide corrosion resistance and/or high mechanical strength at high temperatures for the temperature limited heater. Thus, the ferromagnetic conductor may be chosen primarily for its ferromagnetic properties.

[0810] Confining the majority of the flow of electrical current to the electrical conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor reduces variations in the power factor. Because only a portion of the electrical current flows through the ferromagnetic conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, the non-linear ferromagnetic properties of the ferromagnetic conductor have little or no effect on the power factor of the temperature limited heater, except at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. Even at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range, the effect on the power factor is reduced compared to temperature limited heaters in which the ferromagnetic conductor provides a majority of the resistive heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. Thus, there is less or no need for external compensation (for example, variable capacitors or waveform modification) to adjust for changes in the inductive load of the temperature limited heater to maintain a relatively high power factor.

[0811] In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater, which confines the majority of the flow of electrical current to the electrical conductor below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor, maintains the power factor above 0.85, above 0.9, or above 0.95 during use of the heater. Any reduction in the power factor occurs only in sections of the temperature limited heater at temperatures near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. Most sections of the temperature limited heater are typically not at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range during use. These sections have a high power factor that approaches 1.0. The power factor for the entire temperature limited heater is maintained above 0.85, above 0.9, or above 0.95 during use of the heater even if some sections of the heater have power factors below 0.85.

[0812] Maintaining high power factors allows for less expensive power supplies and/or control devices such as solid state power supplies or SCRs (silicon controlled rectifiers). These devices may fail to operate properly if the power factor varies by too large an amount because of inductive loads. With the power factors maintained at high values; however, these devices may be used to provide power to the temperature limited heater. Solid state power supplies have the advantage of allowing fine tuning and controlled adjustment of the power supplied to the temperature limited heater.

[0813] In some embodiments, transformers are used to provide power to the temperature limited heater. Multiple voltage taps may be made into the transformer to provide power to the temperature limited heater. Multiple voltage taps allow the current supplied to switch back and forth between the multiple voltages. This maintains the current within a range bound by the multiple voltage taps.

[0814] The highly electrically conductive member, or inner conductor, increases the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater. In certain embodiments, thickness of the highly electrically conductive member is increased to increase the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater. In some embodiments, the thickness of the electrical conductor is reduced to increase the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater. In certain embodiments, the turndown ratio of the temperature limited heater is between 1.1 and 10, between 2 and 8, or between 3 and 6 (for example, the turndown ratio is at least 1.1, at least 2, or at least 3).

[0815] FIG. 57 depicts an embodiment of a temperature limited heater in which the support member provides a majority of the heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. Core 542 is an inner conductor of the temperature limited heater. In certain embodiments, core 542 is a highly electrically conductive material such as copper or aluminum. In some embodiments, core 542 is a copper alloy that provides mechanical strength and good electrically conductivity such as a dispersion strengthened copper. In one embodiment, core 542 is Glidcop® (SCM Metal Products, Inc., Research Triangle Park, N.C., U.S.A.). Ferromagnetic conductor 546 is a thin layer of ferromagnetic material between electrical conductor 572 and core 542. In certain embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is also support member 548. In certain embodiments, ferromagnetic conductor 546 is iron or an iron alloy. In some embodiments, ferromagnetic conductor 546 includes ferromagnetic material with a high relative magnetic permeability. For example, ferromagnetic conductor 546 may be purified iron such as Armco ingot iron (AK Steel Ltd., United Kingdom). Iron with some impurities typically has a relative magnetic permeability on the order of 400. Purifying the iron by annealing the iron in hydrogen gas (H₂) at 1450° C. increases the relative magnetic permeability of the iron. Increasing the relative magnetic permeability of ferromagnetic conductor 546 allows the thickness of the ferromagnetic conductor to be reduced. For example, the thickness of unpurified iron may be approximately 4.5 mm while the thickness of the purified iron is approximately 0.76 mm.

[0816] In certain embodiments, electrical conductor 572 provides support for ferromagnetic conductor 546 and the temperature limited heater. Electrical conductor 572 may be made of a material that provides good mechanical strength at temperatures near or above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546. In certain embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is a corrosion resistant member. Electrical conductor 572 (support member 548) may provide support for ferromagnetic conductor 546 and corrosion resistance. Electrical conductor 572 is made from a material that provides desired electrically resistive heat output at temperatures up to and/or above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546.

[0817] In an embodiment, electrical conductor 572 is 347H stainless steel. In some embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is another electrically conductive, good mechanical strength, corrosion resistant material. For example, electrical conductor 572 may be 304H, 316H, 347HH, NF709, Incoloy® 800H alloy (Inco Alloys International, Huntington, W. Va., U.S.A.), Haynes® HR120® alloy, or Inconel® 617 alloy.

[0818] In some embodiments, electrical conductor 572 (support member 548) includes different alloys in different portions of the temperature limited heater. For example, a lower portion of electrical conductor 572 (support member 548) is 347H stainless steel and an upper portion of the electrical conductor (support member) is NF709. In certain embodiments, different alloys are used in different portions of the electrical conductor (support member) to increase the mechanical strength of the electrical conductor (support member) while maintaining desired heating properties for the temperature limited heater.

[0819] In some embodiments, ferromagnetic conductor 546 includes different ferromagnetic conductors in different portions of the temperature limited heater. Different ferromagnetic conductors may be used in different portions of the temperature limited heater to vary the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range and, thus, the maximum operating temperature in the different portions. In some embodiments, the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range in an upper portion of the temperature limited heater is lower than the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range in a lower portion of the heater. The lower Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range in the upper portion increases the creep-rupture strength lifetime in the upper portion of the heater.

[0820] In the embodiment depicted in FIG. 57, ferromagnetic conductor 546, electrical conductor 572, and core 542 are dimensioned so that the skin depth of the ferromagnetic conductor limits the penetration depth of the majority of the flow of electrical current to the support member when the temperature is below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. Thus, electrical conductor 572 provides a majority of the electrically resistive heat output of the temperature limited heater at temperatures up to a temperature at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546. In certain embodiments, the temperature limited heater depicted in FIG. 57 is smaller (for example, an outside diameter of 3 cm, 2.9 cm, 2.5 cm, or less) than other temperature limited heaters that do not use electrical conductor 572 to provide the majority of electrically resistive heat output. The temperature limited heater depicted in FIG. 57 may be smaller because ferromagnetic conductor 546 is thin as compared to the size of the ferromagnetic conductor needed for a temperature limited heater in which the majority of the resistive heat output is provided by the ferromagnetic conductor.

[0821] In some embodiments, the support member and the corrosion resistant member are different members in the temperature limited heater. FIGS. 58 and 59 depict embodiments of temperature limited heaters in which the jacket provides a majority of the heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. In these embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is jacket 540. Electrical conductor 572, ferromagnetic conductor 546, support member 548, and core 542 (in FIG. 58) or inner conductor 532 (in FIG. 59) are dimensioned so that the skin depth of the ferromagnetic conductor limits the penetration depth of the majority of the flow of electrical current to the thickness of the jacket. In certain embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is a material that is corrosion resistant and provides electrically resistive heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546. For example, electrical conductor 572 is 825 stainless steel or 347H stainless steel. In some embodiments, electrical conductor 572 has a small thickness (for example, on the order of 0.5 mm).

[0822] In FIG. 58, core 542 is highly electrically conductive material such as copper or aluminum. Support member 548 is 347H stainless steel or another material with good mechanical strength at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546.

[0823] In FIG. 59, support member 548 is the core of the temperature limited heater and is 347H stainless steel or another material with good mechanical strength at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546. Inner conductor 532 is highly electrically conductive material such as copper or aluminum.

[0824] In some embodiments, a relatively thin conductive layer is used to provide the majority of the electrically resistive heat output of the temperature limited heater at temperatures up to a temperature at or near the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of the ferromagnetic conductor. Such a temperature limited heater may be used as the heating member in an insulated conductor heater. The heating member of the insulated conductor heater may be located inside a sheath with an insulation layer between the sheath and the heating member.

[0825] FIGS. 60A and 60B depict cross-sectional representations of an embodiment of the insulated conductor heater with the temperature limited heater as the heating member. Insulated conductor 574 includes core 542, ferromagnetic conductor 546, inner conductor 532, electrical insulator 534, and jacket 540. Core 542 is a copper core. Ferromagnetic conductor 546 is, for example, iron or an iron alloy.

[0826] Inner conductor 532 is a relatively thin conductive layer of non-ferromagnetic material with a higher electrical conductivity than ferromagnetic conductor 546. In certain embodiments, inner conductor 532 is copper. Inner conductor 532 may be a copper alloy. Copper alloys typically have a flatter resistance versus temperature profile than pure copper. A flatter resistance versus temperature profile may provide less variation in the heat output as a function of temperature up to the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range. In some embodiments, inner conductor 532 is copper with 6% by weight nickel (for example, CuNi6 or LOHM™). In some embodiments, inner conductor 532 is CuNi10Fe1Mn alloy. Below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546, the magnetic properties of the ferromagnetic conductor confine the majority of the flow of electrical current to inner conductor 532. Thus, inner conductor 532 provides the majority of the resistive heat output of insulated conductor 574 below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range.

[0827] In certain embodiments, inner conductor 532 is dimensioned, along with core 542 and ferromagnetic conductor 546, so that the inner conductor provides a desired amount of heat output and a desired turndown ratio. For example, inner conductor 532 may have a cross-sectional area that is around 2 or 3 times less than the cross-sectional area of core 542. Typically, inner conductor 532 has to have a relatively small cross-sectional area to provide a desired heat output if the inner conductor is copper or copper alloy. In an embodiment with copper inner conductor 532, core 542 has a diameter of 0.66 cm, ferromagnetic conductor 546 has an outside diameter of 0.91 cm, inner conductor 532 has an outside diameter of 1.03 cm, electrical insulator 534 has an outside diameter of 1.53 cm, and jacket 540 has an outside diameter of 1.79 cm. In an embodiment with a CuNi6 inner conductor 532, core 542 has a diameter of 0.66 cm, ferromagnetic conductor 546 has an outside diameter of 0.91 cm, inner conductor 532 has an outside diameter of 1.12 cm, electrical insulator 534 has an outside diameter of 1.63 cm, and jacket 540 has an outside diameter of 1.88 cm. Such insulated conductors are typically smaller and cheaper to manufacture than insulated conductors that do not use the thin inner conductor to provide the majority of heat output below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range.

[0828] Electrical insulator 534 may be magnesium oxide, aluminum oxide, silicon dioxide, beryllium oxide, boron nitride, silicon nitride, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, electrical insulator 534 is a compacted powder of magnesium oxide. In some embodiments, electrical insulator 534 includes beads of silicon nitride.

[0829] In certain embodiments, a small layer of material is placed between electrical insulator 534 and inner conductor 532 to inhibit copper from migrating into the electrical insulator at higher temperatures. For example, a small layer of nickel (for example, about 0.5 mm of nickel) may be placed between electrical insulator 534 and inner conductor 532.

[0830] Jacket 540 is made of a corrosion resistant material such as, but not limited to, 347 stainless steel, 347H stainless steel, 446 stainless steel, or 825 stainless steel. In some embodiments, jacket 540 provides some mechanical strength for insulated conductor 574 at or above the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range of ferromagnetic conductor 546. In certain embodiments, jacket 540 is not used to conduct electrical current.

[0831] For long vertical temperature limited heaters (for example, heaters at least 300 m, at least 500 m, or at least 1 km in length), the hanging stress becomes important in the selection of materials for the temperature limited heater. Without the proper selection of material, the support member may not have sufficient mechanical strength (for example, creep-rupture strength) to support the weight of the temperature limited heater at the operating temperatures of the heater.

[0832] In certain embodiments, materials for the support member are varied to increase the maximum allowable hanging stress at operating temperatures of the temperature limited heater and, thus, increase the maximum operating temperature of the temperature limited heater. Altering the materials of the support member affects the heat output of the temperature limited heater below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range because changing the materials changes the resistance versus temperature profile of the support member. In certain embodiments, the support member is made of more than one material along the length of the heater so that the temperature limited heater maintains desired operating properties (for example, resistance versus temperature profile below the Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range) as much as possible while providing sufficient mechanical properties to support the heater. In some embodiments, transition sections are used between sections of the heater to provide strength that compensates for the difference in temperature between sections of the heater. In certain embodiments, one or more portions of the temperature limited heater have varying outside diameters and/or materials to provide desired properties for the heater.

[0833] In certain embodiments of temperature limited heaters, three temperature limited heaters are coupled together in a three-phase wye configuration. Coupling three temperature limited heaters together in the three-phase wye configuration lowers the current in each of the individual temperature limited heaters because the current is split between the three individual heaters. Lowering the current in each individual temperature limited heater allows each heater to have a small diameter. The lower currents allow for higher relative magnetic permeabilities in each of the individual temperature limited heaters and, thus, higher turndown ratios. In addition, there may be no return current needed for each of the individual temperature limited heaters. Thus, the turndown ratio remains higher for each of the individual temperature limited heaters than if each temperature limited heater had its own return current path.

[0834] In the three-phase wye configuration, individual temperature limited heaters may be coupled together by shorting the sheaths, jackets, or canisters of each of the individual temperature limited heaters to the electrically conductive sections (the conductors providing heat) at their terminating ends (for example, the ends of the heaters at the bottom of a heater wellbore). In some embodiments, the sheaths, jackets, canisters, and/or electrically conductive sections are coupled to a support member that supports the temperature limited heaters in the wellbore.

[0835] In certain embodiments, coupling multiple heaters (for example, insulated conductor, or mineral insulated conductor, heaters) to a single power source, such as a transformer, is advantageous. Coupling multiple heaters to a single transformer may result in using fewer transformers to power heaters used for a treatment area as compared to using individual transformers for each heater. Using fewer transformers reduces surface congestion and allows easier access to the heaters and surface components. Using fewer transformers reduces capital costs associated with providing power to the treatment area. In some embodiments, at least 4, at least 5, at least 10, at least 25 heaters, at least 35 heaters, or at least 45 heaters are powered by a single transformer. Additionally, powering multiple heaters (in different heater wells) from the single transformer may reduce overburden losses because of reduced voltage and/or phase differences between each of the heater wells powered by the single transformer. Powering multiple heaters from the single transformer may inhibit current imbalances between the heaters because the heaters are coupled to the single transformer.

[0836] To provide power to multiple heaters using the single transformer, the transformer may have to provide power at higher voltages to carry the current to each of the heaters effectively. In certain embodiments, the heaters are floating (ungrounded) heaters in the formation. Floating the heaters allows the heaters to operate at higher voltages. In some embodiments, the transformer provides power output of at least about 3 kV, at least about 4 kV, at least about 5 kV, or at least about 6 kV.

[0837] FIG. 61 depicts a top view representation of heater 438 with three insulated conductors 574 in conduit 570. Heater 438 includes three insulated conductors 574 in conduit 570. Heater 438 may be located in a heater well in the subsurface formation. Conduit 570 may be a sheath, jacket, or other enclosure around insulated conductors 574. Each insulated conductor 574 includes core 542, electrical insulator 534, and jacket 540. Insulated conductors 574 may be mineral insulated conductors with core 542 being a copper alloy (for example, a copper-nickel alloy such as Alloy 180), electrical insulator 534 being magnesium oxide, and jacket 540 being Incoloy® 825, copper, or stainless steel (for example 347H stainless steel). In some embodiments, jacket 540 includes non-work hardenable metals so that the jacket is annealable.

[0838] In some embodiments, core 542 and/or jacket 540 include ferromagnetic materials. In some embodiments, one or more insulated conductors 574 are temperature limited heaters. In certain embodiments, the overburden portion of insulated conductors 574 include high electrical conductivity materials in core 542 (for example, pure copper or copper alloys such as copper with 3% silicon at a weldjoint) so that the overburden portions of the insulated conductors provide little or no heat output. In certain embodiments, conduit 570 includes non-corrosive materials and/or high strength materials such as stainless steel. In one embodiment, conduit 570 is 347H stainless steel.

[0839] Insulated conductors 574 may be coupled to the single transformer in a three-phase configuration (for example, a three-phase wye configuration). Each insulated conductor 574 may be coupled to one phase of the single transformer. In certain embodiments, the single transformer is also coupled to a plurality of identical heaters 438 in other heater wells in the formation (for example, the single transformer may couple to 40 or more heaters in the formation). In some embodiments, the single transformer couples to at least 4, at least 5, at least 10, at least 15, or at least 25 additional heaters in the formation.

[0840] Electrical insulator 534′ may be located inside conduit 570 to electrically insulate insulated conductors 574 from the conduit. In certain embodiments, electrical insulator 534′ is magnesium oxide (for example, compacted magnesium oxide). In some embodiments, electrical insulator 534′ is silicon nitride (for example, silicon nitride blocks). Electrical insulator 534′ electrically insulates insulated conductors 574 from conduit 570 so that at high operating voltages (for example, 3 kV or higher), there is no arcing between the conductors and the conduit. In some embodiments, electrical insulator 534′ inside conduit 570 has at least the thickness of electrical insulators 534 in insulated conductors 574. The increased thickness of insulation in heater 438 (from electrical insulators 534 and/or electrical insulator 534′) inhibits and may prevent current leakage into the formation from the heater. In some embodiments, electrical insulator 534′ spatially locates insulated conductors 574 inside conduit 570.

[0841] FIG. 62 depicts an embodiment of three-phase wye transformer 580 coupled to a plurality of heaters 438. For simplicity in the drawing, only four heaters 438 are shown in FIG. 62. It is to be understood that several more heaters may be coupled to the transformer 580. As shown in FIG. 62, each leg (each insulated conductor) of each heater is coupled to one phase of transformer 580 and current is returned to the neutral or ground of the transformer (for example, returned through conductor 582 depicted in FIGS. 61 and 63).

[0842] Return conductor 582 may be electrically coupled to the ends of insulated conductors 574 (as shown in FIG. 63) current returns from the ends of the insulated conductors to the transformer on the surface of the formation. Return conductor 582 may include high electrical conductivity materials such as pure copper, nickel, copper alloys, or combinations thereof so that the return conductor provides little or no heat output. In some embodiments, return conductor 582 is a tubular (for example, a stainless steel tubular) that allows an optical fiber to be placed inside the tubular to be used for temperature and/or other measurement. In some embodiments, return conductor 582 is a small insulated conductor (for example, small mineral insulated conductor). Return conductor 582 may be coupled to the neutral or ground leg of the transformer in a three-phase wye configuration. Thus, insulated conductors 574 are electrically isolated from conduit 570 and the formation. Using return conductor 582 to return current to the surface may make coupling the heater to a wellhead easier. In some embodiments, current is returned using one or more of jackets 540, depicted in FIG. 61. One or more jackets 540 may be coupled to cores 542 at the end of the heaters and return current to the neutral of the three-phase wye transformer.

[0843] FIG. 63 depicts a side view representation of the end section of three insulated conductors 574 in conduit 570. The end section is the section of the heaters the furthest away from (distal from) the surface of the formation. The end section includes contactor section 576 coupled to conduit 570. In some embodiments, contactor section 576 is welded or brazed to conduit 570. Termination 578 is located in contactor section 576. Termination 578 is electrically coupled to insulated conductors 574 and return conductor 582. Termination 578 electrically couples the cores of insulated conductors 574 to the return conductor 582 at the ends of the heaters.

[0844] In certain embodiments, heater 438, depicted in FIGS. 61 and 63, includes an overburden section using copper as the core of the insulated conductors. The copper in the overburden section may be the same diameter as the cores used in the heating section of the heater. The copper in the overburden section may have a larger diameter than the cores in the heating section of the heater. Increasing the size of the copper in the overburden section may decrease losses in the overburden section of the heater.

[0845] Heaters that include three insulated conductors 574 in conduit 570, as depicted in FIGS. 61 and 63, may be made in a multiple step process. In some embodiments, the multiple step process is performed at the site of the formation or treatment area. In some embodiments, the multiple step process is performed at a remote manufacturing site away from the formation. The finished heater is then transported to the treatment area.

[0846] Insulated conductors 574 may be pre-assembled prior to the bundling either on site or at a remote location. Insulated conductors 574 and return conductor 582 may be positioned on spools. A machine may draw insulated conductors 574 and return conductor 582 from the spools at a selected rate. Preformed blocks of insulation material may be positioned around return conductor 582 and insulated conductors 574. In an embodiment, two blocks are positioned around return conductor 582 and three blocks are positioned around insulated conductors 574 to form electrical insulator 534′. The insulated conductors and return conductor may be drawn or pushed into a plate of conduit material that has been rolled into a tubular shape. The edges of the plate may be pressed together and welded (for example, by laser welding). After forming conduit 570 around electrical insulator 534′, the bundle of insulated conductors 574, and return conductor 582, the conduit may be compacted against the electrical insulator 582 so that all of the components of the heater are pressed together into a compact and tightly fitting form. During the compaction, the electrical insulator may flow and fill any gaps inside the heater.

[0847] In some embodiments, heater 438 (which includes conduit 570 around electrical insulator 534′ and the bundle of insulated conductors 574 and return conductor 582) is inserted into a coiled tubing tubular that is placed in a wellbore in the formation. The coiled tubing tubular may be left in place in the formation (left in during heating of the formation) or removed from the formation after installation of the heater. The coiled tubing tubular may allow for easier installation of heater 438 into the wellbore.

[0848] In some embodiments, one or more components of heater 438 are varied (for example, removed, moved, or replaced) while the operation of the heater remains substantially identical. FIG. 64 depicts an embodiment of heater 438 with three insulated cores 542 in conduit 570. In this embodiment, electrical insulator 534′ surrounds cores 542 and return conductor 582 in conduit 570. Cores 542 are located in conduit 570 without an electrical insulator and jacket surrounding the cores. Cores 542 are coupled to the single transformer in a three-phase wye configuration with each core 542 coupled to one phase of the transformer. Return conductor 582 is electrically coupled to the ends of cores 542 and returns current from the ends of the cores to the transformer on the surface of the formation.

[0849] FIG. 65 depicts an embodiment of heater 438 with three insulated conductors 574 and insulated return conductor in conduit 570. In this embodiment, return conductor 582 is an insulated conductor with core 542, electrical insulator 534, and jacket 540. Return conductor 582 and insulated conductors 574 are located in conduit 570 surrounded by electrical insulator 534. Return conductor 582 and insulated conductors 574 may be the same size or different sizes. Return conductor 582 and insulated conductors 574 operate substantially the same as in the embodiment depicted in FIGS. 61 and 63.

[0850] FIGS. 66 and 67 depict embodiments of three insulated conductors 574 banded together. Heater 438 includes three, or other multiples, insulated conductors 574 coupled together in a spiral configuration. In certain embodiments, insulated conductors 574 are held together in the spiral configuration with band 584. In some embodiments, band 584 includes a plurality of bands that hold together insulated conductors 574. The bands may be periodically placed around insulated conductors 574 to hold the conductors together.

[0851] Banding insulated conductors 574 together instead of placing the conductors in a casing allows open spaces between the conductors to radiate heat to the formation, thus, increasing the radiating surface area of heater 438. Banding insulated conductors 574 together may improve the insertion strength of heater 438.

[0852] In some embodiments, insulated conductors 574 are banded onto and around support member 586, as shown in FIG. 67. Support member 586 may provide structural support and/or increase the insertion strength of heater 438. In some embodiments, support member 586 includes a conduit used to provide fluids and/or to remove fluids from heater 438. For example, oxidization inhibiting fluids may be provided to heater 438 through support member 586. In some embodiments, other structures are used to provide fluids and/or to remove fluids from heater 438.

[0853] Heater 438 may be provided power from single phase power sources, as depicted in FIG. 66, or three-phase power sources, as depicted in FIG. 67, depending on desired operation of the heater. Support member 586 may provide electrical isolation for insulated conductors 438 coupled to the three-phase power source. The voltage differentials on the surfaces (jackets) of insulated conductors 574 in the three-phase embodiment may be reduced because of the proximity effect.

[0854] In some embodiments, optical sensor 588 is located at or near a center of insulated conductors 574. Optical sensor 588 may be used to assess properties of heater 438 such as, but not limited to, stress, temperature, and/or pressure. In some embodiments, support member 586 includes a notch, as shown in FIG. 67, for insertion of optical sensor 588. The notch may allow continuous insertion of optical sensor optical sensor 588 during installation of heater 438.

[0855] FIG. 68 depicts an embodiment of a heater in wellbore 742 in formation 524. The heater includes insulated conductor 574 in conduit 552 with material 590 between the insulated conductor and the conduit. In some embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is a mineral insulated conductor. Electricity supplied to insulated conductor 574 resistively heats the insulated conductor. Insulated conductor conductively transfers heat to material 590. Heat may transfer within material 590 by heat conduction and/or by heat convection. Radiant heat from insulated conductor 574 and/or heat from material 590 transfers to conduit 552. Heat may transfer to the formation from the heater by conductive or radiative heat transfer from conduit 552. Material 590 may be molten metal, molten salt, or other liquid. In some embodiments, a gas (for example, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and/or helium) is in conduit 552 above material 590. The gas may inhibit oxidation or other chemical changes of material 590. The gas may inhibit vaporization of material 590. U.S. Published Patent Application 2008-0078551 to DeVault et al., which is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein, describes a system for placement in a wellbore, the system including a heater in a conduit with a liquid metal between the heater and the conduit for heating subterranean earth.

[0856] Insulated conductor 574 and conduit 552 may be placed in an opening in a subsurface formation. Insulated conductor 574 and conduit 552 may have any orientation in a subsurface formation (for example, the insulated conductor and conduit may be substantially vertical or substantially horizontally oriented in the formation). Insulated conductor 574 includes core 542, electrical insulator 534, and jacket 540. In some embodiments, core 542 is a copper core. In some embodiments, core 542 includes other electrical conductors or alloys (for example, copper alloys). In some embodiments, core 542 includes a ferromagnetic conductor so that insulated conductor 574 operates as a temperature limited heater. In some embodiments, core 542 does not include a ferromagnetic conductor.

[0857] In some embodiments, core 542 of insulated conductor 574 is made of two or more portions. The first portion may be placed adjacent to the overburden. The first portion may be sized and/or made of a highly conductive material so that the first portion does not resistively heat to a high temperature. One or more other portions of core 574 may be sized and/or made of material that resistively heats to a high temperature. These portions of core 574 may be positioned adjacent to sections of the formation that are to be heated by the heater. In some embodiments, the insulated conductor does not include a highly conductive first portion. A lead in cable may be coupled to the insulated conductor to supply electricity to the insulated conductor.

[0858] In some embodiments, core 542 of insulated conductor 574 is a highly conductive material such as copper. Core 542 may be electrically coupled to jacket 540 at or near the end of the insulated conductor. In some embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is electrically coupled to conduit 552. Electrical current supplied to insulated conductor 574 may resistively heat core 542, jacket 540, material 590, and/or conduit 552. Resistive heating of core 542, jacket 540, material 590, and/or conduit 552 generates heat that may transfer to the formation.

[0859] Electrical insulator 534 may be magnesium oxide, aluminum oxide, silicon dioxide, beryllium oxide, boron nitride, silicon nitride, or combinations thereof. In certain embodiments, electrical insulator 534 is a compacted powder of magnesium oxide. In some embodiments, electrical insulator 534 includes beads of silicon nitride. In certain embodiments, a thin layer of material clad over core 542 to inhibit the core from migrating into the electrical insulator at higher temperatures (i.e., to inhibit copper of the core from migrating into magnesium oxide of the insulation). For example, a small layer of nickel (for example, about 0.5 mm of nickel) may be clad on core 542.

[0860] In some embodiments, material 590 may be relatively corrosive. Jacket 540 and/or at least the inside surface of conduit 552 may be made of a corrosion resistant material such as, but not limited to, nickel, Alloy N (Carpenter Metals), 347 stainless steel, 347H stainless steel, 446 stainless steel, or 825 stainless steel. For example, conduit 552 may be plated or lined with nickel. In some embodiments, material 590 may be relatively non-corrosive. Jacket 540 and/or at least the inside surface of conduit 552 may be made of a material such as carbon steel.

[0861] In some embodiments, jacket 540 of insulated conductor 574 is not used as the main return of electrical current for the insulated conductor. In embodiments where material 590 is a good electrical conductor such as a molten metal, current returns through the molten metal in the conduit and/or through the conduit 552. In some embodiments, conduit 552 is made of a ferromagnetic material, (for example 410 stainless steel). Conduit 552 may function as a temperature limited heater until the temperature of the conduit approaches, reaches or exceeds the Curie temperature or phase transition temperature of the conduit material.

[0862] In some embodiments, material 590 returns electrical current to the surface from insulated conductor 574 (i.e., the material acts as the return or ground conductor for the insulated conductor). Material 590 may provide a current path with low resistance so that a long insulated conductor 574 is useable in conduit 552. The long heater may operate at low voltages for the length of the heater due to the presence of material 590 that is conductive.

[0863] FIG. 69 depicts an embodiment of a portion of insulated conductor 574 in conduit 552 wherein material 590 is a good conductor (for example, a liquid metal) and current flow is indicated by the arrows. Current flows down core 542 and returns through jacket 540, material 590, and conduit 552. Jacket 540 and conduit 552 may be at approximately constant potential. Current flows radially from jacket 540 to conduit 552 through material 590. Material 590 may resistively heat. Heat from material 590 may transfer through conduit 552 into the formation.

[0864] In embodiments where material 590 is partially electrically conductive (for example, the material is a molten salt), current returns mainly through jacket 540. All or a portion of the current that passes through partially conductive material 590 may pass to ground through conduit 552.

[0865] In the embodiment depicted in FIG. 68, core 542 of insulated conductor 574 has a diameter of about 1 cm, electrical insulator 534 has an outside diameter of about 1.6 cm, and jacket 540 has an outside diameter of about 1.8 cm. In other embodiments, the insulated conductor is smaller. For example, core 542 has a diameter of about 0.5 cm, electrical insulator 534 has an outside diameter of about 0.8 cm, and jacket 540 has an outside diameter of about 0.9 cm. Other insulated conductor geometries may be used. For the same size conduit 552, the smaller geometry of insulated conductor 574 may result in a higher operating temperature of the insulated conductor to achieve the same temperature at the conduit. The smaller geometry insulated conductors may be significantly more economically favorable due to manufacturing cost, weight, and other factors.

[0866] Material 590 may be placed between the outside surface of insulated conductor 574 and the inside surface of conduit 552. In certain embodiments, material 590 is placed in the conduit in a solid form as balls or pellets. Material 590 may melt below the operating temperatures of insulated conductor 574. Material may melt above ambient subsurface formation temperatures. Material 590 may be placed in conduit 552 after insulated conductor 574 is placed in the conduit. In certain embodiments, material 590 is placed in conduit 574 as a liquid. The liquid may be placed in conduit 552 before or after insulated conductor 574 is placed in the conduit (for example, the molten liquid may be poured into the conduit before or after the insulated conductor is placed in the conduit). Additionally, material 590 may be placed in conduit 552 before or after insulated conductor 574 is energized (i.e., supplied with electricity). Material 590 may be added to conduit 552 or removed from the conduit after operation of the heater is initialized. Material 590 may be added to or removed from conduit 552 to maintain a desired head of fluid in the conduit. In some embodiments, the amount of material 590 in conduit 552 may be adjusted (i.e., added to or depleted) to adjust or balance the stresses on the conduit. Material 590 may inhibit deformation of conduit 552. The head of material 590 in conduit 552 may inhibit the formation from crushing or otherwise deforming the conduit should the formation expand against the conduit. The head of fluid in conduit 552 allows the wall of the conduit to be relatively thin. Having thin conduits 552 may increase the economic viability of using multiple heaters of this type to heat portions of the formation.

[0867] Material 590 may support insulated conductor 574 in conduit 552. The support provided by material 590 of insulated conductor 574 may allow for the deployment of long insulated conductors as compared to insulated conductors positioned only in a gas in a conduit without the use of special metallurgy to accommodate the weight of the insulated conductor. In certain embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is buoyant in material 590 in conduit 552. For example, insulated conductor may be buoyant in molten metal. The buoyancy of insulated conductor 574 reduces creep associated problems in long, substantially vertical heaters. A bottom weight or tie down may be coupled to the bottom of insulated conductor 574 to inhibit the insulated conductor from floating in material 590.

[0868] Material 590 may remain a liquid at operating temperatures of insulated conductor 574. In some embodiments, material 590 melts at temperatures above about 100° C., above about 200° C., or above about 300° C. The insulated conductor may operate at temperatures greater than 200° C., greater than 400° C., greater than 600° C., or greater than 800° C. In certain embodiments, material 590 provides enhanced heat transfer from insulated conductor 574 to conduit 552 at or near the operating temperatures of the insulated conductor.

[0869] Material 590 may include metals such as tin, zinc, an alloy such as a 60% by weight tin, 40% by weight zinc alloy; bismuth; indium; cadmium, aluminum; lead; and/or combinations thereof (for example, eutectic alloys of these metals such as binary or ternary alloys). In one embodiment, material 590 is tin. Some liquid metals may be corrosive. The jacket of the insulated conductor and/or at least the inside surface of the canister may need to be made of a material that is resistant to the corrosion of the liquid metal. The jacket of the insulated conductor and/or at least the inside surface of the conduit may be made of materials that inhibit the molten metal from leaching materials from the insulating conductor and/or the conduit to form eutectic compositions or metal alloys. Molten metals may be highly thermal conductive, but may block radiant heat transfer from the insulated conductor and/or have relatively small heat transfer by natural convection.

[0870] Material 590 may be or include molten salts such as solar salt, salts presented in Table 1, or other salts. The molten salts may be infrared transparent to aid in heat transfer from the insulated conductor to the canister. In some embodiments, solar salt includes sodium nitrate and potassium nitrate (for example, about 60% by weight sodium nitrate and about 40% by weight potassium nitrate). Solar salt melts at about 220° C. and is chemically stable up to temperatures of about 593° C. Other salts that may be used include, but are not limited to LiNO₃ (melt temperature (T_m) of 264° C. and a decomposition temperature of about 600° C.) and eutectic mixtures such as 53% by weight KNO₃, 40% by weight NaNO₃ and 7% by weight NaNO₂ (T_m of about 142° C. and an upper working temperature of over 500° C.); 45.5% by weight KNO₃ and 54.5% by weight NaNO₂ (T_m of about 142-145° C. and an upper working temperature of over 500° C.); or 50% by weight NaCl and 50% by weight SrCl₂ (T_m of about 19° C. and an upper working temperature of over 1200° C.).

[0871]

	TABLE 1
	Material	Tm (° C.)	Tb (° C.)
	Zn	420	907
	CdBr2	568	863
	CdI2	388	744
	CuBr2	498	900
	PbBr2	371	892
	TlBr	460	819
	TlF	326	826
	ThI4	566	837
	SnF2	215	850
	SnI2	320	714
	ZnCl2	290	732

[0872] Some molten salts, such as solar salt, may be relatively non-corrosive so that the conduit and/or the jacket may be made of relatively inexpensive material (for example, carbon steel). Some molten salts may have good thermal conductivity, may have high heat density, and may result in large heat transfer by natural convection.

[0873] In fluid mechanics, the Rayleigh number is a dimensionless number associated with heat transfer in a fluid. When the Rayleigh number is below the critical value for the fluid, heat transfer is primarily in the form of conduction; and when the Rayleigh number is above the critical value, heat transfer is primarily in the form of convection. The Rayleigh number is the product of the Grashof number (which describes the relationship between buoyancy and viscosity in a fluid) and the Prandtl number (which describes the relationship between momentum diffusivity and thermal diffusivity). For the same size insulated conductors in conduits, and where the temperature of the conduit is 500° C., the Rayleigh number for solar salt in the conduit is about 10 times the Rayleigh number for tin in the conduit. The higher Rayleigh number implies that the strength of natural convection in the molten solar salt is much stronger than the strength of the natural convection in molten tin. The stronger natural convection of molten salt may distribute heat and inhibit the formation of hot spots at locations along the length of the conduit. Hot spots may be caused by coke build up at isolated locations adjacent to or on the conduit, contact of the conduit by the formation at isolated locations, and/or other high thermal load situations.

[0874] Conduit 552 may be a carbon steel or stainless steel canister. In some embodiments, conduit 552 may include cladding on the outer surface to inhibit corrosion of the conduit by formation fluid. Conduit 552 may include cladding on an inner surface of the conduit that is corrosion resistant to material 590 in the conduit. Cladding applied to conduit 552 may be a coating and/or a liner. If the conduit contains a metal salt, the inner surface of the conduit may include coating of nickel, or the conduit may be or include a liner of a corrosion resistant metal such as Alloy N. If the conduit contains a molten metal, the conduit may include a corrosion resistant metal liner or coating, and/or a ceramic coating (for example, a porcelain coating or fired enamel coating). In an embodiment, conduit 552 is a canister of 410 stainless steel with an outside diameter of about 6 cm. Conduit 552 may not need a thick wall because material 590 may provide internal pressure that inhibits deformation or crushing of the conduit due to external stresses.

[0875] FIG. 70 depicts an embodiment of the heater positioned in wellbore 742 of formation 524 with a portion of insulated conductor 574 and conduit 552 oriented substantially horizontally in the formation. Material 590 may provide a head in conduit 552 due to the pressure of the material. The pressure head may keep material 590 in conduit 552. The pressure head may also provide internal pressure that inhibits deformation or collapse of conduit 552 due to external stresses.

[0876] In some embodiments, two or more insulated conductors are placed in the conduit. In some embodiments, only one of the insulated conductors is energized. Should the energized conductor fail, one of the other conductors may be energized to maintain the material in a molten phase. The failed insulated conductor may be removed and/or replaced.

[0877] The conduit of the heater may be a ribbed conduit. The ribbed conduit may improve the heat transfer characteristics of the conduit as compared to a cylindrical conduit. FIG. 71 depicts a cross-sectional representation of ribbed conduit 592. FIG. 72 depicts a perspective view of a portion of ribbed conduit 592. Ribbed conduit 592 may include rings 594 and ribs 596. Rings 594 and ribs 596 may improve the heat transfer characteristics of ribbed conduit 592. In an embodiment, the cylinder of conduit has an inner diameter of about 5.1 cm and a wall thickness of about 0.57 cm. Rings 594 may be spaced about every 3.8 cm. Rings 594 may have a height of about 1.9 cm and a thickness of about 0.5 cm. Six ribs 596 may be spaced evenly about conduit 552. Ribs 596 may have a thickness of about 0.5 cm and a height of about 1.6 cm. Other dimensions for the cylinder, rings and ribs may be used. Ribbed conduit 592 may be formed from two or more rolled pieces that are welded together to form the ribbed conduit. Other types of conduit with extra surface area to enhance heat transfer from the conduit to the formation may be used.

[0878] In some embodiments, the ribbed conduit may be used as the conduit of a conductor-in-conduit heater. For example, the conductor may be a 3.05 cm 410 stainless steel rod and the conduit has dimensions as described above. In other embodiments, the conductor is an insulated conductor and a fluid is positioned between the conductor and the ribbed conduit. The fluid may be a gas or liquid at operating temperatures of the insulated conductor.

[0879] In some embodiments, the heat source for the heater is not an insulated conductor. For example, the heat source may be hot fluid circulated through an inner conduit positioned in an outer conduit. The material may be positioned between the inner conduit and the outer conduit. Convection currents in the material may help to more evenly distribute heat to the formation and may inhibit or limit formation of a hot spot where insulation that limits heat transfer to the overburden ends. In some embodiments, the heat sources are downhole oxidizers. The material is placed between an outer conduit and an oxidizer conduit. The oxidizer conduit may be an exhaust conduit for the oxidizers or the oxidant conduit if the oxidizers are positioned in a u-shaped wellbore with exhaust gases exiting the formation through one of the legs of the u-shaped conduit. The material may help inhibit the formation of hot spots adjacent to the oxidizers of the oxidizer assembly.

[0880] The material to be heated by the insulated conductor may be placed in an open wellbore. FIG. 73 depicts material 590 in open wellbore 742 in formation 524 with insulated conductor 574 in the wellbore. In some embodiments, a gas (for example, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and/or helium) is placed in wellbore 742 above material 590. The gas may inhibit oxidation or other chemical changes of material 590. The gas may inhibit vaporization of material 590.

[0881] Material 590 may have a melting point that is above the pyrolysis temperature of hydrocarbons in the formation. The melting point of material 590 may be above 375° C., above 400° C., or above 425° C. The insulated conductor may be energized to heat the formation. Heat from the insulated conductor may pyrolyze hydrocarbons in the formation. Adjacent the wellbore, the heat from insulated conductor 574 may result in coking that reduces the permeability and plugs the formation near wellbore 742. The plugged formation inhibits material 590 from leaking from wellbore 742 into formation 524 when the material is a liquid. In some embodiments, material 590 is a salt.

[0882] Return electrical current for insulated conductor 574 may return through jacket 540 of the insulated conductor. Any current that passes through material 590 may pass to ground. Above the level of material 590, any remaining return electrical current may be confined to jacket 540 of insulated conductor 574.

[0883] In some embodiments, other types of heat sources besides for insulated conductors are used to heat the material placed in the open wellbore. The other types of heat sources may include gas burners, pipes through which hot heat transfer fluid flows, or other types of heaters.

[0884] In some embodiments, heat pipes are placed in the formation. The heat pipes may reduce the number of active heat sources needed to heat a treatment area of a given size. The heat pipes may reduce the time needed to heat the treatment area of a given size to a desired average temperature. A heat pipe is a closed system that utilizes phase change of fluid in the heat pipe to transport heat applied to a first region to a second region remote from the first region. The phase change of the fluid allows for large heat transfer rates. Heat may be applied to the first region of the heat pipes from any type of heat source, including but not limited to, electric heaters, oxidizers, heat provided from geothermal sources, and/or heat provided from nuclear reactors.

[0885] Heat pipes are passive heat transport systems that include no moving parts. Heat pipes may be positioned in near horizontal to vertical configurations. The fluid used in heat pipes for heating the formation may have a low cost, a low melting temperature, a boiling temperature that is not too high (e.g., generally below about 900° C.), a low viscosity at temperatures below above about 540° C., a high heat of vaporization, and a low corrosion rate for the heat pipe material. In some embodiments, the heat pipe includes a liner of material that is resistant to corrosion by the fluid. TABLE 1 shows melting and boiling temperatures for several materials that may be used as the fluid in heat pipes. Other salts that may be used include, but are not limited to LiNO₃, and eutectic mixtures such as 53% by weight KNO₃; 40% by weight NaNO₃ and 7% by weight NaNO₂; 45.5% by weight KNO₃ and 54.5% by weight NaNO₂; or 50% by weight NaCl and 50% by weight SrCl₂.

[0886] FIG. 74 depicts schematic cross-sectional representation of a portion of the formation with heat pipes 598 positioned adjacent to a substantially horizontal portion of heat source 202. Heat source 202 is placed in a wellbore in the formation. Heat source 202 may be a gas burner assembly, an electrical heater, a leg of a circulation system that circulates hot fluid through the formation, or other type of heat source. Heat pipes 598 may be placed in the formation so that distal ends of the heat pipes are near or contact heat source 202. In some embodiments, heat pipes 598 mechanically attach to heat source 202. Heat pipes 598 may be spaced a desired distance apart. In an embodiment, heat pipes 598 are spaced apart by about 40 feet. In other embodiments, large or smaller spacings are used. Heat pipes 598 may be placed in a regular pattern with each heat pipe spaced a given distance from the next heat pipe. In some embodiments, heat pipes 598 are placed in an irregular pattern. An irregular pattern may be used to provide a greater amount of heat to a selected portion or portions of the formation. Heat pipes 598 may be vertically positioned in the formation. In some embodiments, heat pipes 598 are placed at an angle in the formation.

[0887] Heat pipes 598 may include sealed conduit 600, seal 602, liquid heat transfer fluid 604 and vaporized heat transfer fluid 606. In some embodiments, heat pipes 598 include metal mesh or wicking material that increases the surface area for condensation and/or promotes flow of the heat transfer fluid in the heat pipe. Conduit 600 may have first portion 608 and second portion 610. Liquid heat transfer fluid 604 may be in first portion 608. Heat source 202 external to heat pipe 598 supplies heat that vaporizes liquid heat transfer fluid 604. Vaporized heat transfer fluid 606 diffuses into second portion 610. Vaporized heat transfer fluid 606 condenses in second portion and transfers heat to conduit 600, which in turn transfers heat to the formation. The condensed liquid heat transfer fluid 604 flows by gravity to first portion 608.

[0888] Position of seal 602 is a factor in determining the effective length of heat pipe 598. The effective length of heat pipe 598 may also depend on the physical properties of the heat transfer fluid and the cross-sectional area of conduit 600. Enough heat transfer fluid may be placed in conduit 600 so that some liquid heat transfer fluid 604 is present in first portion 608 at all times.

[0889] Seal 602 may provide a top seal for conduit 600. In some embodiments, conduit 600 is purged with nitrogen, helium or other fluid prior to being loaded with heat transfer fluid and sealed. In some embodiments, a vacuum may be drawn on conduit 600 to evacuate the conduit before the conduit is sealed. Drawing a vacuum on conduit 600 before sealing the conduit may enhance vapor diffusion throughout the conduit. In some embodiments, an oxygen getter may be introduced in conduit 600 to react with any oxygen present in the conduit.

[0890] FIG. 75 depicts a perspective cut-out representation of a portion of a heat pipe embodiment with heat pipe 598 located radially around oxidizer assembly 612. Oxidizers 614 of oxidizer assembly 612 are positioned adjacent to first portion 608 of heat pipe 598. Fuel may be supplied to oxidizers 614 through fuel conduit 616. Oxidant may be supplied to oxidizers 614 through oxidant conduit 618. Exhaust gas may flow through the space between outer conduit 620 and oxidant conduit 618. Oxidizers 614 combust fuel to provide heat that vaporizes liquid heat transfer fluid 604. Vaporized heat transfer fluid 606 rises in heat pipe 598 and condenses on walls of the heat pipe to transfer heat to sealed conduit 600. Exhaust gas from oxidizers 614 provides heat along the length of sealed conduit 600. The heat provided by the exhaust gas along the effective length of heat pipe 598 may increase convective heat transfer and/or reduce the lag time before significant heat is provided to the formation from the heat pipe along the effective length of the heat pipe.

[0891] FIG. 76 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an angled heat pipe embodiment with oxidizer assembly 612 located near a lowermost portion of heat pipe 598. Fuel may be supplied to oxidizers 614 through fuel conduit 616. Oxidant may be supplied to oxidizers 614 through oxidant conduit 618. Exhaust gas may flow through the space between outer conduit 620 and oxidant conduit 618.

[0892] FIG. 77 depicts a perspective cut-out representation of a portion of a heat pipe embodiment with oxidizer 614 located at the bottom of heat pipe 598. Fuel may be supplied to oxidizer 614 through fuel conduit 616. Oxidant may be supplied to oxidizer 614 through oxidant conduit 618. Exhaust gas may flow through the space between the outer wall of heat pipe 598 and outer conduit 620. Oxidizer 614 combusts fuel to provide heat that vaporizers liquid heat transfer fluid 604. Vaporized heat transfer fluid 606 rises in heat pipe 598 and condenses on walls of the heat pipe to transfer heat to sealed conduit 600. Exhaust gas from oxidizers 614 provides heat along the length of sealed conduit 600 and to outer conduit 620. The heat provided by the exhaust gas along the effective length of heat pipe 598 may increase convective heat transfer and/or reduce the lag time before significant heat is provided to the formation from the heat pipe and oxidizer combination along the effective length of the heat pipe. FIG. 78 depicts a similar embodiment with heat pipe 598 positioned at an angle in the formation.

[0893] FIG. 79 depicts a perspective cut-out representation of a portion of a heat pipe embodiment with oxidizer 614 that produces flame zone adjacent to liquid heat transfer fluid 604 in the bottom of heat pipe 598. Fuel may be supplied to oxidizer 614 through fuel conduit 616. Oxidant may be supplied to oxidizer 614 through oxidant conduit 618. Oxidant and fuel are mixed and combusted to produce flame zone 622. Flame zone 622 provides heat that vaporizes liquid heat transfer fluid 604. Exhaust gases from oxidizer 614 may flow through the space between oxidant conduit 618 and the inner surface of heat pipe 598, and through the space between the outer surface of the heat pipe and outer conduit 620. The heat provided by the exhaust gas along the effective length of heat pipe 598 may increase convective heat transfer and/or reduce the lag time before significant heat is provided to the formation from the heat pipe and oxidizer combination along the effective length of the heat pipe.

[0894] FIG. 80 depicts a perspective cut-out representation of a portion of a heat pipe embodiment with a tapered bottom that accommodates multiple oxidizers of an oxidizer assembly. In some embodiments, efficient heat pipe operation requires a high heat input. Multiple oxidizers of oxidizer assembly 612 may provide high heat input to liquid heat transfer fluid 604 of heat pipe 598. A portion of oxidizer assembly with the oxidizers may be helically wound around a tapered portion of heat pipe 598. The tapered portion may have a large surface area to accommodate the oxidizers. Fuel may be supplied to the oxidizers of oxidizer assembly 612 through fuel conduit 616. Oxidant may be supplied to oxidizer 614 through oxidant conduit 618. Exhaust gas may flow through the space between the outer wall of heat pipe 598 and outer conduit 620. Exhaust gas from oxidizers 614 provides heat along the length of sealed conduit 600 and to outer conduit 620. The heat provided by the exhaust gas along the effective length of heat pipe 598 may increase convective heat transfer and/or reduce the lag time before significant heat is provided to the formation from the heat pipe and oxidizer combination along the effective length of the heat pipe.

[0895] FIG. 81 depicts a cross-sectional representation of a heat pipe embodiment that is angled within the formation. First wellbore 624 and second wellbore 626 are drilled in the formation using magnetic ranging or techniques so that the first wellbore intersects the second wellbore. Heat pipe 598 may be positioned in first wellbore 624. First wellbore 624 may be sloped so that liquid heat transfer fluid 604 within heat pipe 598 is positioned near the intersection of the first wellbore and second wellbore 626. Oxidizer assembly 612 may be positioned in second wellbore 626. Oxidizer assembly 612 provides heat to heat pipe that vaporizes liquid heat transfer fluid in the heat pipe. Packer or seal 628 may direct exhaust gas from oxidizer assembly 612 through first wellbore 624 to provide additional heat to the formation from the exhaust gas.

[0896] In some embodiments, the temperature limited heater is used to achieve lower temperature heating (for example, for heating fluids in a production well, heating a surface pipeline, or reducing the viscosity of fluids in a wellbore or near wellbore region). Varying the ferromagnetic materials of the temperature limited heater allows for lower temperature heating. In some embodiments, the ferromagnetic conductor is made of material with a lower Curie temperature than that of 446 stainless steel. For example, the ferromagnetic conductor may be an alloy of iron and nickel. The alloy may have between 30% by weight and 42% by weight nickel with the rest being iron. In one embodiment, the alloy is Invar 36. Invar 36 is 36% by weight nickel in iron and has a Curie temperature of 277° C. In some embodiments, an alloy is a three component alloy with, for example, chromium, nickel, and iron. For example, an alloy may have 6% by weight chromium, 42% by weight nickel, and 52% by weight iron. A 2.5 cm diameter rod of Invar 36 has a turndown ratio of approximately 2 to 1 at the Curie temperature. Placing the Invar 36 alloy over a copper core may allow for a smaller rod diameter. A copper core may result in a high turndown ratio. The insulator in lower temperature heater embodiments may be made of a high performance polymer insulator (such as PFA or PEEK™) when used with alloys with a Curie temperature that is below the melting point or softening point of the polymer insulator.

[0897] In certain embodiments, a conductor-in-conduit temperature limited heater is used in lower temperature applications by using lower Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range ferromagnetic materials. For example, a lower Curie temperature and/or the phase transformation temperature range ferromagnetic material may be used for heating inside sucker pump rods. Heating sucker pump rods may be useful to lower the viscosity of fluids in the sucker pump or rod and/or to maintain a lower viscosity of fluids in the sucker pump rod. Lowering the viscosity of the oil may inhibit sticking of a pump used to pump the fluids. Fluids in the sucker pump rod may be heated up to temperatures less than about 250° C. or less than about 300° C. Temperatures need to be maintained below these values to inhibit coking of hydrocarbon fluids in the sucker pump system.

[0898] In certain embodiments, a temperature limited heater includes a flexible cable (for example, a furnace cable) as the inner conductor. For example, the inner conductor may be a 27% nickel-clad or stainless steel-clad stranded copper wire with four layers of mica tape surrounded by a layer of ceramic and/or mineral fiber (for example, alumina fiber, aluminosilicate fiber, borosilicate fiber, or aluminoborosilicate fiber). A stainless steel-clad stranded copper wire furnace cable may be available from Anomet Products, Inc. The inner conductor may be rated for applications at temperatures of 1000° C. or higher. The inner conductor may be pulled inside a conduit. The conduit may be a ferromagnetic conduit (for example, a ¾″ Schedule 80 446 stainless steel pipe). The conduit may be covered with a layer of copper, or other electrical conductor, with a thickness of about 0.3 cm or any other suitable thickness. The assembly may be placed inside a support conduit (for example, a 1¼″ Schedule 80 347H or 347HH stainless steel tubular). The support conduit may provide additional creep-rupture strength and protection for the copper and the inner conductor. For uses at temperatures greater than about 1000° C., the inner copper conductor may be plated with a more corrosion resistant alloy (for example, Incoloy® 825) to inhibit oxidation. In some embodiments, the top of the temperature limited heater is sealed to inhibit air from contacting the inner conductor.

[0899] The temperature limited heater may be a single-phase heater or a three-phase heater. In a three-phase heater embodiment, the temperature limited heater has a delta or a wye configuration. Each of the three ferromagnetic conductors in the three-phase heater may be inside a separate sheath. A connection between conductors may be made at the bottom of the heater inside a splice section. The three conductors may remain insulated from the sheath inside the splice section.

[0900] FIG. 82 depicts an embodiment of a three-phase temperature limited heater with ferromagnetic inner conductors. Each leg 632 has inner conductor 532, core 542, and jacket 540. Inner conductors 532 are ferritic stainless steel or 1% carbon steel. Inner conductors 532 have core 542. Core 542 may be copper. Each inner conductor 532 is coupled to its own jacket 540. Jacket 540 is a sheath made of a corrosion resistant material (such as 304H stainless steel). Electrical insulator 534 is placed between inner conductor 532 and jacket 540. Inner conductor 532 is ferritic stainless steel or carbon steel with an outside diameter of 1.14 cm and a thickness of 0.445 cm. Core 542 is a copper core with a 0.25 cm diameter. Each leg 632 of the heater is coupled to terminal block 634. Terminal block 634 is filled with insulation material 636 and has an outer surface of stainless steel. Insulation material 636 is, in some embodiments, silicon nitride, boron nitride, magnesium oxide or other suitable electrically insulating material. Inner conductors 532 of legs 632 are coupled (welded) in terminal block 634. Jackets 540 of legs 632 are coupled (welded) to the outer surface of terminal block 634. Terminal block 634 may include two halves coupled around the coupled portions of legs 632.

[0901] In some embodiments, the three-phase heater includes three legs that are located in separate wellbores. The legs may be coupled in a common contacting section (for example, a central wellbore, a connecting wellbore, or a solution filled contacting section). FIG. 83 depicts an embodiment of temperature limited heaters coupled in a three-phase configuration. Each leg 638, 640, 642 may be located in separate openings 556 in hydrocarbon layer 484. Each leg 638, 640, 642 may include heating element 644. Each leg 638, 640, 642 may be coupled to single contacting element 646 in one opening 556. Contacting element 646 may electrically couple legs 638, 640, 642 together in a three-phase configuration. Contacting element 646 may be located in, for example, a central opening in the formation. Contacting element 646 may be located in a portion of opening 556 below hydrocarbon layer 484 (for example, in the underburden). In certain embodiments, magnetic tracking of a magnetic element located in a central opening (for example, opening 556 of leg 640) is used to guide the formation of the outer openings (for example, openings 556 of legs 638 and 642) so that the outer openings intersect the central opening. The central opening may be formed first using standard wellbore drilling methods. Contacting element 646 may include funnels, guides, or catchers for allowing each leg to be inserted into the contacting element.

[0902] FIG. 84 depicts an embodiment of three heaters coupled in a three-phase configuration. Conductor “legs” 638, 640, 642 are coupled to three-phase transformer 648. Transformer 648 may be an isolated three-phase transformer. In certain embodiments, transformer 648 provides three-phase output in a wye configuration. Input to transformer 648 may be made in any input configuration, such as the shown delta configuration. Legs 638, 640, 642 each include lead-in conductors 650 in the overburden of the formation coupled to heating elements 644 in hydrocarbon layer 484. Lead-in conductors 650 include copper with an insulation layer. For example, lead-in conductors 650 may be a 4-0 copper cables with TEFLON® insulation, a copper rod with polyurethane insulation, or other metal conductors such as bare copper or aluminum. In certain embodiments, lead-in conductors 650 are located in an overburden portion of the formation. The overburden portion may include overburden casings 564. Heating elements 644 may be temperature limited heater heating elements. In an embodiment, heating elements 644 are 410 stainless steel rods (for example, 3.1 cm diameter 410 stainless steel rods). In some embodiments, heating elements 644 are composite temperature limited heater heating elements (for example, 347 stainless steel, 410 stainless steel, copper composite heating elements; 347 stainless steel, iron, copper composite heating elements; or 410 stainless steel and copper composite heating elements). In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 have a length of at least about 10 m to about 2000 m, about 20 m to about 400 m, or about 30 m to about 300 m.

[0903] In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 are exposed to hydrocarbon layer 484 and fluids from the hydrocarbon layer. Thus, heating elements 644 are “bare metal” or “exposed metal” heating elements. Heating elements 644 may be made from a material that has an acceptable sulfidation rate at high temperatures used for pyrolyzing hydrocarbons. In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 are made from material that has a sulfidation rate that decreases with increasing temperature over at least a certain temperature range (for example, 500° C. to 650° C., 530° C. to 650° C., or 550° C. to 650° C.). For example, 410 stainless steel may have a sulfidation rate that decreases with increasing temperature between 530° C. and 650° C. Using such materials reduces corrosion problems due to sulfur-containing gases (such as H₂S) from the formation. In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 are made from material that has a sulfidation rate below a selected value in a temperature range. In some embodiments, heating elements 644 are made from material that has a sulfidation rate at most about 25 mils per year at a temperature between about 800° C. and about 880° C. In some embodiments, the sulfidation rate is at most about 35 mils per year at a temperature between about 800° C. and about 880° C., at most about 45 mils per year at a temperature between about 800° C. and about 880° C., or at most about 55 mils per year at a temperature between about 800° C. and about 880° C. Heating elements 644 may also be substantially inert to galvanic corrosion.

[0904] In some embodiments, heating elements 644 have a thin electrically insulating layer such as aluminum oxide or thermal spray coated aluminum oxide. In some embodiments, the thin electrically insulating layer is a ceramic composition such as an enamel coating. Enamel coatings include, but are not limited to, high temperature porcelain enamels. High temperature porcelain enamels may include silicon dioxide, boron oxide, alumina, and alkaline earth oxides (CaO or MgO), and minor amounts of alkali oxides (Na₂O, K₂O, LiO). The enamel coating may be applied as a finely ground slurry by dipping the heating element into the slurry or spray coating the heating element with the slurry. The coated heating element is then heated in a furnace until the glass transition temperature is reached so that the slurry spreads over the surface of the heating element and makes the porcelain enamel coating. The porcelain enamel coating contracts when cooled below the glass transition temperature so that the coating is in compression. Thus, when the coating is heated during operation of the heater, the coating is able to expand with the heater without cracking.

[0905] The thin electrically insulating layer has low thermal impedance allowing heat transfer from the heating element to the formation while inhibiting current leakage between heating elements in adjacent openings and/or current leakage into the formation. In certain embodiments, the thin electrically insulating layer is stable at temperatures above at least 350° C., above 500° C., or above 800° C. In certain embodiments, the thin electrically insulating layer has an emissivity of at least 0.7, at least 0.8, or at least 0.9. Using the thin electrically insulating layer may allow for long heater lengths in the formation with low current leakage.

[0906] Heating elements 644 may be coupled to contacting elements 646 at or near the underburden of the formation. Contacting elements 646 are copper or aluminum rods or other highly conductive materials. In certain embodiments, transition sections 652 are located between lead-in conductors 650 and heating elements 644, and/or between heating elements 644 and contacting elements 646. Transition sections 652 may be made of a conductive material that is corrosion resistant such as 347 stainless steel over a copper core. In certain embodiments, transition sections 652 are made of materials that electrically couple lead-in conductors 650 and heating elements 644 while providing little or no heat output. Thus, transition sections 652 help to inhibit overheating of conductors and insulation used in lead-in conductors 650 by spacing the lead-in conductors from heating elements 644. Transition section 652 may have a length of between about 3 m and about 9 m (for example, about 6 m).

[0907] Contacting elements 646 are coupled to contactor 654 in contacting section 656 to electrically couple legs 638, 640, 642 to each other. In some embodiments, contact solution 658 (for example, conductive cement) is placed in contacting section 656 to electrically couple contacting elements 646 in the contacting section. In certain embodiments, legs 638, 640, 642 are substantially parallel in hydrocarbon layer 484 and leg 638 continues substantially vertically into contacting section 656. The other two legs 640, 642 are directed (for example, by directionally drilling the wellbores for the legs) to intercept leg 638 in contacting section 656.

[0908] Each leg 638, 640, 642 may be one leg of a three-phase heater embodiment so that the legs are substantially electrically isolated from other heaters in the formation and are substantially electrically isolated from the formation. Legs 638, 640, 642 may be arranged in a triangular pattern so that the three legs form a triangular shaped three-phase heater. In an embodiment, legs 638, 640, 642 are arranged in a triangular pattern with 12 m spacing between the legs (each side of the triangle has a length of 12 m).

[0909] FIG. 85 depicts a side view representation of an embodiment of centralizer 558 on heater 438. FIG. 86 depicts an end view representation of the embodiment of centralizer 558 on heater 438 depicted in FIG. 85. In certain embodiments, centralizers 558 are made of three or more parts coupled to heater 438 so that the parts are spaced around the outside diameter of the heater. Having spaces between the parts of a centralizer allows debris to fall along the heater (when the heater is vertical or substantially vertical) and inhibit debris from collecting at the centralizer. In certain embodiments, the centralizer is installed on a long heater without inserting a ring. In certain embodiments, heater 438, as depicted in FIGS. 85 and 86, is an electrical conductor used as part of a heater (for example, the electrical conductor of a conductor-in-conduit heater). In certain embodiments, centralizer 558 includes three centralizer parts 558A, 558B, and 558C. In other embodiments, centralizer 558 includes four or more centralizer parts. Centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C may be evenly distributed around the outside diameter of heater 438.

[0910] In certain embodiments, centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C include insulators 660 and weld bases 662. Insulators 660 may be made of electrically insulating material such as, but not limited to, ceramic (for example, magnesium oxide) or silicon nitride. Weld bases 662 may be made of weldable metal such as, but not limited to, Alloy 625, the same metal used for heater 438, or another metal that may be brazed or solid state welded to insulators 660 and welded to a metal used for heater 438.

[0911] In certain embodiments, insulators 660 are brazed, or otherwise coupled, to weld bases 662 to form centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C. In some embodiments, weld bases 662 are coupled to heater 438 first and then insulators 660 are coupled to the weld bases to form centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C. Insulators 660 may be coupled to weld bases 662 as the heater is being installed into the formation.

[0912] In certain embodiments, centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C are spaced evenly around the outside diameter of heater 438, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86. In other embodiments, centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C have other spacings around the outside diameter of heater 438.

[0913] Having space between centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C allows installation of the heaters and centralizers from a spool or coiled tubing installation of the heaters and centralizers. Centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C also allow debris (for example, metal dust or pieces of formation) to fall along heater 438 through the area of the centralizer. Thus, debris is inhibited from collecting at or near centralizer 558. In addition, centralizer parts 558A, 558B, 558C may be inexpensive to manufacture and install and easy to replace if broken.

[0914] FIG. 87 depicts a side view representation of an embodiment of a substantially u-shaped three-phase heater. First ends of legs 638, 640, 642 are coupled to transformer 648 at first location 664. In an embodiment, transformer 648 is a three-phase AC transformer. Ends of legs 638, 640, 642 are electrically coupled together with connector 666 at second location 668. Connector 666 electrically couples the ends of legs 638, 640, 642 so that the legs can be operated in a three-phase configuration. In certain embodiments, legs 638, 640, 642 are coupled to operate in a three-phase wye configuration. In certain embodiments, legs 638, 640, 642 are substantially parallel in hydrocarbon layer 484. In certain embodiments, legs 638, 640, 642 are arranged in a triangular pattern in hydrocarbon layer 484. In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 include thin electrically insulating material (such as a porcelain enamel coating) to inhibit current leakage from the heating elements. In certain embodiments, the thin electrically insulating layer allows for relatively long, substantially horizontal heater leg lengths in the hydrocarbon layer with a substantially u-shaped heater. In certain embodiments, legs 638, 640, 642 are electrically coupled so that the legs are substantially electrically isolated from other heaters in the formation and are substantially electrically isolated from the formation.

[0915] In certain embodiments, overburden casings (for example, overburden casings 564, depicted in FIGS. 84 and 87) in overburden 482 include materials that inhibit ferromagnetic effects in the casings. Inhibiting ferromagnetic effects in casings 564 reduces heat losses to the overburden. In some embodiments, casings 564 may include non-metallic materials such as fiberglass, polyvinylchloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinylchloride (CPVC), or high-density polyethylene (HDPE). HDPEs with working temperatures in a range for use in overburden 482 include HDPEs available from Dow Chemical Co., Inc. (Midland, Mich., U.S.A.). A non-metallic casing may also eliminate the need for an insulated overburden conductor. In some embodiments, casings 564 include carbon steel coupled on the inside diameter of a non-ferromagnetic metal (for example, carbon steel clad with copper or aluminum) to inhibit ferromagnetic effects or inductive effects in the carbon steel. Other non-ferromagnetic metals include, but are not limited to, manganese steels with at least 10% by weight manganese, iron aluminum alloys with at least 18% by weight aluminum, and austentitic stainless steels such as 304 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel.

[0916] In certain embodiments, one or more non-ferromagnetic materials used in casings 564 are used in a wellhead coupled to the casings and legs 638, 640, 642. Using non-ferromagnetic materials in the wellhead inhibits undesirable heating of components in the wellhead. In some embodiments, a purge gas (for example, carbon dioxide, nitrogen or argon) is introduced into the wellhead and/or inside of casings 564 to inhibit reflux of heated gases into the wellhead and/or the casings.

[0917] In certain embodiments, one or more of legs 638, 640, 642 are installed in the formation using coiled tubing. In certain embodiments, coiled tubing is installed in the formation, the leg is installed inside the coiled tubing, and the coiled tubing is pulled out of the formation to leave the leg installed in the formation. The leg may be placed concentrically inside the coiled tubing. In some embodiments, coiled tubing with the leg inside the coiled tubing is installed in the formation and the coiled tubing is removed from the formation to leave the leg installed in the formation. The coiled tubing may extend only to a junction of the hydrocarbon layer and the contacting section, or to a point at which the leg begins to bend in the contacting section.

[0918] FIG. 88 depicts a top view representation of an embodiment of a plurality of triads of three-phase heaters in the formation. Each triad 670 includes legs A, B, C (which may correspond to legs 638, 640, 642 depicted in FIGS. 84 and 87) that are electrically coupled by linkage 674. Each triad 670 is coupled to its own electrically isolated three-phase transformer so that the triads are substantially electrically isolated from each other. Electrically isolating the triads inhibits net current flow between triads.

[0919] The phases of each triad 670 may be arranged so that legs A, B, C correspond between triads as shown in FIG. 88. In FIG. 88, legs A, B, C are arranged such that a phase leg (for example, leg A) in a given triad is about two triad heights from a same phase leg (leg A) in an adjacent triad. The triad height is the distance from a vertex of the triad to a midpoint of the line intersecting the other two vertices of the triad. In certain embodiments, the phases of triads 670 are arranged to inhibit net current flow between individual triads. There may be some leakage of current within an individual triad but little net current flows between two triads due to the substantial electrical isolation of the triads and, in certain embodiments, the arrangement of the triad phases.

[0920] In the early stages of heating, an exposed heating element (for example, heating element 644 depicted in FIGS. 84 and 87) may leak some current to water or other fluids that are electrically conductive in the formation so that the formation itself is heated. After water or other electrically conductive fluids are removed from the wellbore (for example, vaporized or produced), the heating elements become electrically isolated from the formation. Later, when water is removed from the formation, the formation becomes even more electrically resistant and heating of the formation occurs even more predominantly via thermally conductive and/or radiative heating. Typically, the formation (the hydrocarbon layer) has an initial electrical resistance that averages at least 10 ohm·m. In some embodiments, the formation has an initial electrical resistance of at least 100 ohm·m or of at least 300 ohm·m.

[0921] Using the temperature limited heaters as the heating elements limits the effect of water saturation on heater efficiency. With water in the formation and in heater wellbores, there is a tendency for electrical current to flow between heater elements at the top of the hydrocarbon layer where the voltage is highest and cause uneven heating in the hydrocarbon layer. This effect is inhibited with temperature limited heaters because the temperature limited heaters reduce localized overheating in the heating elements and in the hydrocarbon layer.

[0922] In certain embodiments, production wells are placed at a location at which there is relatively little or zero voltage potential. This location minimizes stray potentials at the production well. Placing production wells at such locations improves the safety of the system and reduces or inhibits undesired heating of the production wells caused by electrical current flow in the production wells. FIG. 89 depicts a top view representation of the embodiment depicted in FIG. 88 with production wells 206. In certain embodiments, production wells 206 are located at or near center of triad 670. In certain embodiments, production wells 206 are placed at a location between triads at which there is relatively little or zero voltage potential (at a location at which voltage potentials from vertices of three triads average out to relatively little or zero voltage potential). For example, production well 206 may be at a location equidistant from legs A of one triad, leg B of a second triad, and leg C of a third triad, as shown in FIG. 89.

[0923] FIG. 90 depicts a top view representation of an embodiment of a plurality of triads of three-phase heaters in a hexagonal pattern in the formation. FIG. 91 depicts a top view representation of an embodiment of a hexagon from FIG. 90. Hexagon 672 includes two triads of heaters. The first triad includes legs A1, B1, C1 electrically coupled together by linkages 674 in a three-phase configuration. The second triad includes legs A2, B2, C2 electrically coupled together by linkages 674 in a three-phase configuration. The triads are arranged so that corresponding legs of the triads (for example, A1 and A2, B1 and B2, C1 and C2) are at opposite vertices of hexagon 672. The triads are electrically coupled and arranged so that there is relatively little or zero voltage potential at or near the center of hexagon 672.

[0924] Production well 206 may be placed at or near the center of hexagon 672. Placing production well 206 at or near the center of hexagon 672 places the production well at a location that reduces or inhibits undesired heating due to electromagnetic effects caused by electrical current flow in the legs of the triads and increases the safety of the system. Having two triads in hexagon 672 provides for redundant heating around production well 206. Thus, if one triad fails or has to be turned off, production well 206 still remains at a center of one triad.

[0925] As shown in FIG. 90, hexagons 672 may be arranged in a pattern in the formation such that adjacent hexagons are offset. Using electrically isolated transformers on adjacent hexagons may inhibit electrical potentials in the formation so that little or no net current leaks between hexagons.

[0926] Triads of heaters and/or heater legs may be arranged in any shape or desired pattern. For example, as described above, triads may include three heaters and/or heater legs arranged in an equilateral triangular pattern. In some embodiments, triads include three heaters and/or heater legs arranged in other triangular shapes (for example, an isosceles triangle or a right angle triangle). In some embodiments, heater legs in the triad cross each other (for example, criss-cross) in the formation. In certain embodiments, triads includes three heaters and/or heater legs arranged sequentially along a straight line.

[0927] Distal sections of the heater legs may be electrically coupled together. The distal sections may be electrically coupled to a connector or to each other. In certain embodiments, contacting elements of the heater legs are physically coupled to establish the electrical coupling. For example, heater legs may be electrically coupled by soldering, by welding, by explosive crimping, by interconnecting brush contacts and/or by other techniques that involve physically attaching the legs to each other or to a connector. In some embodiments, the contacting elements of the heater legs are placed in a contacting solution or other electrically conductive material to electrically couple the heater legs together.

[0928] FIG. 92 depicts an embodiment with triads coupled to a horizontal connector well. Triad 670A includes legs 638A, 640A, 642A. Triad 670B includes legs 638B, 640B, 642B. Legs 638A, 640A, 642A and legs 638B, 640B, 642B may be arranged along a straight line on the surface of the formation. In some embodiments, legs 638A, 640A, 642A are arranged along a straight line and offset from legs 638B, 640B, 642B, which may be arranged along a straight line. Legs 638A, 640A, 642A and legs 638B, 640B, 642B include heating elements 644 located in hydrocarbon layer 484. Lead-in conductors 650 couple heating elements 644 to the surface of the formation. Heating elements 644 are coupled to contacting elements 646 at or near the underburden of the formation. In certain embodiments, transition sections (for example, transition sections 652 depicted in FIG. 84) are located between lead-in conductors 650 and heating elements 644, and/or between heating elements 644 and contacting elements 646.

[0929] Contacting elements 646 are coupled to contactor 654 in contacting section 656 to electrically couple legs 638A, 640A, 642A to each other to form triad 670A and electrically couple legs 638B, 640B, 642B to each other to form triad 670B. In certain embodiments, contactor 654 is a ground conductor so that triad 670A and/or triad 670B may be coupled in three-phase wye configurations. In certain embodiments, triad 670A and triad 670B are electrically isolated from each other. In some embodiments, triad 670A and triad 670B are electrically coupled to each other (for example, electrically coupled in series or parallel).

[0930] In certain embodiments, contactor 654 is a substantially horizontal contactor located in contacting section 656. Contactor 654 may be a casing or a solid rod placed in a wellbore drilled substantially horizontally in contacting section 656. Legs 638A, 640A, 642A and legs 638B, 640B, 642B may be electrically coupled to contactor 654 by any method described herein or any method known in the art. For example, containers with thermite powder are coupled to contactor 654 (for example, by welding or brazing the containers to the contactor); legs 638A, 640A, 642A and legs 638B, 640B, 642B are placed inside the containers; and the thermite powder is activated to electrically couple the legs to the contactor. The containers may be coupled to contactor 654 by, for example, placing the containers in holes or recesses in contactor 654 or coupled to the outside of the contactor and then brazing or welding the containers to the contactor.

[0931] In certain embodiments, two legs in separate wellbores intercept in a single contacting section. FIG. 93 depicts an embodiment of two temperature limited heaters coupled in a single contacting section. Legs 638 and 640 include one or more heating elements 644. Heating elements 644 may include one or more electrical conductors. In certain embodiments, legs 638 and 640 are electrically coupled in a single-phase configuration with one leg positively biased versus the other leg so that current flows downhole through one leg and returns through the other leg.

[0932] Heating elements 644 in legs 638 and 640 may be temperature limited heaters. In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 are solid rod heaters. For example, heating elements 644 may be rods made of a single ferromagnetic conductor element or composite conductors that include ferromagnetic material. During initial heating when water is present in the formation being heated, heating elements 644 may leak current into hydrocarbon layer 484. The current leaked into hydrocarbon layer 484 may resistively heat the hydrocarbon layer.

[0933] In some embodiments (for example, in oil shale formations), heating elements 644 do not need support members. Heating elements 644 may be partially or slightly bent, curved, made into an S-shape, or made into a helical shape to allow for expansion and/or contraction of the heating elements. In certain embodiments, solid rod heating elements 644 are placed in small diameter wellbores (for example, about 3¾″ (about 9.5 cm) diameter wellbores). Small diameter wellbores may be less expensive to drill or form than larger diameter wellbores, and there will be less cuttings to dispose of.

[0934] In certain embodiments, portions of legs 638 and 640 in overburden 482 have insulation (for example, polymer insulation) to inhibit heating the overburden. Heating elements 644 may be substantially vertical and substantially parallel to each other in hydrocarbon layer 484. At or near the bottom of hydrocarbon layer 484, leg 638 may be directionally drilled towards leg 640 to intercept leg 640 in contacting section 656. Drilling two wellbores to intercept each other may be easier and less expensive than drilling three or more wellbores to intercept each other. The depth of contacting section 656 depends on the length of bend in leg 638 needed to intercept leg 640. For example, for a 40 ft (about 12 m) spacing between vertical portions of legs 638 and 640, about 200 ft (about 61 m) is needed to allow the bend of leg 638 to intercept leg 640. Coupling two legs may require a thinner contacting section 656 than coupling three or more legs in the contacting section.

[0935] FIG. 94 depicts an embodiment for coupling legs 638 and 640 in contacting section 656. Heating elements 644 are coupled to contacting elements 646 at or near junction of contacting section 656 and hydrocarbon layer 484. Contacting elements 646 may be copper or another suitable electrical conductor. In certain embodiments, contacting element 646 in leg 640 is a liner with opening 676. Contacting element 646 from leg 638 passes through opening 676. Contactor 654 is coupled to the end of contacting element 646 from leg 638. Contactor 654 provides electrical coupling between contacting elements in legs 638 and 640.

[0936] In certain embodiments, contacting elements 646 include one or more fins or projections. The fins or projections may increase an electrical contact area of contacting elements 646. In some embodiments, contacting element 646 of leg 640 has an opening or other orifice that allows the contacting element of 638 to couple to the contacting element of leg 640.

[0937] In certain embodiments, legs 638 and 640 are coupled together to form a diad. Three diads may be coupled to a three-phase transformer to power the legs of the heaters. FIG. 95 depicts an embodiment of three diads coupled to a three-phase transformer. In certain embodiments, transformer 648 is a delta three-phase transformer. Diad 678A includes legs 638A and 640A. Diad 678B includes legs 638B and 640B. Diad 678C includes legs 638C and 640C. Diads 678A, 678B, 678C are coupled to the secondaries of transformer 648. Diad 678A is coupled to the “A” secondary. Diad 678B is coupled to the “B” secondary. Diad 678C is coupled to the “C” secondary.

[0938] Coupling the diads to the secondaries of the delta three-phase transformer isolates the diads from ground. Isolating the diads from ground inhibits leakage to the formation from the diads. Coupling the diads to different phases of the delta three-phase transformer also inhibits leakage between the heating legs of the diads in the formation.

[0939] In some embodiments, diads are used for treating formations using triangular or hexagonal heater patterns. FIG. 96 depicts an embodiment of groups of diads in a hexagonal pattern. Heaters may be placed at the vertices of each of the hexagons in the hexagonal pattern. Each group 680 of diads (enclosed by dashed circles) may be coupled to a separate three-phase transformer. “A”, “B”, and “C” inside groups 680 represent each diad (for example, diads 678A, 678B, 678C depicted in FIG. 95) that is coupled to each of the three secondary phases of the transformer with each phase coupled to one diad (with the heaters at the vertices of the hexagon). The numbers “1”, “2”, and “3” inside the hexagons represent the three repeating types of hexagons in the pattern depicted in FIG. 96.

[0940] FIG. 97 depicts an embodiment of diads in a triangular pattern. Three diads 678A, 678B, 678C may be enclosed in each group 680 of diads (enclosed by dashed rectangles). Each group 680 may be coupled to a separate three-phase transformer.

[0941] In certain embodiments, exposed metal heating elements are used in substantially horizontal sections of u-shaped wellbores. Substantially u-shaped wellbores may be used in tar sands formations, oil shale formation, or other formations with relatively thin hydrocarbon layers. Tar sands or thin oil shale formations may have thin shallow layers that are more easily and uniformly heated using heaters placed in substantially u-shaped wellbores. Substantially u-shaped wellbores may also be used to process formations with thick hydrocarbon layers. In some embodiments, substantially u-shaped wellbores are used to access rich layers in a thick hydrocarbon formation.

[0942] Heaters in substantially u-shaped wellbores may have long lengths compared to heaters in vertical wellbores because horizontal heating sections do not have problems with creep or hanging stress encountered with vertical heating elements. Substantially u-shaped wellbores may make use of natural seals in the formation and/or the limited thickness of the hydrocarbon layer. For example, the wellbores may be placed above or below natural seals in the formation without punching large numbers of holes in the natural seals, as would be needed with vertically oriented wellbores. Using substantially u-shaped wellbores instead of vertical wellbores may also reduce the number of wells needed to treat a surface footprint of the formation. Using less wells reduces capital costs for equipment and reduces the environmental impact of treating the formation by reducing the amount of wellbores on the surface and the amount of equipment on the surface. Substantially u-shaped wellbores may also utilize a lower ratio of overburden section to heated section than vertical wellbores.

[0943] Substantially u-shaped wellbores may allow for flexible placement of opening of the wellbores on the surface. Openings to the wellbores may be placed according to the surface topology of the formation. In certain embodiments, the openings of wellbores are placed at geographically accessible locations such as topological highs (for examples, hills). For example, the wellbore may have a first opening on a first topologic high and a second opening on a second topologic high and the wellbore crosses beneath a topologic low (for example, a valley with alluvial fill) between the first and second topologic highs. This placement of the openings may avoid placing openings or equipment in topologic lows or other inaccessible locations. In addition, the water level may not be artesian in topologically high areas. Wellbores may be drilled so that the openings are not located near environmentally sensitive areas such as, but not limited to, streams, nesting areas, or animal refuges.

[0944] FIG. 98 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of a heater with an exposed metal heating element placed in a substantially u-shaped wellbore. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C have first end portions at first location 664 on surface 568 of the formation and second end portions at second location 668 on the surface. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C have sections 682 in overburden 482. Sections 682 are configured to provide little or no heat output. In certain embodiments, sections 682 include an insulated electrical conductor such as insulated copper. Sections 682 are coupled to heating elements 644.

[0945] In certain embodiments, portions of heating elements 644 are substantially parallel in hydrocarbon layer 484. In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 are exposed metal heating elements. In certain embodiments, heating elements 644 are exposed metal temperature limited heating elements. Heating elements 644 may include ferromagnetic materials such as 9% by weight to 13% by weight chromium stainless steel like 410 stainless steel, chromium stainless steels such as T/P91 or T/P92, 409 stainless steel, VM12 (Vallourec and Mannesmann Tubes, France) or iron-cobalt alloys for use as temperature limited heaters. In some embodiments, heating elements 644 are composite temperature limited heating elements such as 410 stainless steel and copper composite heating elements or 347H, iron, copper composite heating elements. Heating elements 644 may have lengths of at least about 100 m, at least about 500 m, or at least about 1000 m, up to lengths of about 6000 m.

[0946] Heating elements 644 may be solid rods or tubulars. In certain embodiments, solid rod heating elements have diameters several times the skin depth at the Curie temperature of the ferromagnetic material. Typically, the solid rod heating elements may have diameters of 1.91 cm or larger (for example, 2.5 cm, 3.2 cm, 3.81 cm, or 5.1 cm). In certain embodiments, tubular heating elements have wall thicknesses of at least twice the skin depth at the Curie temperature of the ferromagnetic material. Typically, the tubular heating elements have outside diameters of between about 2.5 cm and about 15.2 cm and wall thickness in range between about 0.13 cm and about 1.01 cm.

[0947] In certain embodiments, tubular heating elements 644 allow fluids to be convected through the tubular heating elements. Fluid flowing through the tubular heating elements may be used to preheat the tubular heating elements to initially heat the formation and/or to recover heat from the formation after heating is completed for the in situ heat treatment process. Fluids that may flow through the tubular heating elements include, but are not limited to, air, water, steam, helium, carbon dioxide or other fluids. In some embodiments, a hot fluid, such as carbon dioxide or helium, flows through the tubular heating elements to provide heat to the formation. The hot fluid may be used to provide heat to the formation before electrical heating is used to provide heat to the formation. In some embodiments, the hot fluid is used to provide heat in addition to electrical heating. Using the hot fluid to provide heat to the formation in addition to providing electrical heating may be less expensive than using electrical heating alone to provide heat to the formation. In some embodiments, water and/or steam flows through the tubular heating element to recover heat from the formation. The heated water and/or steam may be used for solution mining and/or other processes.

[0948] Transition sections 684 may couple heating elements 644 to sections 682. In certain embodiments, transition sections 684 include material that has a high electrical conductivity but is corrosion resistant, such as 347 stainless steel over copper. In an embodiment, transition sections include a composite of stainless steel clad over copper. Transition sections 684 inhibit overheating of copper and/or insulation in sections 682.

[0949] FIG. 99 depicts a top view representation of an embodiment of a surface pattern of the heaters depicted in FIG. 98. Heaters 438A-L may be arranged in a repeating triangular pattern on the surface of the formation. A triangle may be formed by heaters 438A, 438B, and 438C and a triangle formed by heaters 438C, 438D, and 438E. In some embodiments, heaters 438A-L are arranged in a straight line on the surface of the formation. Heaters 438A-L have first end portions at first location 664 on the surface and second end portions at second location 668 on the surface. Heaters 438A-L are arranged such that (a) the patterns at first location 664 and second location 668 correspond to each other, (b) the spacing between heaters is maintained at the two locations on the surface, and/or (c) the heaters all have substantially the same length (substantially the same horizontal distance between the end portions of the heaters on the surface as shown in the top view of FIG. 99).

[0950] As depicted in FIGS. 98 and 99, cables 686, 688 may be coupled to transformer 580 and one or more heater units, such as the heater unit including heaters 438A, 438B, 438C. Cables 686, 688 may carry a large amount of power. In certain embodiments, cables 686, 688 are capable of carrying high currents with low losses. For example, cables 686, 688 may be thick copper or aluminum conductors. The cables may also have thick insulation layers. In some embodiments, cable 686 and/or cable 688 may be superconducting cables. The superconducting cables may be cooled by liquid nitrogen. Superconducting cables are available from Superpower, Inc. (Schenectady, N.Y., U.S.A.). Superconducting cables may minimize power loss and reduce the size of the cables needed to couple transformer 580 to the heaters. In some embodiments, cables 686, 688 may be made of carbon nanotubes. Carbon nanotubes as conductors may have about 1000 times the conductivity of copper for the same diameter. Also, carbon nanotubes may not require refrigeration during use.

[0951] In certain embodiments, bus bar 690A is coupled to first end portions of heaters 438A-L and bus bar 690B is coupled to second end portions of heaters 438A-L. Bus bars 690A,B electrically couple heaters 438A-L to cables 686, 688 and transformer 580. Bus bars 690A,B distribute power to heaters 438A-L. In certain embodiments, bus bars 690A,B are capable of carrying high currents with low losses. In some embodiments, bus bars 690A,B are made of superconducting material such as the superconductor material used in cables 686, 688. In some embodiments, bus bars 690A,B may include carbon nanotube conductors.

[0952] As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, heaters 438A-L are coupled to a single transformer 580. In certain embodiments, transformer 580 is a source of time-varying current. In certain embodiments, transformer 580 is an electrically isolated, single-phase transformer. In certain embodiments, transformer 580 provides power to heaters 438A-L from an isolated secondary phase of the transformer. First end portions of heaters 438A-L may be coupled to one side of transformer 580 while second end portions of the heaters are coupled to the opposite side of the transformer. Transformer 580 provides a substantially common voltage to the first end portions of heaters 438A-L and a substantially common voltage to the second end portions of heaters 438A-L. In certain embodiments, transformer 580 applies a voltage potential to the first end portions of heaters 438A-L that is opposite in polarity and substantially equal in magnitude to a voltage potential applied to the second end portions of the heaters. For example, a +660 V potential may be applied to the first end portions of heaters 438A-L and a −660 V potential applied to the second end portions of the heaters at a selected point on the wave of time-varying current (such as AC or modulated DC). Thus, the voltages at the two end portion of the heaters may be equal in magnitude and opposite in polarity with an average voltage that is substantially at ground potential.

[0953] Applying the same voltage potentials to the end portions of all heaters 438A-L produces voltage potentials along the lengths of the heaters that are substantially the same along the lengths of the heaters. FIG. 100 depicts a cross-sectional representation, along a vertical plane, such as the plane A-A shown in FIG. 98, of substantially u-shaped heaters in a hydrocarbon layer. The voltage potential at the cross-sectional point shown in FIG. 100 along the length of heater 438A is substantially the same as the voltage potential at the corresponding cross-sectional points on heaters 438A-L shown in FIG. 100. At lines equidistant between heater wellheads, the voltage potential is approximately zero. Other wells, such as production wells or monitoring wells, may be located along these zero voltage potential lines, if desired. Production wells 206 located close to the overburden may be used to transport formation fluid that is initially in a vapor phase to the surface. Production wells located close to a bottom of the heated portion of the formation may be used to transport formation fluid that is initially in a liquid phase to the surface.

[0954] In certain embodiments, the voltage potential at the midpoint of heaters 438A-L is about zero. Having similar voltage potentials along the lengths of heaters 438A-L inhibits current leakage between the heaters. Thus, there is little or no current flow in the formation and the heaters may have long lengths as described above. Having the opposite polarity and substantially equal voltage potentials at the end portions of the heaters also halves the voltage applied at either end portion of the heater versus having one end portion of the heater grounded and one end portion at full potential. Reducing (halving) the voltage potential applied to an end portion of the heater generally reduces current leakage, reduces insulator requirements, and/or reduces arcing distances because of the lower voltage potential to ground applied at the end portions of the heaters.

[0955] In certain embodiments, substantially vertical heaters are used to provide heat to the formation. Opposite polarity and substantially equal voltage potentials, as described above, may be applied to the end portions of the substantially vertical heaters. FIG. 101 depicts a side view representation of substantially vertical heaters coupled to a substantially horizontal wellbore. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, 438D, 438E, 438F are located substantially vertical in hydrocarbon layer 484. First end portions of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, 438D, 438E, 438F are coupled to bus bar 690A on a surface of the formation. Second end portions of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, 438D, 438E, 438F are coupled to bus bar 690B in contacting section 656.

[0956] Bus bar 690B may be a bus bar located in a substantially horizontal wellbore in contacting section 656. Second end portions of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, 438D, 438E, 438F may be coupled to bus bar 690B by any method described herein or any method known in the art. For example, containers with thermite powder are coupled to bus bar 690B (for example, by welding or brazing the containers to the bus bar), end portions of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, 438D, 438E, 438F are placed inside the containers, and the thermite powder is activated to electrically couple the heaters to the bus bar. The containers may be coupled to bus bar 690B by, for example, placing the containers in holes or recesses in bus bar 690B or coupled to the outside of the bus bar and then brazing or welding the containers to the bus bar.

[0957] Bus bar 690A and bus bar 690B may be coupled to transformer 580 with cables 686, 688, as described above. Transformer 580 may provide voltages to bar 690A and bus bar 690B as described above for the embodiments depicted in FIGS. 98 and 99. For example, transformer 580 may apply a voltage potential to the first end portions of heaters 438A-F that is opposite in polarity and substantially equal in magnitude to a voltage potential applied to the second end portions of the heaters. Applying the same voltage potentials to the end portions of all heaters 438A-F may produce voltage potentials along the lengths of the heaters that are substantially the same along the lengths of the heaters. Applying the same voltage potentials to the end portions of all heaters 438A-F may inhibit current leakage between the heaters and/or into the formation. In some embodiments, heaters 438A-F are electrically coupled in pairs to the isolated delta winding on the secondary of a three-phase transformer.

[0958] In certain embodiments, it may be advantageous to allow some current leakage into the formation during early stages of heating to heat the formation at a faster rate. Current leakage from the heaters into the formation electrically heats the formation directly. The formation is heated by direct electrical heating in addition to conductive heat provided by the heaters. The formation (the hydrocarbon layer) may have an initial electrical resistance that averages at least 10 ohm·m. In some embodiments, the formation has an initial electrical resistance of at least 100 ohm·m or of at least 300 ohm·m. Direct electrical heating is achieved by having opposite potentials applied to adjacent heaters in the hydrocarbon layer. Current may be allowed to leak into the formation until a selected temperature is reached in the heaters or in the formation. The selected temperature may be below or near the temperature that water proximate one or more heaters boils off. After water boils off, the hydrocarbon layer is substantially electrically isolated from the heaters and direct heating of the formation is inefficient. After the selected temperature is reached, the voltage potential is applied in the opposite polarity and substantially equal magnitude manner described above for FIGS. 98 and 99 so that adjacent heaters will have the same voltage potential along their lengths.

[0959] Current is allowed to leak into the formation by reversing the polarity of one or more heaters shown in FIG. 99 so that a first group of heaters has a positive voltage potential at first location 664 and a second group of heaters has a negative voltage potential at the first location. The first end portions, at first location 664, of a first group of heaters (for example, heaters 438A, 438B, 438D, 438E, 438G, 438H, 438J, 438K, depicted in FIG. 99) are applied with a positive voltage potential that is substantially equal in magnitude to a negative voltage potential applied to the second end portions, at second location 668, of the first group of heaters. The first end portions, at first location 664, of the second group of heaters (for example, heaters 438C, 438F, 4381, 438L) are applied with a negative voltage potential that is substantially equal in magnitude to the positive voltage potential applied to the first end portions of the first group of heaters. Similarly, the second end portions, at second location 668, of the second group of heaters are applied with a positive voltage potential substantially equal in magnitude to the negative potential applied to the second end portions of the first group of heaters. After the selected temperature is reached, the first end portions of both groups of heaters are applied with voltage potential that is opposite in polarity and substantially similar in magnitude to the voltage potential applied to the second end portions of both groups of heaters.

[0960] In some embodiments, the heating elements have thin electrically insulating material, described above, to inhibit current leakage from the heating elements. In some embodiments, the thin electrically insulating layer is aluminum oxide or thermal spray coated aluminum oxide. In some embodiments, the thin electrically insulating layer is an enamel coating of a ceramic composition. The thin electrically insulating layer may inhibit heating elements of a three-phase heater from leaking current between the elements, from leaking current into the formation, and from leaking current to other heaters in the formation. Thus, the three-phase heater may have a longer heater length.

[0961] In certain embodiments, a plurality of substantially horizontal (or inclined) heaters are coupled to a single substantially horizontal bus bar in the subsurface formation. Having the plurality of substantially horizontal heaters connected to a single bus bar in the subsurface reduces the overall footprint of heaters on the surface of the formation and the number of wells drilled in the formation. In addition, the amount of subsurface space used to couple the heaters may be minimized so that more of the formation is treated with heat to recover hydrocarbons (for example, there is less unheated depth in the formation). The number and spacing of heaters coupled to the single bus bar may be varied depending on factors such as, but not limited to, size of the treatment area, vertical thickness of the formation, heating requirements for the formation, number of layers in the formation, and capacity limitations of a surface power supply.

[0962] FIG. 102 depicts an embodiment of pluralities of substantially horizontal heaters 438A,B coupled to bus bars 690A,B in hydrocarbon layer 484. Heaters 438A,B have sections 682 in the overburden of hydrocarbon layer 484. Sections 682 may include high electrical conductivity, low thermal loss electrical conductors such as copper or copper clad carbon steel. Heaters 438A,B enter hydrocarbon layer 484 with substantially vertical sections and then redirect so that the heaters have substantially horizontal sections in hydrocarbon layer 484. The substantially horizontal sections of heaters 438A,B in hydrocarbon layer 484 may provide the majority of the heat to the hydrocarbon layer. Heaters 438A,B may be coupled to bus bars 690A,B, which are located distant from each other in the formation while being substantially parallel to each other.

[0963] In certain embodiments, heaters 438A,B include exposed metal heating elements. In certain embodiments, heaters 438A,B include exposed metal temperature limited heating elements. The heating elements may include ferromagnetic materials such as 9% by weight to 13% by weight chromium stainless steel like 410 stainless steel, chromium stainless steels such as T/P91 or T/P92, 409 stainless steel, VM12 (Vallourec and Mannesmann Tubes, France) or iron-cobalt alloys for use as temperature limited heaters. In some embodiments, the heating elements are composite temperature limited heating elements such as 410 stainless steel and copper composite heating elements or 347H, iron, copper composite heating elements. The substantially horizontal sections of heaters 438A,B in hydrocarbon layer 484 may have lengths of at least about 100 m, at least about 500 m, or at least about 1000 m, up to lengths of about 6000 m.

[0964] In some embodiments, two groups of heaters 438A,B enter the subsurface near each other and then branch away from each other in hydrocarbon layer 484. Having the surface portions of more than one group of heaters located near each other creates less of a surface footprint of the heaters and allows a single group of surface facilities to be used for both groups of heaters.

[0965] In certain embodiments, the groups of heaters 438A or 438B are each coupled to a single transformer. In some embodiments, three heaters in the groups are coupled in a triad configuration (each heater is coupled to one of the phases (A, B, or C) of a three phase transformer and the bus bar is coupled to the neutral, or center point, of the transformer). Each phase of the three-phase transformer may be coupled to more than one heater in each group of heaters (for example, phase A may be coupled to 5 heaters in the group of heaters 438A). In some embodiments, the heaters are coupled to a single phase transformer (either in series or in parallel configurations).

[0966] FIG. 103 depicts an embodiment of pluralities of substantially horizontal heaters 438A,B coupled to bus bars 690A,B in hydrocarbon layer 484. In such an embodiment, two groups of heaters 438A,B enter the formation at distal locations on the surface of the formation. Heaters 438A,B branch towards each other in hydrocarbon layer 484 so that the ends of the heaters are directed towards each other. Heaters 438A,B may be coupled to bus bars 690A,B, which are located proximate each other and substantially parallel to each other. Bus bars 690A,B may enter the subsurface in proximity to each other so that the footprint of the bus bars on the surface is small.

[0967] In certain embodiments, heaters 438A,B are coupled to a single phase transformer in series or parallel. The heaters may be coupled so that the polarity (direction of current flow) alternates in the row of heaters so that each heater has a polarity opposite the heater adjacent to it. Additionally, heaters 438A,B and bus bars 690A,B may be electrically coupled such that the bus bars are opposite in polarity from each other (the current flows in opposite directions at any point in time in each bus bar). Coupling the heaters and the bus bars in such a manner inhibits current leakage into and/or through the formation.

[0968] As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, heaters 438A may be electrically coupled to bus bar 690A and heaters 438B may be electrically coupled to bus bar 690B. Bus bars 690A,B may electrically couple to the ends of heaters 438A,B and be a return or neutral connection for the heaters with bus bar 690A being the neutral connection for heaters 438A and bus bar 690B being the neutral connection for heaters 438B. Bus bars 690A,B may be located in wellbores that are formed substantially perpendicular to the path of wellbores with heaters 438A,B, as shown in FIG. 102. Directional drilling and/or magnetic steering may be used so that the wells for bus bars 690A,B and the wellbores for heaters 438A,B intersect.

[0969] In certain embodiments, heaters 438A,B are coupled to bus bars 690A,B using “mousetrap” type connectors 692. In some embodiments, other couplings, such as those described herein or known in the art, are used to couple heaters 438A,B to bus bars 690A,B. For example, a molten metal or a liquid conducting fluid may fill up the connection space (in the wellbores) to electrically couple the heaters and the bus bars.

[0970] FIG. 104 depicts an enlarged view of an embodiment of bus bar 690 coupled to heaters 438 with connectors 692. In certain embodiments, bus bar 690 includes carbon steel or other electrically conducting metals. In some embodiments, a high electrical conductivity conductor or metal is coupled to or included in bus bar 690. For example, bus bar 690 may include carbon steel with copper cladded to the carbon steel.

[0971] In some embodiments, a centralizer or other centralizing device is used to locate or guide heaters 438 and/or bus bars 690 so that the heaters and bus bars can be coupled. FIG. 105 depicts an enlarged view of an embodiment of bus bar 690 coupled to heater 438 with connectors 692 and centralizers 558. Centralizers 558 may locate heater 438 and/or bus bar 690 so that connectors 692 easily couple the heater and the bus bar. Centralizers 558 may ensure proper spacing of heater 438 and/or bus bar 690 so that the heater and the bus bar can be coupled with connectors 692. Centralizers 558 may inhibit heater 438 and/or bus bar 690 from contacting the sides of the wellbores at or near connectors 692.

[0972] FIG. 106 depicts a cross-sectional representation of connector 692 coupling to bus bar 690. FIG. 107 depicts a three-dimensional representation of connector 692 coupling to bus bar 690. Connectors 692 are shown in proximity to bus bar 690 (before the connector clamps around the bus bar). Connector 692 is connected or directly attached to the heater so that the connector is rotatable around the end of the heater while maintaining electrical contact with the heater. In some embodiments, the connector and the end of the heater are twisted into position to align with the bus bar. Connector 692 includes collets 694. Collets 694 are shaped (for example, diagonally cut or helically profiled) so that as the connector is pushed onto bus bar 690, the shape of the collets rotates the head of the connector as the collets slide over the bus bar. Collets 694 may be spring loaded so that the collets hold down against bus bar 690 after the collets slide over the bus bar. Thus, connector 692 clamps to bus bar 690 using collets 694. Connector 692, including collets 694, is made of electrically conductive materials so that the connector electrically couples bus bar 690 to the heater attached to the connector.

[0973] In some embodiments, an explosive element is added to connector 692, shown in FIGS. 106 and 107. Connector 692 is used to position bus bar 690 and the heater in proper positions for explosive bonding of the bus bar to the heater. The explosive element may be located on connector 692. For example, the explosive element may be located on one or both of collets 694. The explosive element may be used to explosively bond connector 692 to bus bar 690 so that the heater is metallically bonded to the bus bar.

[0974] In some embodiment, the explosive bonding is applied along the axial direction of bus bar 690. In some embodiments, the explosive bonding process is a self cleaning process. For example, the explosive bonding process may drive out air and/or debris from between components during the explosion. In some embodiments, the explosive element is a shape charge explosive element. Using the shape charge element may focus the explosive energy in a desired direction.

[0975] FIG. 108 depicts an embodiment of three u-shaped heaters with common overburden sections coupled to a single three-phase transformer. In certain embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are exposed metal heaters. In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are exposed metal heaters with a thin, electrically insulating coating on the heaters. For example, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may be 410 stainless steel, carbon steel, 347H stainless steel, or other corrosion resistant stainless steel rods or tubulars (such as 1″ or 1.25″ diameter rods). The rods or tubulars may have porcelain enamel coatings on the exterior of the rods to electrically insulate the rods.

[0976] In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are insulated conductor heaters. In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are conductor-in-conduit heaters. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may have substantially parallel heating sections in hydrocarbon layer 484. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may be substantially horizontal or at an incline in hydrocarbon layer 484. In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C enter the formation through common wellbore 428A. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may exit the formation through common wellbore 428B. In certain embodiments, wellbores 428A, 428B are uncased (for example, open wellbores) in hydrocarbon layer 484.

[0977] Openings 556A, 556B, 556C span between wellbore 428A and wellbore 428B. Openings 556A, 556B, 556C may be uncased openings in hydrocarbon layer 484. In certain embodiments, openings 556A, 556B, 556C are formed by drilling from wellbore 428A and/or wellbore 428B. In some embodiments, openings 556A, 556B, 556C are formed by drilling from each wellbore 428A and 428B and connecting at or near the middle of the openings. Drilling from both sides towards the middle of hydrocarbon layer 484 allows longer openings to be formed in the hydrocarbon layer. Thus, longer heaters may be installed in hydrocarbon layer 484. For example, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may have lengths of at least about 1500 m, at least about 3000 m, or at least about 4500 m.

[0978] Having multiple long, substantially horizontal or inclined heaters extending from only two wellbores in hydrocarbon layer 484 reduces the footprint of wells on the surface needed for heating the formation. The number of overburden wellbores that need to be drilled in the formation is reduced, which reduces capital costs per heater in the formation. Heating the formation with long, substantially horizontal or inclined heaters also reduces overall heat losses in the overburden when heating the formation because of the reduced number of overburden sections used to treat the formation (for example, losses in the overburden are a smaller fraction of total power supplied to the formation).

[0979] In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are installed in wellbores 428A, 428B and openings 556A, 556B, 556C by pulling the heaters through the wellbores and the openings from one end to the other. For example, an installation tool may be pushed through the openings and coupled to a heater in wellbore 428A. The heater may then be pulled through the openings towards wellbore 428B using the installation tool. The heater may be coupled to the installation tool using a connector such as a claw, a catcher, or other devices known in the art.

[0980] In some embodiments, the first half of an opening is drilled from wellbore 428A and then the second half of the opening is drilled from wellbore 428B through the first half of the opening. The drill bit may be pushed through to wellbore 428A and a first heater may be coupled to the drill bit to pull the first heater back through the opening and install the first heater in the opening. The first heater may be coupled to the drill bit using a connector such as a claw, a catcher, or other devices known in the art.

[0981] After the first heater is installed, a tube or other guide may be placed in wellbore 428A and/or wellbore 428B to guide drilling of a second opening. FIG. 109 depicts a top view of an embodiment of heater 438A and drilling guide 696 in wellbore 428. Drilling guide 696 may be used to guide the drilling of the second opening in the formation and the installation of a second heater in the second opening. Insulator 534A may electrically and mechanically insulate heater 438A from drilling guide 696. Drilling guide 696 and insulator 534A may protect heater 438A from being damaged while the second opening is being drilled and the second heater is being installed.

[0982] After the second heater is installed, drilling guide 696 may be placed in wellbore 428 to guide drilling of a third opening, as shown in FIG. 110. Drilling guide 696 may be used to guide the drilling of the third opening in the formation and the installation of a third heater in the third opening. Insulators 534A and 534B may electrically and mechanically insulate heaters 438A and 438B, respectively, from drilling guide 696. Drilling guide 696 and insulators 534A and 534B may protect heaters 438A and 438B from being damaged while the third opening is being drilled and the third heater is being installed. After the third heater is installed, centralizer 558 may be placed in wellbore 428 to separate and space heaters 438A, 438B, 438C in the wellbore, as shown in FIG. 111.

[0983] In some embodiments, all the openings are formed in the formation and then the heaters are installed in the formation. In certain embodiments, one of the openings is formed and one of the heaters is installed in the formation before the other openings are formed and the other heaters are installed. The first installed heater may be used as a guide during the formation of additional openings. The first installed heater may be energized to produce an electromagnetic field that is used to guide the formation of the other openings. For example, the first installed heater may be energized with a bipolar DC current to magnetically guide drilling of the other openings.

[0984] In certain embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are coupled to a single three-phase transformer 580 at one end of the heaters, as shown in FIG. 108. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may be electrically coupled in a triad configuration, as described herein. In some embodiments, two heaters are coupled together in a diad configuration, as described herein. Transformer 580 may be a three-phase wye transformer. The heaters may each be coupled to one phase of transformer 580. Using three-phase power to power the heaters may be more efficient than using single-phase power. Using three-phase connections for the heaters allows the magnetic fields of the heaters in wellbore 428A to cancel each other. The cancelled magnetic fields may allow overburden casing 564A to be ferromagnetic (for example, carbon steel) in wellbore 428A. Using ferromagnetic casings in the wellbores may be less expensive and/or easier to install than non-ferromagnetic casings (such as fiberglass casings).

[0985] In some embodiments, the overburden section of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are coated with an insulator, such as a polymer or an enamel coating, to inhibit shorting between the overburden sections of the heaters. In some embodiments, only the overburden sections of the heaters in wellbore 428A are coated with the insulator as the heater sections in wellbore 428B may not have significant electrical losses. In some embodiments, ends of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C in wellbore 428A are at least one diameter of the heaters away from overburden casing 564A so that no insulator is needed. The ends of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may be, for example, centralized in wellbore 428A using a centralizer to keep the heaters the desired distance away from overburden casing 564A.

[0986] In some embodiments, the ends of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C passing through wellbore 428B are electrically coupled together and grounded outside of the wellbore, as shown in FIG. 108. The magnetic fields of the heaters may cancel each other in wellbore 428B. Thus, overburden casing 564B may be ferromagnetic (carbon steel) in wellbore 428B. In certain embodiments, the overburden section of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are copper rods or tubulars. The build sections of the heaters (the transition sections between the overburden sections and the heating sections) may also be made of copper or similar electrically conductive material.

[0987] In some embodiments, the ends of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C passing through wellbore 428B are electrically coupled together inside the wellbore. The ends of the heaters may be coupled inside the wellbore at or near the bottom of the overburden. Coupling the heaters together at or near the overburden reduces electrical losses in the overburden section of the wellbore.

[0988] FIG. 112 depicts an embodiment for coupling ends of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C in wellbore 428B. Plate 698 may be located at or near the bottom of the overburden section of wellbore 428B. Plate 698 may be have openings sized to allow heaters 438A, 438B, 438C to be inserted through the plate. Plate 698 may be slid down along heaters 438A, 438B, 438C into position in wellbore 428B. Plate 698 may be made of copper or another electrically conductive material.

[0989] Balls 700 may be placed into the overburden section of wellbore 428B. Plate 698 may allow balls 700 to settle in the overburden section of wellbore 428B around heaters 438A, 438B, 438C. Balls 700 may be made of electrically conductive material such as copper or nickel-plated copper. Balls 700 and plate 698 may electrically couple heaters 438A, 438B, 438C to each other so that the heaters are grounded. In some embodiments, portions of the heaters above plate 698 (the overburden sections of the heaters) are made of carbon steel while portions of the heaters below the plate (build sections of the heaters) are made of copper.

[0990] In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, as depicted in FIG. 108, provide varying heat outputs along the lengths of the heaters. For example, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may have varying dimensions (for example, thicknesses or diameters) along the lengths of the heater. The varying thicknesses may provide different electrical resistances along the length of the heater and, thus, different heat outputs along the length of the heaters.

[0991] In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C are divided into two or more sections of heating. In some embodiments, the heaters are divided into repeating sections of different heat outputs (for example, alternating sections of two different heat outputs that are repeated). The repeating sections of different heat outputs may be used, in some embodiments, to heat the formation in stages (for example, in a staged heating process as described herein). In one embodiment, the halves of the heaters closest to wellbore 428A may provide heat in a first section of hydrocarbon layer 484 and the halves of the heaters closest to wellbore 428B may provide heat in a second section of hydrocarbon layer 484. Hydrocarbons in the formation may be mobilized by the heat provided in the first section. Hydrocarbons in the second section may be heated to higher temperatures than the first section to upgrade the hydrocarbons in the second section (for example, the hydrocarbons may be further mobilized and/or pyrolyzed). Hydrocarbons from the first section may move, or be moved, into the second section for the upgrading. For example, a drive fluid may be provided through wellbore 428A to move the first section mobilized hydrocarbons to the second section.

[0992] In some embodiments, more than three heaters extend from wellbore 428A and/or 428B. If multiples of three heaters extend from the wellbores and are coupled to transformer 580, the magnetic fields may cancel in the overburden sections of the wellbores as in the case of three heaters in the wellbores. For example, six heaters may be coupled to transformer 580 with two heaters coupled to each phase of the transformer to cancel the magnetic fields in the wellbores.

[0993] In some embodiments, multiple heaters extend from one wellbore in different directions. FIG. 113 depicts a schematic of an embodiment of multiple heaters extending in different directions from wellbore 428A. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may extend to wellbore 428B. Heaters 438D, 438E, 438F may extend to wellbore 428C in the opposite direction of heaters 438A, 438B, 438C. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C and heaters 438D, 438E, 438F may be coupled to a single, three-phase transformer so that magnetic fields are cancelled in wellbore 428A.

[0994] In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may have different heat outputs from heaters 438D, 438E, 438F so that hydrocarbon layer 484 is divided into two heating sections with different heating rates and/or temperatures (for example, a mobilization and a pyrolyzation section). In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C and/or heaters 438D, 438E, 438F may have heat outputs that vary along the lengths of the heaters to further divide hydrocarbon layer 484 into more heating sections. In some embodiments, additional heaters may extend from wellbore 428B and/or wellbore 428C to other wellbores in the formation as shown by the dashed lines in FIG. 113.

[0995] In some embodiments, multiple levels of heaters extend between two wellbores. FIG. 114 depicts a schematic of an embodiment of multiple levels of heaters extending between wellbore 428A and wellbore 428B. Heaters 438A, 438B, 438C may provide heat to a first level of hydrocarbon layer 484. Heaters 438D, 438E, 438F may branch off and provide heat to a second level of hydrocarbon layer 484. Heaters 438G, 438H, 438I may further branch off and provide heat to a third level of hydrocarbon layer 484. In some embodiments, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, heaters 438D, 438E, 438F, and heaters 438G, 438H, 438I provide heat to levels in the formation with different properties. For example, the different groups of heaters may provide different heat outputs to levels with different properties in the formation so that the levels are heated at or about the same rate.

[0996] In some embodiments, the levels are heated at different rates to create different heating zones in the formation. For example, the first level (heated by heaters 438A, 438B, 438C) may be heated so that hydrocarbons are mobilized, the second level (heated by heaters 438D, 438E, 438F) may be heated so that hydrocarbons are somewhat upgraded from the first level, and the third level (heated by heaters 438G, 438H, 438I) may be heated to pyrolyze hydrocarbons. As another example, the first level may be heated to create gases and/or drive fluid in the first level and either the second level or the third level may be heated to mobilize and/or pyrolyze fluids or just to a level to allow production in the level. In addition, heaters 438A, 438B, 438C, heaters 438D, 438E, 438F, and/or heaters 438G, 438H, 438I may have heat outputs that vary along the lengths of the heaters to further divide hydrocarbon layer 484 into more heating sections.

[0997] FIG. 115 depicts an embodiment of a u-shaped heater that has an inductively energized tubular. Heater 438 includes electrical conductor 572 and tubular 702 in an opening that spans between wellbore 428A and wellbore 428B. In certain embodiments, electrical conductor 572 and/or the current carrying portion of the electrical conductor is electrically insulated from tubular 702. Electrical conductor 572 and/or the current carrying portion of the electrical conductor is electrically insulated from tubular 702 such that electrical current does not flow from the electrical conductor to the tubular, or vice versa (for example, the tubular is not electrically connected to the electrical conductor).

[0998] In some embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is centralized inside tubular 702 (for example, using centralizers 558 or other support structures, as shown in FIG. 116). Centralizers 558 may electrically insulate electrical conductor 572 from tubular 702. In some embodiments, tubular 702 contacts electrical conductor 572. For example, tubular 702 may hang, drape, or otherwise touch electrical conductor 572. In some embodiments, electrical conductor 572 includes electrical insulation (for example, magnesium oxide or porcelain enamel) that insulates the current carrying portion of the electrical conductor from tubular 702. The electrical insulation inhibits current from flowing between the current carrying portion of electrical conductor 572 and tubular 702 if the electrical conductor and the tubular are in physical contact with each other.

[0999] In some embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is an exposed metal conductor heater or a conductor-in-conduit heater. In certain embodiments, electrical conductor 572 is an insulated conductor such as a mineral insulated conductor. The insulated conductor may have a copper core, copper alloy core, or a similar electrically conductive, low resistance core that has low electrical losses. In some embodiments, the core is a copper core with a diameter between about 0.5″ (1.27 cm) and about 1″ (2.54 cm). The sheath or jacket of the insulated conductor may be a non-ferromagnetic, corrosion resistant steel such as 347 stainless steel, 625 stainless steel, 825 stainless steel, 304 stainless steel, or copper with a protective layer (for example, a protective cladding). The sheath may have an outer diameter of between about 1″ (2.54 cm) and about 1.25″ (3.18 cm).

[1000] In some embodiments, the sheath or jacket of the insulated conductor is in physical contact with the tubular 702 (for example, the tubular is in physical contact with the sheath along the length of the tubular) or the sheath is electrically connected to the tubular. In such embodiments, the electrical insulation of the insulated conductor electrically insulates the core of the insulated conductor from the jacket and the tubular. FIG. 117 depicts an embodiment of an induction heater with the sheath of an insulated conductor in electrical contact with tubular 702. Electrical conductor 572 is the insulated conductor. The sheath of the insulated conductor is electrically connected to tubular 702 using electrical contactors 704. In some embodiments, electrical contactors 704 are sliding contactors. In certain embodiments, electrical contactors 704 electrically connect the sheath of the insulated conductor to tubular 702 at or near the ends of the tubular. Electrically connecting at or near the ends of tubular 702 substantially equalizes the voltage along the tubular with the voltage along the sheath of the insulated conductor. Equalizing the voltages along tubular 702 and along the sheath may inhibit arcing between the tubular and the sheath.

[1001] Tubular 702, shown in FIGS. 115, 116, and 117, may be ferromagnetic or include ferromagnetic materials. Tubular 702 may have a thickness such that when electrical conductor 572 is energized with time-varying current, the electrical conductor induces electrical current flow on the surfaces of tubular 702 due to the ferromagnetic properties of the tubular (for example, current flow is induced on both the inside of the tubular and the outside of the tubular). Current flow is induced in the skin depth of the surfaces of tubular 702 so that the tubular operates as a skin effect heater. In certain embodiments, the induced current circulates axially (longitudinally) on the inside and/or outside surfaces of tubular 702. Longitudinal flow of current through electrical conductor 572 induces primarily longitudinal current flow in tubular 702 (the majority of the induced current flow is in the longitudinal direction in the tubular). Having primarily longitudinal induced current flow in tubular 702 may provide a higher resistance per foot than if the induced current flow is primarily angular current flow.

[1002] In certain embodiments, current flow in tubular 702 is induced with low frequency current in electrical conductor 572 (for example, from 50 Hz or 60 Hz up to about 1000 Hz). In some embodiments, induced currents on the inside and outside surfaces of tubular 702 are substantially equal.

[1003] In certain embodiments, tubular 702 has a thickness that is greater than the skin depth of the ferromagnetic material in the tubular at or near the Curie temperature of the ferromagnetic material or at or near the phase transformation temperature of the ferromagnetic material. For example, tubular 702 may have a thickness of at least 2.1, at least 2.5 times, at least 3 times, or at least 4 times the skin depth of the ferromagnetic material in the tubular near the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature of the ferromagnetic material. In certain embodiments, tubular 702 has a thickness of at least 2.1 times, at least 2.5 times, at least 3 times, or at least 4 times the skin depth of the ferromagnetic material in the tubular at about 50° C. below the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature of the ferromagnetic material.

[1004] In certain embodiments, tubular 702 is carbon steel. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is coated with a corrosion resistant coating (for example, porcelain or ceramic coating) and/or an electrically insulating coating. In some embodiments, electrical conductor 572 has an electrically insulating coating. Examples of the electrically insulating coating on tubular 702 and/or electrical conductor 572 include, but are not limited to, a porcelain enamel coating, alumina coating, or alumina-titania coating. In some embodiments, tubular 702 and/or electrical conductor 572 are coated with a coating such as polyethylene or another suitable low friction coefficient coating that may melt or decompose when the heater is energized. The coating may facilitate placement of the tubular and/or the electrical conductor in the formation.

[1005] In some embodiments, tubular 702 includes corrosion resistant ferromagnetic material such as, but not limited to, 410 stainless steel, 446 stainless steel, T/P91 stainless steel, T/P92 stainless steel, alloy 52, alloy 42, and Invar 36. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is a stainless steel tubular with cobalt added (for example, between about 3% by weight and about 10% by weight cobalt added) and/or molybdenum (for example, about 0.5% molybdenum by weight).

[1006] At or near the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature of the ferromagnetic material in tubular 702, the magnetic permeability of the ferromagnetic material decreases rapidly. When the magnetic permeability of tubular 702 decreases at or near the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature, there is little or no current flow in the tubular because, at these temperatures, the tubular is essentially non-ferromagnetic and electrical conductor 572 is unable to induce current flow in the tubular. With little or no current flow in tubular 702, the temperature of the tubular will drop to lower temperatures until the magnetic permeability increases and the tubular becomes ferromagnetic. Thus, tubular 702 self-limits at or near the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature and operates as a temperature limited heater due to the ferromagnetic properties of the ferromagnetic material in the tubular. Because current is induced in tubular 702, the turndown ratio may be higher and the drop in current sharper for the tubular than for temperature limited heaters that apply current directly to the ferromagnetic material. For example, heaters with current induced in tubular 702 may have turndown ratios of at least about 5, at least about 10, or at least about 20 while temperature limited heaters that apply current directly to the ferromagnetic material may have turndown ratios that are at most about 5.

[1007] When current is induced in tubular 702, the tubular provides heat to hydrocarbon layer 484 and defines the heating zone in the hydrocarbon layer. In certain embodiments, tubular 702 heats to temperatures of at least about 300° C., at least about 500° C., or at least about 700° C. Because current is induced on both the inside and outside surfaces of tubular 702, the heat generation of the tubular is increased as compared to temperature limited heaters that have current directly applied to the ferromagnetic material and current flow is limited to one surface. Thus, less current may be provided to electrical conductor 572 to generate the same heat as heaters that apply current directly to the ferromagnetic material. Using less current in electrical conductor 572 decreases power consumption and reduces power losses in the overburden of the formation.

[1008] In certain embodiments, tubulars 702 have large diameters. The large diameters may be used to equalize or substantially equalize high pressures on the tubular from either the inside or the outside of the tubular. In some embodiments, tubular 702 has a diameter in a range between about 1.5″ (about 3.8 cm) and about 5″ (about 12.7 cm). In some embodiments, tubular 702 has a diameter in a range between about 3 cm and about 13 cm, between about 4 cm and about 12 cm, or between about 5 cm and about 11 cm. Increasing the diameter of tubular 702 may provide more heat output to the formation by increasing the heat transfer surface area of the tubular.

[1009] In some embodiments, fluids flow through the annulus of tubular 702 or through another conduit inside the tubular. The fluids may be used, for example, to cool down the heater, to recover heat from the heater, and/or to initially heat the formation before energizing the heater.

[1010] In certain embodiments, tubular 702 has surfaces that are shaped to increase the resistance of the tubular. FIG. 118 depicts an embodiment of a heater with tubular 702 having radial grooved surfaces. Heater 438 may include electrical conductors 572A,B coupled to tubular 702. Electrical conductors 572A,B may be insulated conductors. Electrical contactors 704 may electrically and physically couple electrical conductors 572A,B to tubular 702. In certain embodiments, electrical contactors 704 are attached to ends of electrical conductors 572A,B. Electrical contactors 704 have a shape such that when the ends of electrical conductors 572A,B are pushed into the ends of tubular 702, the electrical contactors physically and electrically couple the electrical conductors to the tubular. For example, electrical contactors 704 may be cone shaped.

[1011] In certain embodiments, tubular 702 includes grooves 706. Grooves 706 may be formed as a part of the surface of tubular 702 (for example, the tubular is formed with grooved surfaces) or the grooves may be formed by adding or removing (for example, milling) material on the surface of the tubular. For example, grooves 706 may be located on a piece of tubular that is welded to tubular 702.

[1012] In certain embodiments, grooves 706 are on the outer surface of tubular 702. In some embodiments, the grooves are on the inner surface of the tubular. In some embodiments, the grooves are on both the inner and outer surfaces of the tubular.

[1013] In certain embodiments, grooves 706 are radial grooves (grooves that wrap around the circumference of tubular 702). In certain embodiments, grooves 706 are straight, angled, or spiral grooves or protrusions. In some embodiments, grooves 706 are evenly spaced grooves along the surface of tubular 702. In some embodiments, grooves 706 are part of a threaded surface on tubular 702 (the grooves are formed as a winding thread on the surface). Grooves 706 may have a variety of shapes as desired. For example, grooves 706 may have square edges, rectangular edges, v-shaped edges, u-shaped edges, or have rounded edges.

[1014] Grooves 706 increase the effective resistance of tubular 702 by increasing the path length of induced current on the surface of the tubular. Grooves 706 increase the effective resistance of tubular 702 as compared to a tubular with the same inside and outside diameters with smooth surfaces. Because induced current travels axially, the induced current has to travel up and down the grooves along the surface of the tubular. Thus, the depth of grooves 706 may be varied to provide a selected resistance in tubular 702. For example, increasing the grooves depth increases the path length and the resistance.

[1015] Increasing the resistance of tubular 702 with grooves 706 increases the heat generation of the tubular as compared to a tubular with smooth surfaces. Thus, the same electrical current in electrical conductor 572 will provide more heat output in the radial grooved surface tubular than the smooth surface tubular. Therefore, to provide the same heat output with the radial grooved surface tubular as the smooth surface tubular, less current is needed in electrical conductor 572 with the radial grooved surface tubular.

[1016] In some embodiments, grooves 706 are filled with materials that decompose at lower temperatures to protect the grooves during installation of tubular 702. For example, grooves 706 may be filled with polyethylene or asphalt. The polyethylene or asphalt may melt and/or desorb when heater 438 reaches normal operating temperatures of the heater.

[1017] Heater 438, shown in FIG. 118, generates heat when current is applied directly to tubular 702. Current is provided to tubular 702 using electrical conductors 572A,B. It is to be understood that grooves 706 may be used in other embodiments of tubulars 702 described herein to increase the resistance of such tubulars. For example, grooves 706 may be used in embodiments of tubulars 702 depicted in FIGS. 115, 116, and 117.

[1018] FIG. 119 depicts an embodiment of heater 438 divided into tubular sections to provide varying heat outputs along the length of the heater. Heater 438 may include tubular sections 702A, 702B, and 702C that have different properties to provide different heat outputs in each tubular section. Examples of properties that may be varied include, but are not limited to, thicknesses, diameters, cross-sectional areas, resistances, materials, number of grooves, depth of grooves. The different properties in tubular sections 702A, 702B, and 702C may provide different maximum operating temperatures (for example, different Curie temperatures or phase transformation temperatures) along the length of heater 438. The different maximum temperatures of the tubular sections provides different heat outputs from the tubular sections.

[1019] Providing different heat outputs along heater 438 may provide different heating sections in one or more hydrocarbon layers. For example, heater 438 may be divided into two or more sections of heating to provide different heat outputs to different sections of a hydrocarbon layer and/or different hydrocarbon layers.

[1020] In one embodiment, a first portion of heater 438 may provide heat to a first section of the hydrocarbon layer and a second portion of the heater may provide heat to a second section of the hydrocarbon layer. Hydrocarbons in the first section may be mobilized by the heat provided by the first portion of the eater. Hydrocarbons in the second section may be heated by the second portion of the heater to a higher temperature than the first section. The higher temperature in the second section may upgrade hydrocarbons in the second section relative to the first section. For example, the hydrocarbons may be mobilized, visbroken, and/or pyrolyzed in the second section. Hydrocarbons from the first section may be moved into the second section by, for example, a drive fluid provided to the first section. As another example, heater 438 may have end sections that provide higher heat outputs to counteract heat losses at the ends of the heater to maintain a more constant temperature in the heated portion of the formation.

[1021] In certain embodiments, three, or multiples of three, electrical conductors enter and exit the formation through common wellbores with tubulars surrounding the electrical conductors in the portion of the formation to be heated. FIG. 120 depicts an embodiment of three electrical conductors 572A,B,C entering the formation through first common wellbore 428A and exiting the formation through second common wellbore 428C with three tubulars 702A,B,C surrounding the electrical conductors in hydrocarbon layer 484. In some embodiments, electrical conductors 572A,B,C are powered by a single, three-phase wye transformer. Tubulars 702A,B,C and portions of electrical conductors 572A,B,C may be in three separate wellbores in hydrocarbon layer 484 (for example, three openings 556A, 556B, 556C depicted in FIG. 108). The three separate wellbores may be formed by drilling the wellbores from first common wellbore 428A to second common wellbore 428B, vice versa, or drilling from both common wellbores and connecting the drilled openings in the hydrocarbon layer.

[1022] Having multiple induction heaters extending from only two wellbores in hydrocarbon layer 484 reduces the footprint of wells on the surface needed for heating the formation. The number of overburden wellbores drilled in the formation is reduced, which reduces capital costs per heater in the formation. Power losses in the overburden may be a smaller fraction of total power supplied to the formation because of the reduced number of wells through the overburden used to treat the formation. In addition, power losses in the overburden may be smaller because the three phases in the common wellbores substantially cancel each other and inhibit induced currents in the casings or other structures of the wellbores.

[1023] In some embodiments, three, or multiples of three, electrical conductors and tubulars are located in separate wellbores in the formation. FIG. 121 depicts an embodiment of three electrical conductors 572A,B,C and three tubulars 702A,B,C in separate wellbores in the formation. Electrical conductors 572A,B,C may be powered by single, three-phase wye transformer 580 with each electrical conductor coupled to one phase of the transformer. In some embodiments, the single, three-phase wye transformer is used to power 6, 9, 12, or other multiples of three of electrical conductors. Connecting multiples of three electrical conductors to the single, three-phase wye transformer may reduce equipment costs for providing power to the induction heaters.

[1024] In some embodiments, two, or multiples of two, electrical conductors enter the formation from a first common wellbore and exit the formation from a second common wellbore with tubulars surrounding each electrical conductor in the hydrocarbon layer. The multiples of two electrical conductors may be powered by a single, two-phase transformer. In such embodiments, the electrical conductors may be homogenous electrical conductors (for example, insulated conductors using the same materials throughout) in the overburden sections and heating sections of the insulated conductor. The reverse flow of current in the overburden sections may reduce power losses in the overburden sections of the wellbores because the currents reduce or cancel inductive effects in the overburden sections.

[1025] In certain embodiments, tubulars 702 depicted in FIGS. 115-120 include multiple layers of ferromagnetic materials separated by electrical insulators. FIG. 122 depicts an embodiment of a multilayered induction tubular. Tubular 702 includes ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C separated by electrical insulators 534A,B. Three ferromagnetic layers and two layers of electrical insulators are shown in FIG. 122. Tubular 702 may include additional ferromagnetic layers and/or electrical insulators as desired. For example, the number of layers may be chosen to provide a desired heat output from the tubular.

[1026] Ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C are electrically insulated from electrical conductor 572 by, for example, an air gap. Ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C are electrically insulated from each other by electrical insulator 534A and electrical insulator 534B. Thus, direct flow of current is inhibited between ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C and electrical conductor 572. When current is applied to electrical conductor 572, electrical current flow is induced in ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C because of the ferromagnetic properties of the layers. Having two or more ferromagnetic layers provides multiple current induction loops for the induced current. The multiple current induction loops may effectively appear as electrical loads in series to a power source for electrical conductor 572. The multiple current induction loops may increase the heat generation per unit length of tubular 702 as compared to a tubular with only one current induction loop. For the same heat output, the tubular with multiple layers may have a higher voltage and lower current as compared to the single layer tubular.

[1027] In certain embodiments, ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C include the same ferromagnetic material. In some embodiments, ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C include different ferromagnetic materials. Properties of ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C may be varied to provide different heat outputs from the different layers. Examples of properties of ferromagnetic layers 708A,B,C that may be varied include, but are not limited to, ferromagnetic material and thicknesses of the layers.

[1028] Electrical insulators 534A and 534B may be magnesium oxide, porcelain enamel, and/or another suitable electrical insulator. The thicknesses and/or materials of electrical insulators 534A and 534B may be varied to provide different operating parameters for tubular 702.

[1029] In some embodiments, fluids are circulated through tubulars 702 depicted in FIGS. 115-120. In some embodiments, fluids are circulated through the tubulars to add heat to the formation. For example, fluids may be circulated through the tubulars to preheat the formation prior to energizing the tubulars (providing current to the heating system). In some embodiments, fluids are circulated through the tubulars to recover heat from the formation. The recovered heat may be used to provide heat to other portions of the formation and/or surface processes used to treat fluids produced from the formation.

[1030] In certain embodiments, insulated conductors are operated as induction heaters. FIG. 123 depicts a cross-sectional end view of an embodiment of insulated conductor 574 that is used as an induction heater. FIG. 124 depicts a cross-sectional side view of the embodiment of depicted in FIG. 123. Insulated conductor 574 includes core 542, electrical insulator 534, and jacket 540. Core 542 may be copper or another non-ferromagnetic electrical conductor with low resistance that provides little or no heat output. Electrical insulator 534 is magnesium oxide or another suitable electrical insulator that inhibits arcing at high voltages.

[1031] Jacket 540 includes at least one ferromagnetic material. In certain embodiments, jacket 540 includes carbon steel or another ferromagnetic steel (for example, 410 stainless steel, 446 stainless steel, T/P91 stainless steel, T/P92 stainless steel, alloy 52, alloy 42, and Invar 36). In some embodiments, jacket 540 includes an outer layer of corrosion resistant material (for example, stainless steel such as 347H stainless steel or 304 stainless steel). The outer layer may be clad to the ferromagnetic material or otherwise coupled to the ferromagnetic material using methods known in the art.

[1032] In certain embodiments, jacket 540 has a thickness of at least about 2 skin depths of the ferromagnetic material in the jacket. In some embodiments, jacket 540 has a thickness of at least about 3 skin depths, at least about 4 skin depths, or at least about 5 skin depths. Increasing the thickness of jacket 540 may increase the heat output from insulated conductor 574.

[1033] In one embodiment, core 542 is copper with a diameter of about 0.5″ (1.27 cm), electrical insulator 534 is magnesium oxide with a thickness of about 0.20″ (0.5 cm) (the outside diameter is about 0.9″ (2.3 cm)), and jacket 540 is carbon steel with an outside diameter of about 1.6″ (4.1 cm) (the thickness is about 0.35″ (0.88 cm)). A thin layer (about 0.1″ (0.25 cm) thickness (outside diameter of about 1.7″ (4.3 cm)) of corrosion resistant material 347H stainless steel may be clad on the outside of jacket 540.

[1034] In another embodiment, core 542 is copper with a diameter of about 0.338″ (0.86 cm), electrical insulator 534 is magnesium oxide with a thickness of about 0.096″ (0.24 cm) (the outside diameter is about 0.53″ (1.3 cm)), and jacket 540 is carbon steel with an outside diameter of about 1.13″ (2.9 cm) (the thickness is about 0.30″ (0.76 cm)). A thin layer (about 0.065″ (0.17 cm) thickness (outside diameter of about 1.26″ (3.2 cm)) of corrosion resistant material 347H stainless steel may be clad on the outside of jacket 540.

[1035] In another embodiment, core 542 is copper, electrical insulator 534 is magnesium oxide, and jacket 540 is a thin layer of copper surrounded by carbon steel. Core 542, electrical insulator 534, and the thin copper layer of jacket 540 may be obtained as a single piece of insulated conductor. Such insulated conductors may be obtained as long pieces of insulated conductors (for example, lengths of about 500′ (about 150 m) or more). The carbon steel layer of jacket 540 may be added by drawing down the carbon steel over the long insulated conductor. Such an insulated conductor may only generate heat on the outside of jacket 540 as the thin copper layer in the jacket shorts to the inside surface of the jacket.

[1036] In some embodiments, jacket 540 is made of multiple layers of ferromagnetic material. The multiple layers may be the same ferromagnetic material or different ferromagnetic materials. For example, in one embodiment, jacket 540 is a 0.35″ (0.88 cm) thick carbon steel jacket made from three layers of carbon steel. The first and second layers are 0.10″ (0.25 cm) thick and the third layer is 0.15″ (0.38 cm) thick. In another embodiment, jacket 540 is a 0.3″ (0.76 cm) thick carbon steel jacket made from three 0.10″ (0.25 cm) thick layers of carbon steel.

[1037] In certain embodiments, jacket 540 and core 542 are electrically insulated such that there is no direct electrical connection between the jacket and the core. Core 542 may be electrically coupled to a single power source with each end of the core being coupled to one pole of the power source. For example, insulated conductor 574 may be a u-shaped heater located in a u-shaped wellbore with each end of core 542 being coupled to one pole of the power source.

[1038] When core 542 is energized with time-varying current, the core induces electrical current flow on the surfaces of jacket 540 (as shown by the arrows in FIG. 124) due to the ferromagnetic properties of the ferromagnetic material in the jacket. In certain embodiments, current flow is induced on both the inside and outside surfaces of jacket 540. In these induction heater embodiments, jacket 540 operates as the heating element of insulated conductor 574.

[1039] At or near the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature of the ferromagnetic material in jacket 540, the magnetic permeability of the ferromagnetic material decreases rapidly. When the magnetic permeability of jacket 540 decreases at or near the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature, there is little or no current flow in the jacket because, at these temperatures, the jacket is essentially non-ferromagnetic and core 542 is unable to induce current flow in the tubular. With little or no current flow in jacket 540, the temperature of the jacket will drop to lower temperatures until the magnetic permeability increases and the jacket becomes ferromagnetic. Thus, jacket 540 self-limits at or near the Curie temperature or the phase transformation temperature and insulated conductor 574 operates as a temperature limited heater due to the ferromagnetic properties of the jacket. Because current is induced in jacket 540, the turndown ratio may be higher and the drop in current sharper for the jacket than if current is directly applied to the jacket.

[1040] In certain embodiments, portions of jacket 540 in the overburden of the formation do not include ferromagnetic material (for example, are non-ferromagnetic). Having the overburden portions of jacket 540 made of non-ferromagnetic material inhibits current induction in the overburden portions of the jackets. Power losses in the overburden are inhibited or reduced by inhibiting current induction in the overburden portions.

[1041] FIG. 125 depicts a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of two-leg insulated conductor 574 that is used as an induction heater. FIG. 126 depicts an end cross-sectional view of the embodiment of depicted in FIG. 125. Insulated conductor 574 is a two-leg insulated conductor that includes two cores 542A,B; two electrical insulators 534A,B; and two jackets 540A,B. The two legs of insulated conductor 574 may be in physical contact with each other such that jacket 540A contacts jacket 540B along their lengths. Cores 542A,B; electrical insulators 534A,B; and jackets 540A,B may include materials such as those used in the embodiment of insulated conductor 574 depicted in FIGS. 124 and 123.

[1042] As shown in FIG. 126, core 542A and core 542B are coupled to transformer 580 and terminal block 634. Thus, core 542A and core 542B are electrically coupled in series such that current in core 542A flows in an opposite direction from current in core 542B, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 126. Current flow in cores 542A,B induces current flow in jackets 540A,B, respectively, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 126.

[1043] In certain embodiments, portions of jacket 540A and/or jacket 540B are coated with an electrically insulating coating (for example, a porcelain enamel coating, alumina coating, and/or alumina-titania coating). The electrically insulating coating may inhibit the currents in one jacket from affecting current in the other jacket or vice versa (for example, current in one jacket cancelling out current in the other jacket). Electrically insulating the jackets from each other may inhibit the turndown ratio of the heater from being reduced by the interaction of induced currents in the jackets.

[1044] Because core 542A and core 542B are electrically coupled in series to a single transformer (transformer 580), insulated conductor 574 may be located in a wellbore that terminates in the formation (for example, a wellbore with a single surface opening such as an L-shaped or J-shaped wellbore). Insulated conductor 574, as depicted in FIG. 126, may be operated as a subsurface termination induction heater with electrical connections between the heater and the power source (the transformer) being made through one surface opening.

[1045] Portions of jackets 540A,B in the overburden of the formation may be non-ferromagnetic to inhibit induction currents in the overburden portion of the jackets. Inhibiting induction currents in the overburden portion of the jackets inhibits inductive heating and/or power losses in the overburden. Induction effects in other structures in the overburden that surround insulated conductor 574 (for example, overburden casings) may be inhibited because the current in core 542A flows in an opposite direction from the current in core 542B.

[1046] FIG. 127 depicts a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of a multilayered insulated conductor that is used as an induction heater. Insulated conductor 574 includes core 542 surrounded by electrical insulator 534A and jacket 540A. Electrical insulator 534A and jacket 540A comprise a first layer of insulated conductor 574. The first layer is surrounded by a second layer that includes electrical insulator 534B and jacket 540B. Two layers of electrical insulators and jackets are shown in FIG. 127. The insulated conductor may include additional layers as desired. For example, the number of layers may be chosen to provide a desired heat output from the insulated conductor.

[1047] Jacket 540A and jacket 540B are electrically insulated from core 542 and each other by electrical insulator 534A and electrical insulator 534B. Thus, direct flow of current is inhibited between jacket 540A and jacket 540B and core 542. When current is applied to core 542, electrical current flow is induced in both jacket 540A and jacket 540B because of the ferromagnetic properties of the jackets. Having two or more layers of electrical insulators and jackets provides multiple current induction loops. The multiple current induction loops may effectively appear as electrical loads in series to a power source for insulated conductor 574. The multiple current induction loops may increase the heat generation per unit length of insulated conductor 574 as compared to an insulated conductor with only one current induction loop. For the same heat output, the insulated conductor with multiple layers may have a higher voltage and lower current as compared to the single layer insulated conductor.

[1048] In certain embodiments, jacket 540A and jacket 540B include the same ferromagnetic material. In some embodiments, jacket 540A and jacket 540B include different ferromagnetic materials. Properties of jacket 540A and jacket 540B may be varied to provide different heat outputs from the different layers. Examples of properties of jacket 540A and jacket 540B that may be varied include, but are not limited to, ferromagnetic material and thicknesses of the layers.

[1049] Electrical insulators 534A and 534B may be magnesium oxide, porcelain enamel, and/or another suitable electrical insulator. The thicknesses and/or materials of electrical insulators 534A and 534B may be varied to provide different operating parameters for insulated conductor 574.

[1050] FIG. 128 depicts an end view of an embodiment of three insulated conductors 574 located in a coiled tubing conduit and used as induction heaters. Insulated conductors 574 may each be, for example, the insulated conductor depicted in FIGS. 124, 123, and 127. The cores of insulated conductors 574 may be coupled to each other such that the insulated conductors are electrically coupled in a three-phase wye configuration. FIG. 129 depicts a representation of cores 542 of insulated conductors 574 being coupled together at their ends.

[1051] As shown in FIG. 128, insulated conductors 574 are located in tubular 702. Tubular 702 may be a coiled tubing conduit or other coiled tubing tubular or casing. Insulated conductors 574 may be in a spiral or helix formation inside tubular 702 to reduce stresses on the insulated conductors when the insulated conductors are coiled, for example, on a coiled tubing reel. Tubular 702 allows the insulated conductors to be installed in the formation using a coiled tubing rig and protects the insulated conductors during installation into the formation.

[1052] FIG. 130 depicts an end view of an embodiment of three insulated conductors 574 located on a support member and used as induction heaters. Insulated conductors 574 may each be, for example, the insulated conductor depicted in FIGS. 124, 123, and 127. The cores of insulated conductors 574 may be coupled to each other such that the insulated conductors are electrically coupled in a three-phase wye configuration. For example, the cores may be coupled together as shown in FIG. 129.

[1053] As shown in FIG. 130, insulated conductors 574 are coupled to support member 548. Support member 548 provides support for insulated conductors 574. Insulated conductors 574 may be wrapped around support member 548 in a spiral or helix formation. In some embodiments, support member 548 includes ferromagnetic material. Current flow may be induced in the ferromagnetic material of support member 548. Thus, support member 548 may generate some heat in addition to the heat generated in the jackets of insulated conductors 574.

[1054] In certain embodiments, insulated conductors 574 are held together on support member 548 with band 584. Band 584 may be stainless steel or another non-corrosive material. In some embodiments, band 584 includes a plurality of bands that hold together insulated conductors 574. The bands may be periodically placed around insulated conductors 574 to hold the conductors together.

[1055] In some embodiments, jacket 540, depicted in FIGS. 124 and 123, or jackets 540A,B, depicted in FIG. 126, include grooves or other structures on the outer surface and/or the inner surface of the jacket to increase the effective resistance of the jacket. Increasing the resistance of jacket 540 and/or jackets 540A,B with grooves increases the heat generation of the jackets as compared to jackets with smooth surfaces. Thus, the same electrical current in core 542 and/or cores 542A,B will provide more heat output in the grooved surface jackets than the smooth surface jackets.

[1056] In some embodiments, jacket 540, depicted in FIGS. 124 and 123, or jackets 540A,B, depicted in FIG. 126, are divided into sections to provide varying heat outputs along the length of the heaters. For example, jacket 540 and/or jackets 540A,B may be divided into sections such as tubular sections 702A, 702B, and 702C, depicted in FIG. 119. The sections of the jackets 540 depicted in FIGS. 124, 123, and 126 may have different properties to provide different heat outputs in each section. Examples of properties that may be varied include, but are not limited to, thicknesses, diameters, resistances, materials, number of grooves, depth of grooves. The different properties in the sections may provide different maximum operating temperatures (for example, different Curie temperatures or phase transformation temperatures) along the length of insulated conductor 574. The different maximum temperatures of the sections provides different heat outputs from the sections.

[1057] In some embodiments, portions of casings in the overburden sections of heater wellbores have surfaces that are shaped to increase the effective diameter of the casing. Casings in the overburden sections of heater wellbores may include, but not be limited to, overburden casings, heater casings, heater tubulars, and/or jackets of insulated conductors. Increasing the effective diameter of the casing may reduce inductive effects in the casing when current used to power heater(s) below the overburden is transmitted through the casing (for example, when one phase of power is being transmitted through the overburden section). When current is transmitted in only one direction through the overburden, the current may induce other currents in ferromagnetic or other electrically conductive materials such as those found in overburden casings. These induced currents may provide undesired power losses and/or undesired heating in the overburden of the formation.

[1058] FIG. 131 depicts an embodiment of casing 710 having a grooved or corrugated surface. In certain embodiments, casing 710 includes grooves 712. In some embodiments, grooves 712 are corrugations or include corrugations. Grooves 712 may be formed as a part of the surface of casing 710 (for example, the casing is formed with grooved surfaces) or the grooves may be formed by adding or removing (for example, milling) material on the surface of the casing. For example, grooves 712 may be located on a long piece of tubular that is welded to casing 710.

[1059] In certain embodiments, grooves 712 are on the outer surface of casing 710. In some embodiments, grooves 712 are on the inner surface of casing 710. In some embodiments, grooves 712 are on both the inner and outer surfaces of casing 710.

[1060] In certain embodiments, grooves 712 are axial grooves (grooves that go longitudinally along the length of casing 710). In certain embodiments, grooves 712 are straight, angled, or longitudinally spiral grooves or protrusions. In some embodiments, grooves 712 are substantially axial grooves or spiral grooves with a significant longitudinal component. In some embodiments, grooves 712 extend substantially axially along the length of casing 710. In some embodiments, grooves 712 are evenly spaced grooves along the surface of casing 710. Grooves 712 may have a variety of shapes as desired. For example, grooves 712 may have square edges, v-shaped edges, u-shaped edges, rectangular edges, or have rounded edges.

[1061] Grooves 712 increase the effective circumference of casing 710. Grooves 712 increase the effective circumference of casing 710 as compared to the circumference of a casing with the same inside and outside diameters and smooth surfaces. The depth of grooves 712 may be varied to provide a selected effective circumference of casing 710. For example, axial grooves that are ¼″ wide and ¼″ deep, and spaced ¼″ apart may increase the effective circumference of a 6″ (15.24 cm) diameter pipe from 18.84″ (47.85 cm) to 37.68″ (95.71 cm) (or the circumference of a 12″ (30.48 cm) diameter pipe).

[1062] In certain embodiments, grooves 712 increase the effective circumference of casing 710 by a factor of at least about 2 as compared to a casing with the same inside and outside diameters and smooth surfaces. In some embodiments, grooves 712 increase the effective circumference of casing 710 by a factor of at least about 3, at least about 4, or at least about 6 as compared to a casing with the same inside and outside diameters and smooth surfaces.

[1063] Increasing the effective circumference of casing 710 with grooves 712 increases the surface area of the casing. Increasing the surface area of casing 710 reduces the induced current in the casing for a given current flux. Power losses associated with inductive heating in casing 710 are reduced as compared to a casing with smooth surfaces because of the reduce induced current. Thus, the same electrical current will provide less heat output from inductive heating in the axial grooved surface casing than the smooth surface casing. Reducing the heat output in the overburden section of the heater will increase the efficiency of, and reduce the costs associated with, operating the heater. Increasing the effective circumference of casing 710 and reducing inductive effects in the casing allows the casing to be made with less expensive materials such as carbon steel.

[1064] In some embodiments, an electrically insulating coating (for example, a porcelain enamel coating) is placed on one or more surfaces of casing 710 to inhibit current and/or power losses from the casing. In some embodiments, casing 710 is formed from two or more longitudinal sections of casing (for example, longitudinal sections welded or threaded together end to end). The longitudinal sections may be aligned so that the grooves on the sections are aligned. Aligning the sections may allow for cement or other material to flow along the grooves.

[1065] In some embodiments, an insulated conductor heater is placed in the formation by itself and the outside of the insulated conductor heater is electrically isolated from the formation because the heater has little or no voltage potential on the outside of the heater. FIG. 132 depicts an embodiment of a single-ended, substantially horizontal insulated conductor heater that electrically isolates itself from the formation. In such an embodiment, heater 438 is insulated conductor 574. Insulated conductor 574 may be a mineral insulated conductor heater (for example, insulated conductor 574 depicted in FIGS. 133A and 133B). Insulated conductor 574 is located in opening 556 in hydrocarbon layer 484. In certain embodiments, opening 556 is an uncased or open wellbore. In some embodiments, opening 556 is a cased or lined wellbore. In some embodiments, insulated conductor heater 574 is a substantially u-shaped heater and is located in a substantially u-shaped opening.

[1066] Insulated conductor 574 has little or no current flowing along the outside surface of the insulated conductor so that the insulated conductor is electrically isolated from the formation and leaks little or no current into the formation. The outside surface (or jacket) of insulated conductor 574 is a metal or thermal radiating body so that heat is radiated from the insulated conductor to the formation.

[1067] FIGS. 133A and 133B depict cross-sectional representations of an embodiment of insulated conductor 574 that is electrically isolated on the outside of jacket 540. In certain embodiments, jacket 540 is made of ferromagnetic materials. In one embodiment, jacket 540 is made of 410 stainless steel. In other embodiments, jacket 540 is made of T/P91 or T/P92 stainless steel. In some embodiments, jacket 540 may include carbon steel. Core 542 is made of a highly conductive material such as copper or a copper alloy. Electrical insulator 534 is an electrically insulating material such as magnesium oxide. Insulated conductor 574 may be an inexpensive and easy to manufacture heater.

[1068] In the embodiment depicted in FIGS. 133A and 133B, core 542 brings current into the formation, as shown by the arrow. Core 542 and jacket 540 are electrically coupled at the distal end (bottom) of the heater. Current returns to the surface of the formation through jacket 540. The ferromagnetic properties of jacket 540 confine the current to the skin depth along the inside diameter of the jacket, as shown by arrows 714 in FIG. 133A. Jacket 540 has a thickness at least 2 or 3 times the skin depth of the ferromagnetic material used in the jacket at 25° C. and at the design current frequency so that most of the current is confined to the inside surface of the jacket and little or no current flows on the outside diameter of the jacket. Thus, there is little or no voltage potential on the outside of jacket 540. Having little or no voltage potential on the outside surface of insulated conductor 574 does not expose the formation to any high voltages, inhibits current leakage to the formation, and reduces or eliminates the need for isolation transformers, which decrease energy efficiency.

[1069] Because core 542 is made of a highly conductive material such as copper and jacket 540 is made of more resistive ferromagnetic material, a majority of the heat generated by insulated conductor 574 is generated in the jacket. Generating the majority of the heat in jacket 540 increases the efficiency of heat transfer from insulated conductor 574 to the formation over an insulated conductor (or other heater) that uses a core or a center conductor to generate the majority of the heat.

[1070] In certain embodiments, core 542 is made of copper. Using copper in core 542 allows the heating section of the heater and the overburden section to have identical core materials. Thus, the heater may be made from one long core assembly. The long single core assembly reduces or eliminates the need for welding joints in the core, which can be unreliable and susceptible to failure. Additionally, the long, single core assembly heater may be manufactured remote from the installation site and transported in a final assembly (ready to install assembly) to the installation site. The single core assembly also allows for long heater lengths (for example, about 1000 m or longer) depending on the breakdown voltage of the electrical insulator.

[1071] In certain embodiments, jacket 540 is made from two or more layers of the same materials and/or different materials. Jacket 540 may be formed from two or more layers to achieve thicknesses needed for the jacket (for example, to have a thickness at least 3 times the skin depth of the ferromagnetic material used in the jacket at 25° C. and at the design current frequency). Manufacturing and/or material limitations may limit the thickness of a single layer of jacket material. For example, the amount each layer can be strained during manufacturing (forming) the layer on the heater may limit the thickness of each layer. Thus, to reach jacket thicknesses needed for certain embodiments of insulated conductor 574, jacket 540 may be formed from several layers of jacket material. For example, three layers of T/P92 stainless steel may be used to form jacket 540 with a thickness of about 3 times the skin depth of the T/P92 stainless steel at 25° C. and at the design current frequency.

[1072] In some embodiments, jacket 540 includes two or more different materials. In some embodiments, jacket 540 includes different materials in different layers of the jacket. For example, jacket 540 may have one or more inner layers of ferromagnetic material chosen for their electrical and/or electromagnetic properties and one or more outer layers chosen for its non-corrosive properties.

[1073] In some embodiments, the thickness of jacket 540 and/or the material of the jacket are varied along the heater length. The thickness and/or material of jacket 540 may be varied to vary electrical properties and/or mechanical properties along the length of the heater. For example, the thickness and/or material of jacket 540 may be varied to vary the turndown ratio or the Curie temperature along the length of the heater. In some embodiments, the inner layer of jacket 540 includes copper or other highly conductive metals in the overburden section of the heater. The inner layer of copper limits heat losses in the overburden section of the heater.

[1074] FIGS. 134 and 135 depict an embodiment of insulated conductor 574 inside tubular 702. Insulated conductor 574 may include core 542, electrical insulator 534, and jacket 540. Core 542 and jacket 540 may be electrically coupled (shorted) at a distal end of the insulated conductor. FIG. 136 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the distal end of insulated conductor 574 inside tubular 702. Endcap 630 may electrically couple core 542 and jacket 540 to tubular 702 at the distal end of insulated conductor 574 and the tubular. Endcap 630 may include electrical conducting materials such as copper or steel.

[1075] In certain embodiments, core 542 is copper, electrical insulator 534 is magnesium oxide, and jacket 540 is non-ferromagnetic stainless steel (for example, 347H stainless steel, 204-Cu stainless steel, or 204 M stainless steel). Insulated conductor 574 may be placed in tubular 702 to protect the insulated conductor, increase heat transfer to the formation, and/or allow for coiled tubing or continuous installation of the insulated conductor. Tubular 702 may be made of ferromagnetic material such as 410 stainless steel, T/P91 stainless steel, or carbon steel. In certain embodiments, tubular 702 is made of corrosion resistant materials. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is made of non-ferromagnetic materials.

[1076] In certain embodiments, jacket 540 of insulated conductor 574 is longitudinally welded to tubular 702 along weld joint 716, as shown in FIG. 135. The longitudinal weld may be a laser weld, a tandem GTAW (gas tungsten arc welding) weld, or an electron beam weld that welds the surface of jacket 540 to tubular 702. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is made from a longitudinal strip of metal. Tubular 702 may be made by rolling the longitudinal strip to form a cylindrical tube and then welding the longitudinal ends of the strip together to make the tubular.

[1077] In certain embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is welded to tubular 702 as the longitudinal ends of the strip are welded together (in the same welding process). For example, insulated conductor 574 is placed along one of the longitudinal ends of the strip so that jacket 540 is welded to tubular 702 at the location where the ends are welded together. In some embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is welded to one of the longitudinal ends of the strip before the strip is rolled to form the cylindrical tube. The ends of the strip may then be welded to form tubular 702.

[1078] In some embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is welded to tubular 702 at another location (for example, at a circumferential location away from the weld joining the ends of the strip used to form the tubular). For example, jacket 540 of insulated conductor 574 may be welded to tubular 702 diametrically opposite from where the longitudinal ends of the strip used to form the tubular are welded. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is made of multiple strips of material that are rolled together and coupled (for example, welded) to form the tubular with a desired thickness. Using more than one strip of metal may be easier to roll into the cylindrical tube used to form the tubular.

[1079] Jacket 540 and tubular 702 may be electrically and mechanically coupled at weld joint 716. Longitudinally welding jacket 540 to tubular 702 inhibits arcing between insulated conductor 574 and the tubular. Tubular 702 may return electrical current from core 542 along the inside of the tubular if the tubular is ferromagnetic. If tubular 702 is non-ferromagnetic, a thin electrically insulating layer such as a porcelain enamel coating or a spray coated ceramic may be put on the outside of the tubular to inhibit current leakage from the tubular into the formation. In some embodiments, a fluid is placed in tubular 702 to increase heat transfer between insulated conductor 574 and the tubular and/or to inhibit arcing between the insulated conductor and the tubular. Examples of fluids include, but are not limited to, thermally conductive gases such as helium, carbon dioxide, or steam. Fluids may also include fluids such as oil, molten metals, or molten salts (for example, solar salt (60% NaNO₃/40% KNO₃)). In some embodiments, heat transfer fluids are transported inside tubular 702 and heated inside the tubular (in the space between the tubular and insulated conductor 574). In some embodiments, an optical fiber, thermocouple, or other temperature sensor is placed inside tubular 702.

[1080] In certain embodiments, the heater depicted in FIGS. 134, 135, and 136 is energized with AC current (or time-varying electrical current). A majority of the heat is generated in tubular 702 when the heater is energized with AC current. If tubular 702 is ferromagnetic and the wall thickness of the tubular is at least about twice the skin depth at 25° C. and at the design current frequency, then the heater will operate as a temperature limited heater. Generating the majority of the heat in tubular 702 improves heat transfer to the formation as compared to a heater that generates a majority of the heat in the insulated conductor.

[1081] FIGS. 134 and 135 depict an embodiment of insulated conductor 574 inside tubular 702. Insulated conductor 574 may include core 542, electrical insulator 534, and jacket 540. Core 542 and jacket 540 may be electrically coupled (shorted) at a distal end of the insulated conductor. FIG. 136 depicts a cross-sectional representation of an embodiment of the distal end of insulated conductor 574 inside tubular 702. Endcap 630 may electrically couple core 542 and jacket 540 to tubular 702 at the distal end of insulated conductor 574 and the tubular. Endcap 630 may include electrical conducting materials such as copper or steel.

[1082] In certain embodiments, core 542 is copper, electrical insulator 534 is magnesium oxide, and jacket 540 is non-ferromagnetic stainless steel (for example, 347H stainless steel, 204-Cu stainless steel, or 204 M stainless steel). Insulated conductor 574 may be placed in tubular 702 to protect the insulated conductor, increase heat transfer to the formation, and/or allow for coiled tubing or continuous installation of the insulated conductor. Tubular 702 may be made of ferromagnetic material such as 410 stainless steel, T/P91 stainless steel, or carbon steel. In certain embodiments, tubular 702 is made of corrosion resistant materials. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is made of non-ferromagnetic materials.

[1083] In certain embodiments, jacket 540 of insulated conductor 574 is longitudinally welded to tubular 702 along weld joint 716, as shown in FIG. 135. The longitudinal weld may be a laser weld, a tandem GTAW (gas tungsten arc welding) weld, or an electron beam weld that welds the surface of jacket 540 to tubular 702. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is made from a longitudinal strip of metal. Tubular 702 may be made by rolling the longitudinal strip to form a cylindrical tube and then welding the longitudinal ends of the strip together to make the tubular.

[1084] In certain embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is welded to tubular 702 as the longitudinal ends of the strip are welded together (in the same welding process). For example, insulated conductor 574 is placed along one of the longitudinal ends of the strip so that jacket 540 is welded to tubular 702 at the location where the ends are welded together. In some embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is welded to one of the longitudinal ends of the strip before the strip is rolled to form the cylindrical tube. The ends of the strip may then be welded to form tubular 702.

[1085] In some embodiments, insulated conductor 574 is welded to tubular 702 at another location (for example, at a circumferential location away from the weld joining the ends of the strip used to form the tubular). For example, jacket 540 of insulated conductor 574 may be welded to tubular 702 diametrically opposite from where the longitudinal ends of the strip used to form the tubular are welded. In some embodiments, tubular 702 is made of multiple strips of material that are rolled together and coupled (for example, welded) to form the tubular with a desired thickness. Using more than one strip of metal may be easier to roll into the cylindrical tube used to form the tubular.

[1086] Jacket 540 and tubular 702 may be electrically and mechanically coupled at weld joint 716. Longitudinally welding jacket 540 to tubular 702 inhibits arcing between insulated conductor 574 and the tubular. Tubular 702 may return electrical current from core 542 along the inside of the tubular if the tubular is ferromagnetic. If tubular 702 is non-ferromagnetic, a thin electrically insulating layer such as a porcelain enamel coating or a spray coated ceramic may be put on the outside of the tubular to inhibit current leakage from the tubular. In some embodiments, a fluid is placed in tubular 702 to increase heat transfer between insulated conductor 574 and the tubular and/or to inhibit arcing between the insulated conductor and the tubular. Examples of fluids include, but are not limited to, conductive gases such as helium, molten metals, and molten salts. In some embodiments, heat transfer fluids are transported inside tubular 702 and heated inside the tubular (in the space between the tubular and insulated conductor 574). In some embodiments, an optical fiber, thermocouple, or other temperature sensor is placed inside tubular 702.

[1087] In certain embodiments, the heater depicted in FIGS. 134, 135, and 136 is energized with AC current (or time-varying electrical current). A majority of the heat is generated in tubular 702 when the heater is energized with AC current. If tubular 702 is ferromagnetic and the wall thickness of the tubular is at least about twice the skin depth at a temperature near the Curie temperature (for example, 50° C. below the Curie temperature), then the heater will operate as a temperature limited heater. Generating the majority of the heat in tubular 702 improves heat transfer to the formation as compared to a heater that generates a majority of the heat in the insulated conductor.

[1088] In certain embodiments, portions of the wellbore that extend through the overburden include casings. The casings may include materials that inhibit inductive effects in the casings. Inhibiting inductive effects in the casings may inhibit induced currents in the casing and/or reduce heat losses to the overburden. In some embodiments, the overburden casings may include non-metallic materials such as fiberglass, polyvinylchloride (PVC), chlorinated PVC (CPVC), high-density polyethylene (HDPE), high temperature polymers (such as nitrogen based polymers), or other high temperature plastics. HDPEs with working temperatures in a usable range include HDPEs available from Dow Chemical Co., Inc. (Midland, Mich., U.S.A.). The overburden casings may be made of materials that are spoolable so that the overburden casings can be spooled into the wellbore. In some embodiments, overburden casings may include non-magnetic metals such as aluminum or non-magnetic alloys such as manganese steels having at least 10% manganese, iron aluminum alloys with at least 18% aluminum, or austentitic stainless steels such as 304 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel. In some embodiments, overburden casings may include carbon steel or other ferromagnetic material coupled on the inside diameter to a highly conductive non-ferromagnetic metal (for example, copper or aluminum) to inhibit inductive effects or skin effects. In some embodiments, overburden casings are made of inexpensive materials that may be left in the formation (sacrificial casings).

[1089] In certain embodiments, wellheads for the wellbores may be made of one or more non-ferromagnetic materials. FIG. 137 depicts an embodiment of wellhead 718. The components in the wellheads may include fiberglass, PVC, CPVC, HDPE, high temperature polymers (such as nitrogen based polymers), and/or non-magnetic alloys or metals. Some materials (such as polymers) may be extruded into a mold or reaction injection molded (RIM) into the shape of the wellhead. Forming the wellhead from a mold may be a less expensive method of making the wellhead and save in capital costs for providing wellheads to a treatment site. Using non-ferromagnetic materials in the wellhead may inhibit undesired heating of components in the wellhead. Ferromagnetic materials used in the wellhead may be electrically and/or thermally insulated from other components of the wellhead. In some embodiments, an inert gas (for example, nitrogen or argon) is purged inside the wellhead and/or inside of casings to inhibit reflux of heated gases into the wellhead and/or the casings.